USER GUIDE
Intellectual property notices
After you open the drive, double-click the file Open Source Information.pdf.
© 2011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is
subject to change without notice. Adobe, Adobe Acrobat, and the Adobe Acrobat logo are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Amazon and Kindle are trademarks of
Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used
by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Facebook is a registered trademark of
Facebook, Inc. Google, Gmail, and YouTube are trademarks of Google, Inc. LinkedIn and
the LinkedIn logo are registered trademarks of LinkedIn Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries. Microsoft, ActiveSync, Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint, Windows, and
Windows Vista are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. Quickoffice is a
registered trademark of Quickoffice, Inc. Skype is a trademark of Skype, Inc. Yahoo! and
Yahoo! Mail are registered trademarks of Yahoo! Inc. All other brand and product names
are or may be trademarks of their respective owners. All screen images simulated.
Recycling and disposal
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Hewlett-Packard Company and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss
resulting from the use of this guide. Hewlett-Packard Company and its suppliers assume no
responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may arise through the use of this
software. Hewlett-Packard Company and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any
damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or
repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect
against data loss.
Patent pending. This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.
Screen images simulated. Internet access within wireless coverage area only. Wi-Fi within
range of 802.11a/b/g/n Wi-Fi network. Some Wi-Fi hotspots may require fee for usage.
Not all web content may be available. Email and related information required for setup and
activation.
Open Source License information
You can view the Open Source License terms on your device. Press Center
the Launcher icon. Tap Adobe Reader
and then tap
. Tap Open Source Information.pdf.
You can also view the file on your computer. Connect your device to your computer with the
USB cable. On your device, tap USB Drive. On your computer, locate and double-click the
removable drive named for your device. To locate the drive, do the following for your
operating system:
• Windows Vista/Windows 7: Open Computer.
• Windows XP: Open My Computer.
• Mac: Open Finder.
• Linux (Ubuntu): The drive is displayed on the desktop.
• Other Linux distribution: The location of the drive may vary by system.
This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household
waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing
over your waste equipment to designated collection, please contact your
household waste disposal service.
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges,
and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to
www.hp.com/recycle.
v. 1.0
Contents
Chapter 1
Welcome
7
8
9
Chapter 2
Get to know your device
Charge the battery
Set up your device
Turn your device on/off
Use gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch
Update the HP webOS operating system
41
43
44
Chapter 5
26
27
27
Just Type overview
Look up a contact
Find information in an application on your device
Search the web
Create a new item such as a message, calendar
event, or memo
Open an application
Repeat a recent search
Customize Just Type
48
Work with applications
29
30
50
50
51
52
Chapter 6
Use the menus
Enter and save information
Close an application or application screen
Delete an application
Manage applications in Card view
Customize the app display in the Launcher and
Quick Launch
Manage online accounts
View and work with notifications
Create and work with favorites
Copy files and sync your personal data
47
Just Type
23
23
24
25
25
Chapter 4
Your HP TouchPad
What’s in the box?
Where can I learn more?
Basics
11
13
14
16
17
20
Chapter 3
31
33
37
38
38
39
Copy files between your device and your
computer
Overview: Get your personal data onto your
device
Transfer data from an existing HP webOS Account
Get data from an online account in the cloud
Sync your desktop organizer and your device
Export data from a desktop organizer on your
computer
Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
53
64
67
71
Email
Messaging: All messages in one application
Messaging: Instant messaging
Messaging: Text messaging
Open applications
Resize panels/display or hide levels in an app
Contents
3
Chapter 7
Photos, videos, and music
73
77
78
78
Chapter 8
Web
85
89
Chapter 9
Photos & Videos
HP Movie Store
YouTube
Music
Web
Maps
Contacts, Calendar, and other personal
information
93
101
107
108
Contacts
Calendar
Memos
Facebook Tablet
Chapter 10 Documents and eBooks
111 Quickoffice
114 Adobe Reader
116 Amazon Kindle
Chapter 11 Phone & Video Calls
119 How can I make and receive calls with my HP
TouchPad?
119 Use Skype voice and video calling
124 Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP
webOS smartphone
129 Listen to voicemail messages
129 View your call history
130 Work with favorites
131 Save a phone number to Contacts
131 Use a phone headset
133 Customize Phone & Video Calls settings
4
Contents
Chapter 12 HP webOS App Catalog and Software
Manager
135
136
137
138
138
139
139
139
140
Browse applications in HP webOS App Catalog
Download a free application
Buy an application
Reinstall a deleted application
Set up a billing account
Set billing account preferences
Update or delete a billing account
Manage applications with Software Manager
Update a downloaded application from a
notification
140 Manually check for application updates
Chapter 13 Preferences
143
148
148
151
153
154
155
Backup
Date & Time
Device Info
Exhibition
Regional Settings
Screen & Lock
Sounds & Ringtones
Chapter 14 Wireless connections
159
162
163
165
166
168
Wi-Fi
Print Manager
VPN
Location Services
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Touch to Share
Chapter 15 Troubleshooting
171 5Ts: Ways to get your HP TouchPad working
again
173 HP webOS Account
176 Battery
177 Screen and performance
178
179
181
181
182
183
186
187
187
190
191
191
192
193
194
Synchronization
Email
Messaging
Wi-Fi
Web
Calendar and Contacts
Photos & Videos, and Music
Print Manager
HP webOS App Catalog
Using your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS
smartphone
Transferring information to and from your
computer
Backing up and restoring data
System Updates
Hands-free devices
Making room on your device
A
Terms
B
Online accounts available for webOS devices
C
Specifications
D
Important safety and legal information
E
Use Adobe search
Contents
5
6
Contents
1 Welcome
7
8
9
Your HP TouchPad
What’s in the box?
Where can I learn more?
Your HP TouchPad
NOTE When referring to the company that makes your HP TouchPad, this
document uses both the terms HP and Palm. HP and Palm are the same
company; the use of both terms reflects company terminology.
In one compact and indispensable device, you now have all of the
following:
• An advanced wireless device running the HP webOS platform
• A large 9.7 inch (246.3mm) screen for easy, full-color viewing of photos
and videos, web pages, email messages, and more
• A full suite of organizer applications, including Contacts, Calendar,
and Memos
• Wi-Fi capability
• A front-facing camera for video calling
• GPS functionality
• Applications to view and manage Microsoft Office and Adobe PDF files
• HP webOS App Catalog, from which you can download applications
designed for your device; select from an ever-expanding list of
applications
• Seamless interoperability with many HP webOS smartphones, including
call management directly from your HP TouchPad.
Your HP TouchPad puts HP webOS—a multitasking, gesture-based
operating system—inside a thin, beautiful device with a virtual keyboard
that you can bring up whenever you need it. Here are a few highlights of
your new device.
Gestures: On your HP TouchPad, you move around and manage your
applications and info by making simple gestures on the touchscreen. For
more information, see Use gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch. Carry
the Navigation Guide (included in the box with your HP TouchPad)
around with you and you’ll soon know the most important gestures by
heart.
Multitasking: You can have many applications open at once and easily
move among them. Go to the Launcher to open apps. See the lineup of
your open apps in Card view. Tap an app to bring it into the foreground
and work with it. For more information, see Open applications.
Just Type: Need to look up Ed’s work number? Just go to Card view, tap
Just type, and type ed. If he’s listed in your Contacts, you can get his
numbers from the search results. Just Type works just as fast when you
need to search the web, find info in an application on your device, start
an action such as creating an email message or memo, or update your
status on social networking sites such as Facebook or Twitter. For more
information, see Just Type.
The HP Synergy feature: The HP Synergy feature works in the background
to gather your information from the various online sources where you keep
it and then display that information in a single view on your device. You
can access your info quickly without having to remember where you
stored it.
Chapter 1 : Welcome
7
For example, suppose you have a Google account for personal email,
contacts, and calendar events, and an Exchange account for your
corporate email, contacts, and events. The Email, Contacts, and Calendar
applications on your HP TouchPad all provide a view in which you can
see information from both of those accounts in one place—but even
though the information is brought into one view, the sources of that
information are kept separate. For more information, read about linked
contacts, layered calendars, and the single inbox for your email in
Contacts, Calendar, and Email.
What’s in the box?
All of the following items are included in the device box.
Hardware
NOTE See Online accounts available for webOS devices for the current list of
online accounts that you can set up on your device and for information about
the behavior of these accounts.
Sync: Your HP TouchPad gives you synchronization without a cable. You
can sync with online services so that you can store and sync your info in
online accounts. For more information, see Get data from an online
account in the cloud.
Your HP webOS Account: When you set up your device, you create an HP
webOS Account by entering a valid email address. Use this account to
create and store contacts and calendar events. Your HP webOS Account
also gives you access to services like automatic updates and automatic,
frequent backups of any of your info that is stored only on your device
and isn’t synchronized with an online account (see What information is
backed up?).
Touch to Share: If you have a web page open on your HP TouchPad or on
a webOS smartphone, simply touch the devices to transfer the page from
one device to the other. If your smartphone and your HP TouchPad use the
same HP webOS Account, you can also touch the two to create a
Bluetooth pairing between them. After the devices are paired, not only
can you touch to share web pages, but you can also make and receive
calls, and send and receive text messages, right on your HP TouchPad
(see Touch to Share).
WARNING Please refer to Important safety and legal information for
information that helps you safely use your device. Failure to read and follow the
important safety information in this guide may result in property damage,
serious bodily injury, or death.
8
Chapter 1 : Welcome
•
•
•
•
•
HP TouchPad
USB cable (charging and data transfer cable)
AC charger
Screen cleaning cloth
Standard lithium-ion battery (installed and nonremovable)
DID YOU KNOW? The USB cable included with your device is used both to
charge your device battery (see Charge the battery) and to connect your device
to your computer as a removable USB drive (see Copy files between your device
and your computer). To simplify charging, you can purchase an HP Touchstone
(sold separately).
Print material
•
•
•
•
Getting Started guide
Navigation Guide
Limited Warranty
General User Guide: Important Safety and Legal Information
• To view Help topics for a single application: Open the
application, open the application menu, and tap Help. Here is an
example from the Web app:
Where can I learn more?
• On-device Help: Read short how-tos and watch animations on your new
device.
• To view all Help: Open Help
.
• Tools available from online support: Visit hpwebos.com/support to
access the 200+ page User Guide (this guide) detailing every facet of
your device. On the support site you can also edit your HP webOS
Account settings and watch how-to animations.
TIP If you’re at a computer, we recommend using the User Guide to get
information about your device. If you’re working on your HP TouchPad, use the
on-device Help.
• Peer-to-peer support: Visit forums.hpwebos.com to share your
experiences and get help and advice from fellow customers.
• Self-paced learning guides: Visit learning.hpwebos.com to take a free
online tutorial about your new device. Available in English only.
Chapter 1 : Welcome
9
10
Chapter 1 : Welcome
2 Basics
11
13
14
16
17
20
Get to know your device
Charge the battery
Set up your device
Turn your device on/off
Use gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch
Update the HP webOS operating system
Get to know your device
Front view
1
2
3
4
5
6
Stereo speakers
Front-facing camera
Volume
Touchscreen: Tap and make other gestures directly on the screen. See Touchscreen.
Center: Press to display Card view. see Manage applications in Card view.
Charger/microUSB connector: Connect the small end of the USB cable to charge your
device battery (see Charge the battery) or copy files (see Copy files between your device
and your computer).
Chapter 2 : Basics
11
3 Quick Launch: Bar containing up to five icons for the apps you use most, plus an icon to
NOTE The volume you set for each individual audio component is saved
automatically, whether the audio component is a wired headset, a wireless
headset that uses Bluetooth® wireless technology, the built-in stereo speakers,
and so on. When you return to using an audio component, the audio plays at
the volume you left it the last time you used that component.
open the Launcher. You can customize the apps that appear in Quick Launch. See Open
an application in Quick Launch and Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch.
The Launcher
Touchscreen
TIP Be careful not to scratch, crush, or apply too much pressure on the
touchscreen. Do not store your device in a place where other items might
damage it. Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or aerosols to clean
the device or its accessories. Do not expose your device to extreme heat or cold
(see Specifications for temperature info).
Card view
1 Application name: Displays the name of the currently open application. Drag down over
or tap the app name to open the application menu.
2 Page name: Tap a name to jump to a different page.
3 Launcher: See Open an application in the Launcher.
4 Quick Launch: Bar containing up to five icons for the apps you use most, plus an icon to
open the Launcher. You can customize the apps that appear in Quick Launch. See Open
an application in Quick Launch and Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch.
5 System icons: Show the status of wireless service connections, battery strength, and other
system functions (see Icons in the title bar). Drag down over or tap the icons to open the
system menu.
6 Notification icons: Show new email messages, alarms, and more. Drag down over or tap
the icons to view notification details. See View and work with notifications.
1 Just Type field: Tap here and then type some text to look for, create, or use information on
your device, without needing to go to a specific app. See Just Type.
2 Wallpaper: The background image in Card view. You can customize your wallpaper. See
Change your wallpaper.
12
Chapter 2 : Basics
Icons in the title bar
Top view
Table 1. Title bar icons and descriptions
Item
Description
The battery is being charged.
The battery is fully charged.
The battery is low. See Charge the battery.
Airplane mode is turned on. This means that the Wi-Fi,
VPN, and Bluetooth® wireless technology features are off.
See Turn wireless services off (airplane mode).
Wi-Fi is turned on. The number of filled-in bars denotes
signal strength. See Wi-Fi.
The device is searching for a Wi-Fi network.
Bluetooth® wireless technology is turned on. See
Bluetooth® wireless technology.
A Bluetooth connection is in progress.
A Bluetooth connection has been made.
Your device is performing a search on the characters you
entered. If you accessed Just Type from Card view, your
device conducts a global search on your device (see Just
Type). If you are in an application such as Contacts or
Memos, your device searches for items within the app that
match the search term you entered.
1 3.5mm headset jack
2 Power: Press to wake up or turn off the screen. Press and hold to turn wireless services on
and off or turn your device completely on and off.
3 Microphone
Charge the battery
When the battery is very low, the battery
icon in the upper-right corner
of the screen changes to red. When the battery is fully charged, the icon
appears full and changes to green .
Before you begin the setup process, we recommend that you charge your
device until the battery
icon in the upper-right corner of the screen is
full to ensure that the battery is fully charged.
WARNING Use only chargers that are approved by HP with your device.
Failure to use a charger approved by HP may increase the risk that your device
will overheat, catch fire, or explode, resulting in property damage, serious
bodily injury, or death. Use of unapproved third-party power supply accessories
may damage the device and void the Limited Warranty for the product.
Rotation lock is turned on (see Use the system menu).
System sounds are turned off (see Use the system menu).
WARNING Never remove the back cover of your HP TouchPad. The battery is
built in to your device and is not removable.
See Maximizing battery life for tips on making your battery’s power last
longer.
Chapter 2 : Basics
13
1
Attach the small end of the USB cable to the charger/microUSB
connector. The silver circle on the cable faces the front of the device.
• Shut down the device completely when you won’t be using it for an
extended period of time (see Shut down your device).
TIP If you think that the battery needs to be replaced, see I need to replace the
battery for instructions.
Set up your device
2
Connect the other end of the USB cable to the AC charger.
3
Plug the AC charger into a working outlet.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure the battery is fully charged (see Charge the
battery).
1
Press and hold the power button on the upper-right corner of your
device until you see a logo on the screen (approximately five
seconds).
2
Follow the onscreen instructions to complete setup. If you need to
start setup over, tap Start Over in the lower-left corner of any screen.
Maximizing battery life
The battery in your device cannot be removed.
Battery life depends on how you use your device. You can maximize the
life of your battery by following a few easy guidelines:
• Charge your device whenever you can. Charge it overnight.
• Set your screen to turn off automatically after a shorter period of
inactivity (see Set the interval for turning the screen off automatically).
• Keep your battery away from direct sunlight and other sources of heat.
Temperatures over 104 degrees Fahrenheit (40 degrees Celsius) can
permanently reduce the capacity and life span of any lithium-ion
battery.
• If you set up an email account in the Email application, set the interval
to automatically download email to every two hours or less frequently
(see Enter advanced account settings).
• Lower the screen brightness (see Turn auto dim on/off).
• Keep in mind that frequent use of instant messaging (IM) can reduce
battery life. Sign out of your IM account when you are not using it (see
Sign out of an IM account).
14
Chapter 2 : Basics
NOTE At the beginning of setup, you select a language for your device. This
language sets the default formats for currency, date and time, and so on. If your
country is not displayed, or you want to use a different format, complete setup
and then do the following: Open Regional Settings. Tap Formats and select
your region. For more information, see Change the display formats.
3
When the list of available Wi-Fi networks appears, tap the network
you want. If prompted, enter the network username and/or
password and tap Sign In. If the network name doesn’t appear, see
Connect to a new secure network for instructions on connecting to a
hidden network.
4
When the HP webOS Account screen appears, do one of the
following:
• If you are a new user: Tap Create New Account. To create an HP
webOS Account, enter a working email address, create a
password for your account, and select and answer a security
question.
IMPORTANT You must enter a valid email address to access all the features
available on your device. Note that entering an email address here does not set
up your device to send and receive messages from that email account; you must
do that separately (see Email).
What is an HP webOS Account?
If you create a new HP webOS Account, write down the email
address and password that you enter; you will need them later. Later,
look for an email at the address you used to create your HP webOS
Account. Click the link in the email to verify your HP webOS
Account.
• If you have an HP webOS Account that you use with another HP
webOS device, and you want to use it on your HP TouchPad: Enter
the email address and password for your existing account, and
tap Sign In.
5
If you chose to sign in to an existing HP webOS Account: If
prompted, select whether to do a one-time transfer of the data stored
in the existing HP webOS Account to your new HP TouchPad. If you
have more than one device already associated with this account,
select the device you want to use as the source for the transfer.
NOTE If you use the same HP webOS Account with two devices, after the
one-time data transfer, info you enter into the HP webOS Account on one device
is not synchronized between the devices. You need to enter the info in both
places.
6
If you see a notification that an update is available, tap Install Now
to install it. HP periodically sends updates to the applications and
features on your device. The installation process may take up to 20
minutes.
Your device is ready to use.
Your HP webOS Account gives you the following benefits:
• Automatic system and software updates are sent to your device.
• An HP webOS Account is automatically created for you on your device.
In this account you can store Contacts and Calendar info that you don’t
store in online accounts like Google or Exchange.
NOTE You cannot access HP webOS Account data on the account website.
You can access the data on your device only.
• Info stored in your HP webOS Account, as well as info you have in
applications on your device (like Memos), is automatically backed up to
the webOS servers.
• If your device is lost or stolen, open the web browser on your computer,
sign in to your HP webOS Account on hpwebos.com/account, and do
a remote erase of the info on the device.
NOTE If you want to erase data on your device while you are still in possession
of the device—for example, before you give it to someone else—don’t do a
remote erase. Instead, do a partial or full erase of the device itself (see Erase
data and reset your device).
For detailed information about your HP webOS Account, see Backup.
Chapter 2 : Basics
15
Although you create an HP webOS Account by entering a valid email
address, setting up an HP webOS Account is different from setting up
email on your device. To set up email, see Set up email. To change your
HP webOS Account information after you set it up, see Update your HP
webOS Account settings.
Turn the screen on/off
To turn the screen on, do one of the following:
• Press the power button. Drag
up to unlock the screen.
Turn your device on/off
Your device’s screen can be turned on and off separately from its wireless
app, and VPN
services (which are the Wi-Fi
app, Bluetooth®
app). This means you can wake up the screen to use just the organizer
features of your device (Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and so on) without
turning on the wireless features. Also, when the screen is turned off,
wireless services can be on.
* Power
• Press Center
Why the screen goes dark
When the device is on and idle, the screen first dims and then turns off.
This is normal behavior, caused by the auto shut-off interval. You can
adjust this auto shut-off interval to be as long as 10 minutes (see Set the
interval for turning the screen off automatically). At first, the screen dims
as a power-saving measure. Just tap the screen to brighten it. Then, if your
device remains inactive for the full interval you set, the screen turns itself
off. Press the power button to turn the screen back on.
NOTE If you can’t turn the screen back on, see The screen appears blank for
instructions.
. Drag
up to unlock the screen.
To turn the screen off, press the power button.
NOTE Pressing the power button to turn the screen off also works when your
device is placed on a Touchstone (sold separately).
Turn wireless services off (airplane mode)
Airplane mode turns off your device’s wireless services (which are the
app). Use airplane
Wi-Fi
app, VPN
app, and Bluetooth®
mode when you are on a plane or anywhere else you need to turn off all
wireless services. You can’t browse the web, but you can still use apps like
Calendar, Contacts, Photos & Videos, Music, Quickoffice® mobile office
software, and Adobe Reader.
Do one of the following:
• Tap the upper-right corner of any screen to open the system menu. Tap
Turn on Airplane Mode.
• Press and hold the power button and tap Airplane Mode.
16
Chapter 2 : Basics
When your device is in airplane mode, the airplane mode
icon
appears at the top of every screen, and Airplane Mode appears in the
upper-left corner of the screen in the Card view.
* These indicate that wireless services are off (airplane mode).
Shut down your device
Usually, turning your device off and/or putting it in airplane mode is
sufficient for normal periods when you have the device with you but you’re
not using it. On rare occasions, however, you may want to put your
device into deep sleep because you are not going to use it for an
extended period. At those times, shut down the screen and wireless
services completely by doing one of the following:
• Open Device Info
and tap Reset Options. Tap Shut Down, and tap
Shut Down again.
• Press and hold the power button and tap Shut Down.
Turn wireless services on
When you turn off airplane mode, any wireless services that were on
previously are turned back on automatically.
• To turn off airplane mode, tap the upper-right corner of any screen to
open the system menu, and tap Turn off Airplane Mode.
• Press and hold the power button and tap Turn off Airplane Mode.
When your device is in airplane mode, you can turn the Wi-Fi, VPN, and
Bluetooth features on individually (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off, VPN, and Turn
the Bluetooth feature on/off). Note that to make a VPN connection while
your device is in airplane mode, you must first connect to a Wi-Fi network.
When wireless services are turned on, HP webOS appears in the
upper-left of the screen in Card view. If Wi-Fi is turned on, the Wi-Fi
icon also appears.
NOTE When you turn everything off, the device’s alarms and notifications are
also turned off.
To turn both the screen and wireless services back on, press and hold the
power button until a logo appears onscreen.
Use gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch
Gestures are an important, basic part of your device. They’re easy to
learn, and they make working with the device fast. You make most
gestures with one finger. For a few, you need two. Make gestures with the
tip of your finger. Do not use your fingernail. Don’t bear down.
You make gestures on the touchscreen.
* These indicate that data services are on.
Chapter 2 : Basics
17
Tap
becomes transparent; an icon in the Launcher is ready to be dragged
when a border appears around it.
Tap with the tip of the finger, not the fingernail. Tap fast and firmly, and
then immediately lift your fingertip off the screen. Don’t bear down on
what you’re tapping. Don’t wait for a response; the response comes after
you lift your finger. Don’t linger on the gesture; a tap takes a split second
to do.
Flick
Swipe
This is a quick gesture, great for scrolling long lists, documents, or pages.
Do it fast, do it lightly; as with a swipe, your fingertip just skims the
surface. The faster you flick, the faster and farther you scroll up or down a
list.
A swipe is a horizontal gesture, from right to left or left to right. Do it fast,
do it lightly. In a swipe, your fingertip just skims the surface of the
touchscreen.
Close an application screen: To close an application screen in Card view,
flick the card up toward the top of the touchscreen. This is called throwing
the card off the top of the screen.
Drag
Drag is the gesture you make for a slow scroll up and down, such as in a
list, in a document, or on a web page. Slide your fingertip slowly along
the surface—no need to bear down.
Drag and drop: Tap and hold the item. Wait until you get a visual cue that
the item is ready to be dragged, and then drag it. Lift your finger to drop
it. For example, a card in Card view is ready to be dragged when it
18
Chapter 2 : Basics
Delete a list item: In some applications, such as Email, Messaging, Music,
and Bluetooth, you can throw a list item off the side of the screen to delete
the item.
Throw the item off the side of the screen. If prompted, tap Delete to
confirm the deletion.
If you can’t delete a list item by throwing it, open the item and look in the
application menu for a Delete menu item.
TIP To delete multiple list items, throw each one off the screen. If you get the
Delete confirmation prompt after throwing the first item, you don’t need to tap
it—just throw the second item, and the first deletion is confirmed automatically.
Zoom out/pinch in to decrease the size of items on the screen (for
example, in Email, Web, Photos & Videos, Quickoffice® mobile office
software, Adobe Reader, and Maps): Place two fingers on the screen and
bring them together.
Zoom in or out a fixed amount (for example, in Web, Photos & Videos,
and Adobe Reader): Double-tap the screen.
TIP In some apps, such as Email, you can set a preference whether to show a
confirmation screen when you delete a list item.
Pinch (zoom gestures)
Zoom in/pinch out to increase the size of items on the screen (for
example, in Email, Web, Photos & Videos, Quickoffice® mobile office
software, Adobe Reader, and Maps): Place two fingers on the screen and
spread them slowly apart.
Chapter 2 : Basics
19
Scroll gestures
Text selection gestures
Scroll slow: Drag the screen in the desired direction.
For information on working with text after you select it, see Cut, copy, and
paste information.
Insert the cursor in a text field: Tap the location.
Scroll fast: Flick the screen in the desired direction.
Select text: Tap and hold the text. Tap Select or Select All. See Cut, copy,
and paste information for more information.
Update the HP webOS operating system
Stop scrolling: Tap or drag the screen while scrolling.
HP provides updates to your device’s operating system. Update
notifications are sent to your device automatically when a system update
is available (see Respond to a system software notification). When you
update your device’s operating system, your personal information and
files are not affected. In addition to receiving update notifications, you
can manually check for operating system updates at any time (see
Manually check for system updates).
What’s more, both HP and many application developers make updates
available for applications you installed on your device. You can check in
Software Manager at any time for application updates (see Update a
downloaded application from a notification and Manually check for
application updates).
20
Chapter 2 : Basics
Respond to a system software notification
2
If a message appears stating that a system update is available, do
the following:
When you get a notification that a system update is available, do one of
the following:
• Tap Install Now twice. When installation is complete and the device
resets, tap Done. Installation times vary, depending on the size of the
update. You cannot use your device while an update is being installed.
• Tap Install Later. The next time you charge your device, you receive
another update notification. You can again choose whether to install
the update now or later. If you do not tap Install Later within 10 minutes
of receiving the notification, installation begins automatically.
Here is some additional information about system updates:
• If you have Wi-Fi turned on and the battery has enough charge, your
device automatically downloads a system update if one is available—
you don’t have to do anything. If Wi-Fi is not turned on when the
update becomes available, the webOS servers continue to check your
device for Wi-Fi availability.
• If the battery does not have enough charge, you must charge the
battery before you can download or install an update.
• If you do not install an update immediately after downloading it, you
are prompted to install the update the next time you charge your
device. You can choose whether to install the update now or later. You
have ten minutes to decide; otherwise, the update installs automatically.
• If prompted, tap Download now.
• When prompted, tap Install Now.
• After installation has finished and the device resets, tap Done.
TIP If you don’t want to install the update at this time, close System Updates by
throwing its app card off the top of the screen (see Close an application or
application screen).
Manually check for system updates
1
Open System Updates
.
Chapter 2 : Basics
21
22
Chapter 2 : Basics
3 Just Type
23
23
24
25
25
26
27
27
Just Type overview
Look up a contact
Find information in an application on your device
Search the web
Create a new item such as a message, calendar event, or memo
Open an application
Repeat a recent search
Customize Just Type
• Update your Facebook or Twitter status (see Create a new item such as
a message, calendar event, or memo)
• Open an app (see Open an application)
You can also start a search by copying text in another application,
opening Just Type, and pasting the text in the Just type field (see Cut,
copy, and paste information).
Look up a contact
Just Type overview
The Just Type feature lets you do almost anything you want on your
device, without having to go to a specific app. When it crosses your mind
to look up, do, or make note of something, just type to put your thought
into action.
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Begin typing the contact’s first and last initials (no space), first or last
name, phone number, or email address.
3
(Optional) To filter the search results to show just matching contacts,
tap the Contacts tab.
You access Just Type from Card view by tapping the Just type field. Then,
by just typing, you can begin doing any of the following:
• Look up a contact (see Look up a contact)
• Search the web (see Search the web)
• Search for email messages, web bookmarks, videos, and more (see
Find information in an application on your device)
• Map a location (see Find information in an application on your device)
• Create a new message, memo, or other item (see Create a new item
such as a message, calendar event, or memo)
Chapter 3 : Just Type
23
4
When the contact name appears, do one of the following. If only the
contact name is displayed, tap the name to display ways to get in
touch.
• Tap the name to open the person’s contact information.
• Tap an email address to send a message.
• If you have set up a Skype account on your device and the contact
is a Skype contact, tap
to call the contact.
TIP If you are using Exchange with a corporate server, you can search your
company’s Global Address List (GAL) for a contact by tapping Address Lookup
in the Just Type search results. You can set a preference to have a GAL search
take place automatically, or to manually choose whether to search your GAL
(see Customize Just Type).
TIP If you pair your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS smartphone, you can also
make a call or send a text message to a contact from Just Type search results
(see Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone).
Find information in an application on your
device
You can search for email messages, music, web bookmarks, and websites
you’ve visited (browsing history) on your device. You can also search for
apps in HP webOS App Catalog.
If your search term does not show results for a certain app, you may need
to turn on a preference to include that app in a Just Type search (see
Customize Just Type).
24
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Begin typing the information you want to find. Depending on which
app you want to search, this could be the subject of an email
message, a music artist, a bookmark name, or some other term.
Chapter 3 : Just Type
3
(Optional) To filter the search results to show just information on your
device, tap the Content tab.
4
Depending on the app you want to search in, tap one of the
following:
Artists: Your device displays the number of songs whose artist name
contains your search term, Tap Artists to view the list of songs. Tap a
song to play it.
Calendar Events: Your device displays the number of calendar events
whose name contains your search term, Tap Calendar Events to view
the list of events. Tap an event to open it.
Bookmarks & History: Your device displays the number of websites
in your bookmarks list and browsing history list whose name
contains your search term. Tap Bookmarks & History to view a list of
the websites. Tap an entry to go to the website.
Email: Your device displays the number of email messages whose
sender name or subject contains your search term. Tap Email to
display the list of matching messages. Tap a message to view it.
NOTE In addition to Just Type, applications such as Contacts, Email, Memos,
and Adobe Reader also offer the ability to search within the app for entries or
files. When you’re in one of those apps, from the list view, type the file name; a
few words from a memo; or a contact name, initials, address, or number. See
the individual application sections for details. You can also enter a search term
in the Help application to search for help content related to the term.
Search the web
• To search the web using a different search engine: Under Search
Using, tap a search engine name. If the search engine is for a
specific website, such as Wikipedia, your device searches that site
only.
You have several options for using Just Type to search the web.
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Begin typing the search term.
• To view your search term on a map: Under Search Using, tap
Maps.
• To search HP webOS App Catalog for apps that match your
search term, tap HP App Catalog.
Create a new item such as a message,
calendar event, or memo
You can use Just Type to create a new item such as an email message or
memo by entering all or part of the item’s text. These items are grouped in
the Quick Actions section of the search results.
3
(Optional) To filter the search results to show just matching actions
(web search options and Quick Actions), tap the Actions tab.
For some Quick Actions, you need to turn on a preference to create that
type of item from your search results (see Customize Just Type).
4
Do one of the following:
1
• To search the web using your default search engine: Tap Search
[search engine name].
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Type all or part of the item text, such as email message text or memo text.
3
(Optional) To filter the search results to show just matching actions
(web search options and Quick Actions), tap the Actions tab.
• To go directly to a website: Type the website address, such as
hp.com. When the address appears at the top of the search
results, tap Go to website.
TIP You can also search the web using the default search engine by typing the
search term and tapping Enter on the onscreen keyboard. Or go directly to a
website by typing the website address and tapping Enter.
• To view suggested search terms from your default search engine
based on the characters you entered: Tap Suggest to the right of
your default search engine name. Tap a suggestion to search on
that term. If the characters you entered return no contacts,
applications, or other items on your device, suggestions are
displayed automatically. Tap one to search on it.
Chapter 3 : Just Type
25
4
Under Quick Actions, tap New [item type]. The relevant application
opens, displaying your text as part of a new item. Here are some
examples:
• To create a new email message: Tap New Email. A new message
opens with the text you entered as the message text.
• To create a calendar event: Tap Create New Event. A new event
opens containing the text you entered.
Open an application
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Begin typing the app name or a related keyword. See Use
application keywords for a list.
3
26
When the app appears, tap it.
Chapter 3 : Just Type
Use application keywords
If you don’t know the name of the app you are searching for, you can
enter a keyword associated with the app. This table shows the keywords
you can use to find an app on your device.
Table 1. Application keywords
Application Name
Keywords
Backup
Settings, Preferences
Bluetooth
Settings, Preferences, Wireless
Calendar
Datebook, Meetings, Events
Date & Time
Clock, Settings, Preferences, Time
Device Info
Settings, Preferences, Reset
Exhibition
Preferences
HP App Catalog
Store
Location Services
Settings, Preferences
Memos
Notes, Stickies, Notepad
Messaging
Text, SMS, MMS, IM, Instant, Chat
Phone & Video Calls
Dial
Photos & Videos
Pictures
Print Manager
Preferences
Regional Settings
Settings, Preferences
Screen & Lock
Wallpaper, Security, Desktop, Brightness,
Unlock, Gestures, Settings, Preferences
Sounds & Ringtones
Audio, Music, Volume, Vibrate, Silent,
Settings, Preferences
System Updates
Preferences
VPN
Settings, Preferences, Wireless
Web
Browser, Blazer, Internet
Wi-Fi
Settings, Preferences, Wireless
Repeat a recent search
To search on a term you recently entered, you don’t need to enter the term
again.
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Your recent searches are displayed. Tap a search term to repeat the
search.
TIP To clear your recent search history, tap Clear.
Customize Just Type
You can select the types of information that are included in a search. For
contacts, you can also turn Global Address Lookup on or off. You can
choose which web search options to display in the search results, and
add new search engines to the list. You can select the applications that
you can launch directly from search results.
1
Open Just Type
.
TIP Alternatively, in Card view, tap the Just type field, open the application
menu, and tap Preferences.
2
Select any of the following options:
Applications: By default, Just Type returns any applications on your
device that match the search term you enter. If you do not want to
include applications in Just Type searches, tap On to switch this
setting from On to Off.
term you enter. If you do not want to include contacts in Just Type
searches, tap On to switch this setting from On to Off. If you have an
Exchange account set up on your device, check the Start Global
Address Lookup automatically box to have contact searches always
include your corporate Global Address List (GAL). If you uncheck the
box, your Just Type search results include an option to perform a
Global Address Lookup.
Default Search Engine: This is the search engine your device uses to
search the web when you enter a search term. If you do not want Just
Type to display a default search engine, tap On to switch this setting
from On to Off. To change the search engine, tap the currently
displayed engine, and then tap the one you want. The list contains
two types of search engines: Engines that search the entire web,
such as Google, and engines that search within a specific website
only, such as Wikipedia.
Content: By default, Just Type returns entries from certain
applications on your device that match the search term you enter. If
you do not want to include application entries in Just Type searches,
tap On to switch this setting from On to Off. To customize which
application entries are included in searches, check or uncheck the
box to the left of each app name.
Search Using: By default, Just Type lets you search the web using
other search engines, or search using other applications on your
device. If you do not want these alternate search engines and
applications displayed in Just Type searches, tap On to switch this
setting from On to Off. To customize the other web search engines
and applications available for Just Type searches, check or uncheck
the box to the left of each entry. Search engines are designated by
Web—you can make any listed search engine the default search
engine. Applications included in your searches are designated by
App.
Actions: By default, Just Type lets you create an item or start an
action based on your search term. If you do not want to include
these Quick Actions in Just Type searches, tap On to switch this
setting from On to Off. To customize the Quick Actions included in
Just Type searches, check or uncheck the box to the left of each
entry.
Contacts: By default, Just Type returns any contacts on your device
whose name, phone number, or email address match the search
Chapter 3 : Just Type
27
Find More: This option lets you search App Catalog for third-party
applications and services that you can use to perform any of the
following Just Type functions: web search, app search, or creation of
a new item (Quick Action). For example, you can use Find More to
download a new web search engine. To use this feature, tap Find
More, and then download an app from the list displayed in App
Catalog (see Download a free application or Buy an application).
TIP There’s another way to add a search engine to Just Type. If you open a web
page and an additional search engine is available, a notification appears
alerting you that you can add the search engine. If you add the search engine,
it appears as an option in Just Type.
28
Chapter 3 : Just Type
4 Work with applications
29
30
31
33
37
38
38
39
41
43
44
Open applications
Resize panels/display or hide levels in an app
Use the menus
Enter and save information
Close an application or application screen
Delete an application
Manage applications in Card view
Customize the app display in the Launcher and Quick Launch
Manage online accounts
View and work with notifications
Create and work with favorites
Open applications
2
Begin typing the name of the application or one of its keywords (see
Use application keywords).
3
When the application icon appears in the search results, tap it.
Open an application in the Launcher
The Launcher contains pages that display icons for all your applications.
You can organize the Launcher icons to group apps the way you want
(see Reorder Launcher icons).
1
If you’re in an app, press Center
2
In Card view, press Center
to display Card view.
or tap
.
You can have as many applications open at one time as you like, limited
only by the amount of memory available on your device at the time.
Open an application using Just Type
For detailed information on the Just Type feature, see Just Type.
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
29
3
To find the app you want, flick up or down to see all the icons on a
page. To see other pages, swipe right or left on the screen, or tap a
page name at the top of the screen.
* Launcher page names. Tap to go to a different page.
4
Tap the application icon.
To close the Launcher, press Center
* Quick Launch
or tap
.
TIP If advanced gestures are turned on, you can make the up gesture to open
and close the Launcher. If you’re in an app, flick up once from below the screen
onto the screen to display Card view, and then flick again to open the Launcher.
If Card view is displayed, just flick up once. When the Launcher is open, make
the up gesture to close it (see Turn advanced gestures on/off).
Open an application in Quick Launch
Quick Launch can display no more than six icons. By default it displays,
from left to right, Web, Email, Calendar, Messaging, Photos & Videos,
and the Launcher. You can change the order of icons (except the Launcher
icon) in Quick Launch (see Reorder Quick Launch icons), or swap in
whatever applications you like (see Line up your favorite applications in
Quick Launch).
Resize panels/display or hide levels in an
app
Quick Launch is the bar of six icons that always appears at the bottom of
Card view and the Launcher.
You can customize Quick Launch to contain the icons for apps you use
most often. To open an application from Quick Launch, just tap the icon.
Most applications let you display different levels of the application as
panels. For example, in the Email application you can display panels for
three levels of the app: the list of accounts, the inbox of a specific
account, and a message from that inbox. You can resize panels to get a
larger view of any level, or to display more levels.
In all applications, you can resize panels by swiping on the screen. Some
applications, such as Email and Photos & Videos, also let you resize
panels using the drag handles
icon.
30
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
To display a panel full screen: Do one of the following:
• Swipe left on the screen.
• If the drag handles
icon is displayed, drag the icon to the left.
Use the menus
Most applications have an application menu hidden in the upper-left
corner, which provides access to additional features. There is also a
system menu hidden in the upper-right corner, which provides access to
systemwide features such as wireless services.
To get the most out of your device, it’s a good idea to familiarize yourself
with the additional features available through the menus in various
applications.
Use the application menu
To resize a full-screen panel so you can see more levels in an app: Do one
of the following:
• Swipe right on the screen.
• If the drag handles
icon is displayed, drag the icon to the right.
The application menu contains items for the application you are working
in, such as Preferences, Help, and other application-specific menu items.
Within an app, application menu items may be different for different
screens—for example, the application menu items for an Inbox in Email
are different from the items available for an open email message. Help is
available on the application menu of every application.
In applications containing material you can print (such as messages, web
pages, photos, or documents), the application menu contains the Print
command.
1
In an app, do one of the following:
• Drag down from the upper-left corner of the device (above the
screen) onto the screen.
For example, if an email message is displayed full screen, you can resize
the message so you can see the inbox containing the message.
TIP In some apps displaying the drag handles icon, you can tap or swipe the
icon to resize a panel.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
31
• Tap the application name in the upper-left corner of the screen.
1
Do one of the following:
• Drag down from the upper-right corner of the device (above the
screen) onto the screen.
2
3
Tap a menu item to open it. If a menu item displays a right-pointing
arrow , tap the item to display the submenu for that item. If you
see a downward-pointing arrow
at the bottom of the menu, scroll
down to see additional menu items.
• Tap the upper-right corner of the screen.
To close the menu without selecting an item, repeat one of the
options in step 1.
Use the system menu
The system menu lets you control systemwide functions such as screen
brightness and system sounds. It also lets you manage wireless services:
Wi-Fi, VPN, and Bluetooth® wireless technology.
DID YOU KNOW? The system menu also displays the current day and date and
the battery charge level.
2
Do one of the following:
• To adjust the screen brightness: Drag the slider.
• To use a wireless feature (Wi-Fi, VPN, Bluetooth): Tap a menu item
to display a list of menu items for that feature (see Turn wireless
services off (airplane mode)). If you see a downward-pointing
arrow
at the bottom of the menu, scroll down to see additional
menu items.
• To turn all wireless services on or off: Tap Turn on Airplane Mode
or Turn off Airplane Mode (see Turn wireless services off (airplane
mode)).
• To lock or unlock the screen rotation: Tap Turn on Rotation Lock or
Turn off Rotation Lock. When rotation lock is turned on, your
screen orientation (portrait or landscape) does not change even if
you turn the device.
32
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
• To turn system sounds on or off: Tap Mute Sound or Unmute
Sound.
TIP You can also turn system sounds on and off using the Sounds & Ringtones
preference (see Set sound options).
3
To close the menu without selecting an item, repeat one of the
options in step 1.
Enter and save information
Use the onscreen keyboard
TIP You can set up and use multiple languages and layouts for the onscreen
keyboard (see Set up and switch among multiple onscreen keyboard layouts and
languages).
Enter uppercase letters
By default, the first letter of each sentence or field is capitalized and the
remaining text you enter is lowercase. To enter other uppercase letters, do
one of the following:
• Tap Shift
and tap the letter key. The Shift key changes to
. You
don’t need to hold Shift while you tap the letter key.
• Turn on Caps Lock: Tap Shift
twice quickly. The Shift key changes to
.
• Turn off Caps Lock: Tap Shift
.
Enter symbols and alternate characters
There are several ways to enter punctuation marks and other symbols. Do
one of the following:
1 Next/Prev/Tab: Tap to move among fields. The name of the key changes depending on
the app you are using (see Enter information in a field).
2 Layout: Tap to change between the alphanumeric keyboard and the symbol keyboard
(see Enter symbols and alternate characters).
3 Enter: Tap to enter a line return (for example, in a memo or in an email message you are
composing) or to accept information you entered in a field (see Enter information in a
field).
4 Dismiss/resize keyboard: Tap to dismiss the keyboard. To resize the keys, tap and hold,
• To enter a symbol that appears on a number key: Tap Shift
and tap
the key. You don’t need to hold Shift while tapping the number key.
• To enter a symbol from the symbol keyboard: Tap
to display the
symbol keyboard, and then tap a symbol key. Tap
to return to
the alphanumeric keyboard.
• To enter other symbols or alternate keyboard characters: Tap and hold
a letter or number key to see the symbols or characters associated with
that key (not all keys have symbols associated with them). Tap a symbol.
See Symbols and accented characters for a list of the available symbols
and accented characters using the tap-and-hold method.
and then tap XS (extra small), S (small), M (medium), or L (large).
5 Space
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
33
TIP The symbols and accented characters are grouped according to their
similarity to the corresponding key. For example, to enter an é, tap and hold e.
For the number keys, the symbols are related to either the number or the symbol
shown on the key. For example, to type a € or other currency symbol, tap and
hold the 4 key. Why? Because the symbol on the 4 key is $.
Tap and hold ...
to select…
i
ìíîïİı
I
ÌÍÎÏİı
TIP Not all keys contain alternate characters or symbols. When you tap and
l
ł
L
Ł
m
μ
M
Μ
n
ñń
N
ÑŃ
o
òóôõöøőœºω
O
ÒÓÔÕÖØŐŒºΩ
p
§π
P
§Π
r or R
®
s
šşßσ
Table 1. Symbols and accented characters
S
ŠŞßΣ
Tap and hold ...
to select…
t
™þ
a
àáâãäåæª
T
™Þ
A
ÀÁÂÃÅÄƪ
u
ùúûüű
c
çć©¢
U
ÙÚÛÜŰ
C
Ç Ć© ¢
y
ýÿ
d
䆇
Y
ÝŸ
D
І‡
z
žźż
e
èéêëęē
Z
ŽŹŻ
E
ÈÉÊËĘĒ
, or /
\
g
ğ
. or ?
•…¿
G
Ğ
‘ or “
`
- or _
±¬
hold a key, you see ... at the bottom of most keys. The ... means that alternate
characters/symbols are available for those keys. If a key does not display ..., it
does not have any alternate characters or symbols. Likewise, the keys on the
symbol keyboard do not contain alternate characters or symbols.
Enter passwords
You can see each character of a password only as you enter it, so be
careful. Be sure Caps Lock is off unless you need it. For information on
how to enter characters, see Enter uppercase letters and Enter symbols
and alternate characters.
Symbols and accented characters
34
Table 1. Symbols and accented characters
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
‘ ’ “ ”« »
Table 1. Symbols and accented characters
Tap and hold ...
to select…
1 or !
¹¼½¡
2 or @
²
3 or #
³¾
4 or $
€£¥¢¤
5 or %
‰
9 or (
[{
0 or )
]}
Enter information in a field
You can enter information in a field by typing or by pasting previously
copied information (see Cut, copy, and paste information). The Text Assist
feature works with all text fields (see Work with the Text Assist feature).
To accept the information you entered, do one of the following:
NOTE If a Text Assist feature does not seem to be working, make sure that
feature is turned on (see Customize Text Assist settings).
• If Text Assist recognizes a common misspelling, it auto-corrects the
word. The word appears with a gray underline to indicate it has been
corrected. If system sounds are turned on, a sound is played as well.
• If auto-correction doesn’t recognize a spelling, it highlights the word
with an orange underline. Tap the word to display a list of close
matches, and then tap the correct word. If the word is spelled correctly
as you typed it, tap the word, and then tap + to add the word to the
auto-correction dictionary.
• Auto-correction inserts punctuation such as apostrophes in contractions.
So you can quickly type dont, and it appears correctly as don’t.
• The auto-capitalization feature automatically capitalizes the first word of
a sentence and other letters that would commonly be capitalized, such
as the letter i by itself.
• The shortcut feature recognizes and expands common shorthand
expressions, such as replacing u with you or r with are.
• To cancel an auto-correction, auto-capitalization, or shortcut expansion,
tap Backspace
. To cancel auto-correction of a misspelled word, you
can also tap the word and tap the original spelling.
• Tap outside the field.
• Tap Enter.
• Tap Next, Prev, or Tab in the lower-left corner of the onscreen
keyboard. This accepts the information in the current field and moves
the cursor to the next or previous field. The key name changes
depending on the app you are using.
TIP Suppose the language on your device is English and you need to write an
email in French. To prevent Text Assist from trying to correct everything you enter,
temporarily turn off auto-correction (see Customize Text Assist settings).
Customize Text Assist settings
Work with the Text Assist feature
Text Assist, the assisted text entry feature, works on any screen in which
you can enter text, including email and instant messages; memos; contact
and calendar entry screens; and more. Text Assist includes
auto-correction, auto-capitalization, and shortcuts.
You can customize individual Text Assist features: auto-correction,
auto-capitalization, and shortcuts. To customize the user dictionary, see
Add your own words and shortcuts.
1
Open Text Assist
.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
35
2
Do any of the following:
4
To edit the shortcuts list, tap Shortcuts and do any of the following:
• To add a shortcut: Tap
, enter the new shortcut and
replacement text, and then tap Add.
• To change a shortcut and/or its replacement text: Tap the shortcut
you want to change. Tap the Shortcut field or the Replace With
field, and then enter the new shortcut or replacement text. Tap
Done.
• To delete a shortcut: Throw the shortcut off the side of the screen.
Tap Delete to confirm.
TIP You can also delete a shortcut by tapping the shortcut and then tapping
Delete.
• To turn Auto-Capitalization, Shortcuts, or Auto-Correction on or off:
Tap Off or On for that entry.
• To change whether a tone plays, the device vibrates, or neither
happens when an auto-correction takes place: In Alert, tap the
currently displayed option, and then tap System Sound, Vibrate,
or Mute. The Alert option is available only if auto-correction is
turned on.
Add your own words and shortcuts
1
Open Text Assist
2
Tap Edit User Dictionary.
3
To edit the auto-correction dictionary, tap Learned Words and do
any of the following:
You can copy any selectable text, and you can cut any selectable text that
you entered, for example, in a memo or an email you composed.
1
Tap and hold the text you want to cut or copy.
2
If the text appears with a yellow highlight, it means the selection is
ready to be copied. To expand the selection, drag the arrows at the
beginning and end of the selected text.
.
• To add a word: Tap
If the Select and Select All options appear, do one of the following:
• To select all text—for example, an entire memo or message: Tap
Select All.
• To select a portion of the text: Tap Select. To expand the selection,
drag the arrows at the beginning and end of the selected text.
, enter the new word, and then tap Add.
• To change the spelling of a word: Tap the word, and then type the
correction to the word. Tap Done.
• To delete a word: Throw the word off the side of the screen. Tap
Delete to confirm.
36
Cut, copy, and paste information
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
3
If the Cut and Copy options are not displayed, tap the highlighted
text to display the options.
4
Tap Cut or Copy. If the text appeared with a yellow highlight
immediately after you tapped and held it, only the Copy option is
available.
5
Open the app where you want to paste the text.
6
Tap and hold the insertion point where you want to paste the text.
7
Tap Paste.
TIP On screens where you cannot tap and hold to select, cut, copy, or paste, the
application menu may have items for these tasks. To check, open the application
menu and look for an Edit item. If Edit is displayed, tap it to open a submenu of
options: Select All, Cut, Copy, and/or Paste. Tap an item to perform that action.
Select items in a list
2
Tap the list item you want.
Lists enable you to select from a range of options. Lists are different from
menus (see Use the menus), which give you access to additional features.
Save information
Lists are hidden until you tap the currently displayed option for that list.
You information is saved automatically as you enter it. When you close an
app or a screen, any new or changed info is retained.
1
Tap the currently displayed option to open the list. For example,
when creating a new event in Calendar, tap 15 minutes before to
display the list of reminder options.
Close an application or application screen
• If you are working on a screen with a Back or a Done button, to exit the
screen but stay in the application, tap Back or Done.
• To close an application or a screen, in Card view (see Manage
applications in Card view), throw the card off the top of the screen. If
cards are in a stack (see Work with stacked cards), you can only throw
one card at a time.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
37
If you have more than one card open for an app, throwing one of the
cards off the top of the screen may close the entire app, or it may close
only that screen. For example, say you have a card open for the main
Email app screen—the one showing the list of accounts—and another
card open for a single email message. If you throw the message card off
the top of the screen, it does not close the Email app. But if you throw the
main Email card off the top of the screen, it closes the app, including the
message you had open.
1 Just Type field
2 Wallpaper
3 Quick Launch
Delete an application
When an application fills the screen and you want to go to Card view,
press Center
.
Use Software Manager to delete applications that you installed on your
device. See Manage applications with Software Manager.
Manage applications in Card view
Card view displays open applications as small cards so that you can
easily scroll through them and drag them to change their order.
When you have no open applications, your device displays Card view
automatically. You don’t have to do anything to open Card view. When
no cards are open, Card view shows only the Just Type field (see Just
Type), your wallpaper (see Change your wallpaper), and Quick Launch
(see Open an application in Quick Launch).
38
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
TIP If advanced gestures are turned on, you can make the up gesture to display
Card view. If you’re in an app, flick up once from below the screen onto the
screen to display Card view (see Turn advanced gestures on/off).
Work with stacked cards
Change card order or unstack cards
If you are working in an application and perform an action that opens a
new screen or launches a second application—for example, composing a
new email from your Inbox—your device treats the app screens as a
group. If you minimize one of the screens, that screen and all screens
associated with it appear as a set of stacked cards in Card view.
1
In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap and hold
the card you want to move. This can be a single card or a card
within a stack.
2
After the card becomes transparent, drag it to another position. You
can drag a stacked card to another position within the stack, or
drag it out of the stack to unstack it.
You can also manually stack and unstack cards.
Move among cards and stacks
1
2
In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), swipe left or
right on the screen to see other open apps.
Tap a card to maximize the application.
Stack cards
1
In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap and hold
a card.
2
After the card becomes transparent, drag the card on top of another
card. Release when the cards are positioned to be stacked.
Customize the app display in the Launcher
and Quick Launch
Reorder Launcher icons
1
In the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher), tap and
hold an icon, and wait for the visual cue that the icon is ready to be
dragged.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
39
2
3
Drag the icon to a new location on any page. To drag the icon to a
different page, drag it to the edge of the current page, and wait for
the next page to appear.
If Quick Launch contains six icons, tap and hold a Quick Launch
icon, wait for the visual cue that the icon is ready to be dragged,
and drag the icon off the Quick Launch bar. The icon is still
available in the Launcher.
4
Tap and hold the icon you want to add to Quick Launch, wait for the
visual cue that the icon is ready to be dragged, and drag the icon
onto any position in the Quick Launch bar.
NOTE If Quick Launch contains fewer than six icons, you can drag the app icon
from the Launcher between two Quick Launch icons to drop it into the blank
space. If you simply want to remove an icon from Quick Launch without
replacing it, tap and hold a Quick Launch icon, and drag it off the bar. The only
one you can’t remove is the Launcher icon.
Tap Done.
TIP You can also add your favorite websites to the Launcher (see Add a web
page to the Launcher).
Line up your favorite applications in Quick Launch
Quick Launch is a convenient lineup of your favorite apps. It contains a
maximum of five apps, plus the Launcher. You can replace any Quick
Launch icon (except the Launcher) with another one so that you always
have quick access to the apps you use most.
If Quick Launch contains the maximum six icons, you need to remove an
icon before you drag in a new one. When you drag an app icon into
Quick Launch, you don’t remove it from the Launcher; you have access to
the icon in two places.
40
3
1
Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).
2
Scroll to the page containing the app icon you want to move into
Quick Launch.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
Reorder Quick Launch icons
You can change the position of any Quick Launch icon except the
Launcher icon.
1
In Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) or the
Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher), tap and hold a
Quick Launch icon.
2
Wait for a visual cue, and then drag the icon to another location on
the Quick Launch bar.
Manage online accounts
You can set up online accounts in the Accounts application, or in
individual applications on your device. For most account types, the online
account must already be set up on the web or server before you can add
it to your device.
The exception is Skype accounts. You can sign in to a Skype account you
already have set up on the web, or you can create a new Skype account
directly on your device.
KEY TERM Online account An online account is a web-based or server-based
location, such as Google, Yahoo!, or Exchange, where you keep contacts and/
or calendar information. These accounts often have an email component as
well. Such web-based or server-based accounts are sometimes talked about as
being “in the cloud.”
The HP Synergy feature works in the background to get data from an online
account onto your device. After you set up one of these accounts on your
device, you can access the data from that online account. For some kinds of
accounts, you can also add and change data on your device, which is then
synchronized to the online account in the cloud.
• To create a new Skype account, see Create a Skype account in
Accounts, Create a Skype account in Messaging, or Create a Skype
account in Phone & Video Calls.
• To sign in to an existing Skype account, see Sign in to a Skype account
in Accounts, Set up an instant messaging (IM) account, or Sign in to a
Skype account in Phone & Video Calls.
You can add more accounts at any time using the Accounts app or the
preferences in any of the applications mentioned above. See Set email
preferences, Customize Contacts, Customize Calendar, or Set up an
instant messaging (IM) account.
You can also set up your device to post photos to online accounts such as
Facebook or Snapfish. See Set up an online pictures or videos account on
your device.
See Online accounts available for webOS devices for the current list of
default online accounts that synchronize your info and those that do a
one-way transfer of info either from the web to your device, or from your
device to the web.
NOTE If you are setting up your device for the first time and downloading a
large number of contacts or calendar events from an online account to your
device, you may not see all your data on your device right away. Some online
account providers such as Google set limits on the amount of data that a user
can import in a given time frame. Also, if you have many years’ worth of data
or thousands of entries in an online account, you may want to review the data
and reduce the number of entries before setting up the account on your device.
Filling your device memory with a large number of account entries can affect
performance.
Whether you decide to set up your online accounts in the Accounts app
or from within an individual app, the process is the same. You can specify
which apps should get data from the online account. For example, you
can choose to set up your Google account so that your device displays
your Google contacts, Google Talk instant messages, and Gmail
messages, but not your Google calendar events.
• To set up an online account in the Accounts app: See Use the Accounts
application to set up an online account for details.
• To set up within an individual app: The first time you open Email,
Contacts, Calendar, or Messaging, you are given the option to enter
settings for one or more online accounts. See Set up email, Use
Contacts for the first time, Use Calendar for the first time, or Set up an
instant messaging (IM) account.
Use the Accounts application to set up an online account
1
Open Accounts
.
2
Tap Add an Account.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
41
3
Do one of the following:
2
Tap the account name.
3
Do one of the following:
• To add one of the listed accounts: Tap the account name.
• To search for other accounts: Tap Find More. This displays a list of
available online accounts. Tap the account you want to download
and install it.
4
Enter your username or email address and password, and tap Sign
in.
5
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create Account.
• To change the account display name: Under Account Name, tap
the current name to highlight it, and enter the new name.
• To change which applications are associated with the account: For
each app listed, tap On or Off.
• To edit the account information: Tap Change Login Settings, enter
the new username or email address and password, and tap Sign
In.
• To delete the account: Tap Remove Account. Tap Remove Account
again to confirm.
Use the Accounts application to edit or delete an online
account
If you change the username, email address, or password you use with an
online account, you need to enter the new information in the account
settings on your device. You can do that from within one of the
applications associated with that account, or from the Accounts app.
1
42
Open Accounts
.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
IMPORTANT If you delete an account from your device using the Accounts app,
all data is removed from all apps on your device associated with the account.
The account itself still exists online. For example, if you delete an Exchange
account using the Accounts app, all your Exchange data is removed from Email,
Contacts, and Calendar. If you want to delete data only from one app served
by the account—for example, you want to delete the calendar events but keep
the contacts—simply turn that app off for that account.
Create a Skype account in Accounts
Sign in to a Skype account in Accounts
If you do not have a Skype account, you can create one right on your
device in the Phone & Videos application. You can also create a Skype
account in Accounts (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account), Contacts (see Create a Skype account in Contacts), and
Messaging (see Create a Skype account in Messaging).
If you have a Skype account but have not yet set it up on your device, you
do not need to create the account again on your device. Simply sign in to
the account to start using Skype on your device.
After you create a Skype account, you remain signed in to that account
and can use it at any time. To sign out of a Skype account, remove it from
your device (see Edit or delete a Skype account).
1
Open Accounts
2
Tap Add an Account.
3
Tap Skype.
4
Tap Create Account.
5
If prompted, tap Accept to agree to the account terms and
conditions.
6
.
Enter the following details:
You can also sign in to a Skype account in Accounts (see Use the
Accounts application to set up an online account), Contacts (see Create a
Skype account in Contacts), and Messaging (see Create a Skype account
in Messaging).
After you sign in to a Skype account, you remain signed in and can use it
at any time. To sign out of a Skype account, remove it from your device
(see Edit or delete a Skype account).
1
Open Accounts
.
2
Tap Add an Account.
3
Tap Skype.
4
Enter your Skype name and password, and tap Sign In.
5
Tap Create Account.
• Full Name: Enter your full name.
• Skype Name: Enter a name that you will use to identify yourself to
other Skype users.
View and work with notifications
• Password: Enter a password and then enter it again.
• Email Address: Enter your email address and then enter it again.
7
Tap Create Account. On the next screen tap Create Account again.
8
Tap Done.
Notifications show up at the top of the screen to notify you of new
messages, upcoming appointments, application updates, and more.
Some notifications also display app controls, such as music playback
controls, when you are not in the app itself.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
43
There are several kinds of notifications:
Banner alert: This is a notification that appears in a small strip at the top
of the screen. Some banner alerts appear as confirmation of an action—
for example, that the battery is charging. Others notify you of an item you
can act on—for example, an incoming email message. For these alerts, if
you do not tap the alert after a few seconds, it becomes an icon in the
upper-right portion of the screen. Tap the top of the screen or drag down
over the icons to display the alerts as dashboard items.
Dashboard item: The dashboard provides an expanded view of all
notifications you can act on. For example, you can tap an app update
notification to open Software Manager.
If the dashboard item has a number next to it, the number indicates how
many items are included in the notification—how many email messages
you have, and so on.
Pop-up notification: This is a larger notification that you can act on right
away. Examples of pop-up notifications are calendar appointment
notifications, incoming phone calls, and alarms.
NOTE By default, if a banner alert or pop-up notification arrives when the
screen is off, the Center button blinks. You can turn this feature off (see Get
notifications when the screen is locked).
App controls: If you are listening to songs in Music and leave the app, the
music playback controls remain displayed at the top of the screen. This
lets you continue to manage music playback without having to go back
into the app.
Create and work with favorites
Some dashboard items enable you to perform multiple actions. For
example:
• On a calendar dashboard item, tap the calendar icon to open
Calendar in Day view with the event displayed, or tap the event name
to open the event details screen.
• If an item’s icon displays a number, tap the icon to open the associated
app to the list view (such as an Email inbox), or tap the item itself to
open that individual item (such as an email message).
To delete a dashboard item, swipe from left to right to throw it off the right
side of the screen. If the notifications are stacked, swipe from the leftmost
(“bottom”) notification to dismiss all the notifications, or swipe on a single
notification to dismiss just that one and display the next one in the stack.
44
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
You can quickly view and reach your closest contacts by designating them
as favorites. Creating a favorite from a contact lets you view and touch
base with that contact in just a few taps.
You can create and manage favorites in Contacts (see Create a favorite)
and in Phone & Video Calls (see Create a favorite in Phone & Video
Calls).
You can view favorites in the following apps:
Phone & Video Calls: To see all your favorites, tap Favorites at the top of
the screen. In your call history list, calls to and from favorites are noted by
a star. If you enter a contact name to call a contact, matching favorites
appear at the top of the search results list and are noted by a star.
Contacts: See all your favorites by tapping Favorites on the contacts list
screen. On your complete contacts list, favorites are noted by a star.
Just Type: When you enter a search term, matching favorites appear at
the top of the contacts search results and are noted by a star.
Email and Messaging: When you begin typing a contact name to address
a message, matching favorites appear grouped at the top of the search
results list and are noted by a star.
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
45
46
Chapter 4 : Work with applications
5 Copy files and sync your personal data
47
48
50
50
51
52
Copy files between your device and your computer
Overview: Get your personal data onto your device
Transfer data from an existing HP webOS Account
Get data from an online account in the cloud
Sync your desktop organizer and your device
Export data from a desktop organizer on your computer
Copy files between your device and your
computer
Copy files and folders using USB Drive mode
You can copy any type of file from a computer to your device, and from
your device to your computer, by putting your device in USB Drive mode.
In this mode, your device appears as a removable hard drive to your
desktop computer. For computer system requirements for using USB Drive
mode, go to hpwebos.com/webos-usbmode-en.
After you copy a file to your device, you can open the file if your device
has an application that supports the file type. You can open many file
formats for photos, videos, and music; Microsoft Office files; and PDF
files. You can also copy ringtones that you download from your
computer’s web browser.
IMPORTANT All files that you store on the USB drive of your device are not
backed up to your HP webOS Account, and they cannot sync to any of your
online accounts. So be sure to keep a copy of all such files somewhere besides
your device just in case you lose your device or you must do a full erase of the
info on your device.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you copy files from your computer, make sure
you have enough storage space on your device to fit the files. Open
Device Info
and look at the Available field under Device.
You can't use any applications on your device while you are in USB Drive
mode.
1
Connect your device to your computer using the USB cable.
2
On your device, tap USB Drive. On your computer, your device
appears as a removable drive.
3
On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard
opens, click Cancel to close the wizard.
4
Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac); double click the drive representing
your device; and drag and drop files to your device. The drive
displays folders that you can use to organize the files you copy. You
can also create your own folders.
Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data
47
5
End the connection safely. If you do not eject safely, your device
resets, and may experience data loss, when you disconnect the USB
cable:
• On a Windows computer, right click the drive representing your
device and click Eject.
• On a Mac computer, from your desktop, drag the drive
representing your device to the Trash. Trash changes to Eject.
6
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB drive
screen is no longer displayed on your device.
Delete files and folders using USB Drive mode
You can't use any applications on your device while you are in USB Drive
mode.
1
Connect your device to your computer using the USB cable.
2
On your device, tap USB Drive. On your computer, your device
appears as a removable drive.
3
On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard
opens, click Cancel to close the wizard.
4
Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or Finder (Mac); double click the drive representing
your device; and delete the files or folders.
5
End the connection safely. If you do not eject safely, your device
resets, and may experience data loss, when you disconnect the USB
cable:
• On a Windows computer, right click the drive representing your
device and click Eject.
• On a Mac computer, from your desktop, drag the drive
representing your device to the Trash. Trash changes to Eject.
6
48
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer and the device when
the USB drive screen is no longer displayed on your device.
Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data
Sync your device with HP Play on your computer
If you have HP Play installed on your computer, you can sync your device
with your computer to copy music files from the HP Play library on your
computer to the Music app on your device. See Use HP Play to sync music
from your computer to your device.
Copy music, photos, and videos using third-party software
Besides using USB Drive mode to copy your photos, videos, and DRM-free
music between your computer and your device, you may also be able to
use solutions available from third-party software developers (sold
separately) that facilitate the transfer of media files to your device. For
more information, open the browser on your computer and go to
hpwebos.com/sync-solutions to see if there are third-party applications
that enable you to sync your device with your computer.
KEY TERM DRM-free: Describes a file that is not protected by Digital Rights
Management. DRM-free files can be copied as many times as you like and can
be played on your HP TouchPad.
Overview: Get your personal data onto your
device
Your personal data consists of the following:
• Your contact list (names, phone numbers, street and email addresses)
• Your calendar events
• Your memos/notes
On your computer, you typically store such personal data in organizer
software like Microsoft Outlook, Palm Desktop by ACCESS, or the Mac’s
iCal and Address Book software.
It’s also likely that you store some personal data in accounts that you
created on the web. These are called online accounts. Sometimes you’ll
hear that data stored in online accounts is stored “in the cloud.” That’s just
another way to say that your data is stored on a server that you access
through the Internet. For example, if you have a Google/Gmail or a
Yahoo! account, you have a contact list stored in the cloud. You may even
use the calendars in these accounts to keep track of your schedule, so you
may also have calendar events stored in the cloud.
Finally, you may have data stored in an HP webOS Account that you use
with a webOS smartphone.
You want to be able to access all this data on your device. This section
explains how you can do that. The actual how-to part of getting your
personal data on your device is pretty simple. But before you take that
step, we recommend that you spend some time thinking about where you
want your personal data to be stored and how you want to access it.
On your device and in the cloud: You can set up a sync relationship
between your device and an online account in the cloud. This enables
you to create and change data in one place—on your device or in the
online account—and have it show up in both places.
On your device and on your computer: You may be able to set up a sync
relationship between your device and selected desktop organizers.
Different kinds of sync relationships may be possible using third-party
solutions (if available). These would enable you to create and change
data in one place—on your device or in the desktop organizer—and
have it show up in both places.
NOTE Data that you store in your HP webOS Account cannot be accessed
anywhere but on your device. HP webOS Account data is backed up daily. No
one, not even you, can see that data.
For further information about getting personal data onto your device, see
hpwebos.com/migrate-webOS.
What do we recommend? We recommend that you set up a Google
account and move your contacts and calendar data to the cloud. That
way, you can access, create, and change your data on your device; in
your Google online account; and, if you have one, on a webOS
smartphone. The remaining personal data that you create on your
device—memos—are automatically backed up as part of your HP webOS
Account.
Use the following table to review your options. Then click the link to learn
how to complete the solution you choose for your personal data.
These solutions are not mutually exclusive. Do what works best for you.
You could potentially use all these solutions. You could, for example, sync
several online accounts, including an Exchange account; sync data with a
desktop organizer using a third-party solution; and store and create new
data in your HP webOS Account.
On your device only: Store and create contact and calendar data in your
HP webOS Account. It’s backed up to your HP webOS Account in the
cloud. You cannot create, change, or look at your HP webOS Account
data except on your device.
Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data
49
Table 1. Data transfer and synchronization solutions for HP webOS devices
My personal data is here
I want to access data here
Do this
Learn how here
Online account (Google,
Yahoo!, Facebook, and so on)
My device and my online
account
Set up the online account on your device.
See Manage online
accounts
Corporate Exchange account
My device and Outlook/other
corporate email app on my
computer
Set up an online account for Exchange on your device.
See Manage online
accounts
Desktop organizer software—
and I want to keep using it
My device and my desktop
organizer
Set up a sync relationship between the device and your
desktop organizer using a third-party solution (if available).
See Sync your desktop
organizer and your device
Desktop organizer software and
I want to stop using it
My device and maybe
elsewhere
Export your personal data to files on your computer and
import the data from there to either a Yahoo! or Google
account. Then set up the online account on your device.
See Export data from a
desktop organizer on your
computer
An existing HP webOS Account
that I am using on a webOS
smartphone
My device and my webOS
smartphone
When setting up your device, instead of creating a new HP
webOS Account, sign in to your existing one.
See Transfer data from an
existing HP webOS
Account
Nowhere—I just want personal
data on my device
My device
Create new contacts and new calendar events in your HP
webOS Account.
See Backup
Transfer data from an existing HP webOS
Account
When setting up your device, you can choose to sign in to an existing HP
webOS Account that you may already be using with a webOS
smartphone (see What is an HP webOS Account?). If you decide to sign
in to an existing account, you can choose to do a one-time transfer of the
data stored in the existing HP webOS Account to your device.
NOTE If you use the same HP webOS Account with two devices, after the
one-time data transfer, info you enter into the HP webOS Account on one device
is not synchronized between the devices. You need to enter the info in both
places.
50
Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data
Get data from an online account in the cloud
If you are already using Google, Facebook, Yahoo!, LinkedIn, and/or
Exchange to manage your calendar and contacts, then all you need to do
to sync data to your device is set up one or more of these accounts on
your device. The data syncs automatically. See Manage online accounts
for information on how to create an online account on your device.
Both choices require you to use a third-party solution (sold separately). Go
to hpwebos.com/sync-solutions to see if third--party solutions are
available for your device. If there are no solutions available for your
device, check with the developers of existing sync software for other
webOS devices to see if they are developing a solution for your device.
Table 2. Online account sync table
Set up your HP TouchPad to
sync with...
To sync this data...
Google
Contacts and calendar events
Exchange
Contacts and calendar events
Yahoo!
Contacts and calendar events
Facebook
Contacts and calendar events
LinkedIn
Contacts
NOTE Changes you make in your Yahoo!, Facebook, or LinkedIn account on
the web show up on your device. There's nothing you have to do. You can
change Yahoo! or Facebook contacts and calendar events, and LinkedIn
contacts, on your device, but the changes you make, or any new data you add,
are not synced to the account on the web.
Sync your desktop organizer and your device
If you want to continue using a desktop organizer to store your contacts
and calendar events—iCal and Address Book on the Mac, or desktop
Outlook® or Palm Desktop by ACCESS on Windows, and if there are
third-party solutions available for your device—you may have two
choices:
Sync directly with your desktop organizer
If you prefer to sync your HP TouchPad directly to your computer without
going through the web, using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth technology, or your
device’s USB cable, you may be able to download a third-party
application (sold separately) that enables synchronization of your device
directly to your desktop.
1
Go to hpwebos.com/sync-solutions to see if there are third-party
applications that enable you to sync your device with your computer.
2
Follow the instructions given by the third-party vendor to install the
app on your computer.
NOTE You may also have to install another part of the application on your
device. Follow the instructions of the third-party vendor.
• Sync directly with your desktop organizer, avoiding the web completely.
• Sync your desktop organizer with Google on the web, and then sync
Google with your device.
Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data
51
Sync your desktop organizer to Google, and Google to your
device
Export data from a desktop organizer on your
computer
You can use the Data Export Wizard (DEW) to do a one-time, one-way
export of data from Palm Desktop or Microsoft Outlook to files on your
computer. You can then import these files to a Yahoo! or Google account
online using the import options available in these accounts on the web.
When the online account is added to your device, your personal data is
available there.
Table 3. DEW data export table
You may be able to download and install a third-party application (sold
separately) that can sync your desktop app to Google. Your desktop app
syncs with your Google account, and your device also syncs with Google.
1
52
On your computer, set up an account on the Google website if you
don't already have one (go to gmail.com).
2
Set up your Google account on your device. See Manage online
accounts.
3
Install a third-party application on your computer that enables you to
sync with Google. Go to hpwebos.com/sync-solutions to see if there
are third-party sync solutions available for your device.
4
Follow the instructions given by the third-party vendor to sync the
data in your desktop app with Google. The next time Google syncs
with your device, your data appears on your device.
Chapter 5 : Copy files and sync your personal data
Export this data from a desktop
organizer...
To import to this account...
Contacts and/or calendar
events
Google
Contacts and/or calendar
events
Yahoo!
To download the DEW, and for more information, go to hpwebos.com/
dew.
6 Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
53
64
67
71
Email
Messaging: All messages in one application
Messaging: Instant messaging
Messaging: Text messaging
Email
How do I send and receive email on my device?
Use the Email application on your device to access the many email
accounts you have: company (like Exchange), ISP (like Earthlink or
Comcast), and web-based (like Gmail). You must create the account
online before you can set it up on your device.
The HP Synergy feature (see Your HP TouchPad) provides another
advantage: During the same process you go through to set up an email
account, you also set up the same account for all other applications that
can display data from that account. For details on how Synergy works for
the current list of online accounts, see Online accounts available for
webOS devices.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Gmail account on your
device. The last step in the setup is to select all the other apps that you
want to receive data from your Google account (besides Email, you can
include Contacts, Messaging, Calendar, and Documents). After setup is
complete, your device begins to download your email and all data for all
other apps you selected for synchronization.
If you want, you can also use your device’s web browser to view your
web-based email—just go to the email provider’s website.
You can set up your email accounts in either of these locations. The
procedure is the same in both locations.
Merged inboxes in Email
• The Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account)
• The Email app
You can set up multiple email accounts on your device. When you open
Email, you see all your accounts in a single view on the Account List
panel. From there, you can open the inbox of an individual account, or
you can open the All Inboxes smart folder and see all messages from all
your inboxes displayed in a merged view.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
53
Email Account and go to step 3, or tap Find more to find an app
for an account type that is not listed and follow the instructions
onscreen.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one, tap Add account,
and tap an account type or tap Email Account.
• Any other time you open Email, open the application menu, tap
Preferences & Accounts, tap Add Account, and tap an account
type or tap Email Account.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and you want to use that account, tap Go. You are
done!
1 Number to the right of All Inboxes indicates the total number of unread email messages
in all your email accounts.
2 Number to the right of an individual folder name indicates the number of unread
messages in that folder.
If you reply to a message when you’re working in All inboxes, the
message is sent from the same account in which it was received. To reply
from a different account, tap the From field and tap a different account to
send the email from.
If you create a new message when you’re working in All Inboxes, the
message goes out using the account you set as the default account (see
Set email preferences).
Set up email
Follow this procedure if you have a common email provider, for example,
AOL, EarthLink, or Yahoo!. If you are setting up the Email application to
work with your corporate email account that uses Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync or Lotus Notes, see Set up email: Microsoft Exchange and
Lotus Notes.
1
Open Email
.
2
Do one of the following:
• If you have not set up an account in another app that takes
advantage of the Synergy feature, tap an account type or tap
54
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
3
Enter your email address and password, and tap Sign In.
4
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create account.
5
Tap Go.
NOTE If automatic setup fails for your email account, an error message
appears. Tap Manual Setup or Find a Synergy Service, gather the settings info
you need, and enter the account settings (see Set up email when automatic
setup fails).
Set up email: Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes
Follow this procedure to get email for Microsoft Exchange and Lotus
Notes accounts.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get this info from your email provider or system
administrator:
• Mail server name or IP address for receiving mail
• Server domain name
• Your username and password
NOTE If your corporate Exchange system utilizes policies such as remote wipe
and password enforcement (including minimum password length, allowed
number of failed password attempts, and other parameters), those policies are
supported in your Exchange account on your device. Check with your system
administrator for details.
Set up email when automatic setup fails
Follow these steps if automatic setup (see Set up email) does not work for
your email account.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get this info from your email provider or system
1
Open Email
.
2
Do one of the following:
• If you have not set up an account in another app that takes
advantage of the Synergy feature, tap Microsoft Exchange.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one, tap Add account,
and tap Microsoft Exchange.
• Any other time you open Email, open the application menu, tap
Preferences & Accounts, tap Add Account, and then tap Microsoft
Exchange.
3
Enter your email address and password, and tap Manual Setup.
4
Enter info for the incoming mail server as needed, based on the
server information you got from your email provider or system
administrator. You can enter either the server name or IP address in
the Incoming Mail Server Domain field.
5
administrator:
• Account type (POP or IMAP)
• Incoming and outgoing mail server names
• Incoming mail server username and password
• Incoming and outgoing server port numbers
• Any SSL requirements for incoming and/or outgoing mail
• Any authentication (ESMTP) requirements for outgoing mail
• Root folder (IMAP accounts only)
1
If you have already started account setup and an “Unable To Sign
In” message appears, tap Manual Setup, and skip to step 6.
Otherwise, start at step 2.
2
Open Email
3
Do one of the following:
• If you have not set up an account in another app that takes
advantage of the Synergy feature, tap Email Account.
Tap Sign In.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one, tap Add account,
and then tap Email Account.
To keep your Exchange account secure, you may be asked to set a
password or PIN that is required to unlock the device. Tap Set Pin or
Set Password. Enter a PIN or password and tap Done.
6
7
You may be presented with options for which apps should download
data from that account. For each app, tap On or Off, and then tap
Create account.
Tap Go.
.
• Any other time you open Email, open the application menu, tap
Preferences & Accounts, tap Add Account, and then tap Email
Account.
4
Enter your email address and password, and tap Manual Setup.
5
Tap the Account Type field and tap your account type.
6
Enter info for the incoming and outgoing mail server as needed,
based on the server information you got from your system
administrator.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
55
7
Tap Sign In.
8
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create account.
9
Sync deleted emails (POP accounts only): Set whether messages
should be deleted on the server when you delete them on your
device.
Sync server to device (POP accounts only): Set whether messages
should be deleted on your device when they are deleted on the
server.
Tap Go.
Default Folders (IMAP accounts only): Specify the folder where
messages you send, save as drafts, or delete are stored.
Enter advanced account settings
Change login settings: See Change account login settings.
These settings apply only to the account you select in step 3.
1
Open Email
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Set any of the following:
Account Name: Enter the name that appears in the account list.
Full Name: Enter the name you want to appear in the From field for
messages you send.
Show Icon: Set whether a notification icon appears onscreen when a
new message arrives.
Alert: When Show Icon is on, set whether a sound plays when a
new message arrives (see Turn new email notifications on/off).
Signature: Tap to create a signature that’s added to outgoing
messages (see Add a signature to outgoing messages).
Reply-to Address: Enter the address you want recipients to see and
reply to on your outgoing messages, if this is different from the email
address you send the message from.
Show Email: Set how many days’ worth of messages to retrieve from
the server.
Get Email: Set how frequently to synchronize email for this account.
56
Remove from App: See Delete an email account.
.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
5
Tap Done, and tap Done again to exit Preferences & Accounts.
Turn new email notifications on/off
The settings you select here apply to individual email accounts. You can
apply different settings to each email account.
1
Open Email
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap an account in Accounts.
4
In Show Icon, tap On or Off.
5
Tap Alert, and tap any of the following:
Vibrate: The device vibrates with no other sound.
System Sound: The system sound plays.
Ringtone: Tap Select Ringtone, and tap a ringtone name. To hear the
ringtone, tap
to the right of its name. To add a song as a
ringtone, tap
, tap the song, and tap the song again.
Mute: No sound plays and the device does not vibrate.
Change account login settings
3
Tap the account name.
When you change your password for an online email account, remember
to make the change in the account settings on your device.
4
Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Account again to confirm.
1
Open Email
Work with panels in Email
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Tap Change login settings and tap the relevant fields to change the
account information.
.
Rename an account
You can change the name that appears in the account list.
1
Open Email
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Tap Account Name and enter a new name.
5
Tap Done, and tap Done again to exit Preferences & Accounts.
When the Email app opens, there are three panels visible on the screen.
For information about hiding and resizing these panels, see Resize
panels/display or hide levels in an app.
Create and send an email message
1
Open Email
2
Tap
When you delete an email account from your device, it removes the
account information from your device only. It does not affect your account
with the email provider.
1
Open Email
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
at the bottom of the message list panel.
TIP If you have set up an email account, you can also start writing an email from
Card view. Tap Just type and start typing a message. Scroll down the list of
search options, and tap New Email. The Email application opens at a new
email message, with the text you entered in the body of the message.
.
Delete an email account
.
3
(Optional) Tap the From field to change the email account you are
using to send the message. This option appears only if you have
more than one email account set up on your device.
4
Tap the To field, and do one of the following to address the
message:
• Enter a contact name, initials, or email address. Tap the email
address when it appears. When you enter a contact name,
favorites appear at the top of the search results (see Create a
favorite).
• Tap
to open the full contact list. Tap the contact you want, or
enter a name or address to narrow the list.
• Enter the full email address for a recipient who is not a contact.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
57
TIP To address an email directly from Card view, tap Just type and begin typing
the email address. If the email address is already associated with a contact, the
contact is displayed. Tap the email address. A new email is opened, with the
address in the To field.
5
(Optional) Tap To to open the Cc and Bcc fields. Tap any of these
fields and enter an address.
6
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter additional addresses.
7
Tap the Subject field, enter the subject, and tap Enter. Enter the body
text.
8
(Optional) To set the priority for the message, tap
High Priority/Mark as Normal Priority.
9
(Optional) To discard a message: Tap
Message.
10
Tap Send.
, tap Mark as
and tap Discard
Save a message as a draft
While composing a message, tap
Receive and read email messages
The Email application synchronizes messages anytime you open a mail
folder. It also synchronizes messages on an automatic schedule—the
default interval depends on the type of account you have (see Enter
advanced account settings for information on changing the interval).
Follow these steps to manually retrieve messages.
1
Open Email
2
If the folders for the account you want are hidden, tap the account
name in the left-hand panel to display the folders.
3
Tap the folder you want to check messages for. If synchronization
doesn’t start, tap
.
Add attachments to a message
1
While composing a message, tap
2
Tap Photos, Music, or Documents.
3
If required, tap to browse to a file.
4
Tap the file name or thumbnail and tap OK.
5
Repeat steps 1–4 to attach other files.
.
How can you tell if sync is happening? Look for the animated
circular movement around the number of messages in the upper-right
corner of the middle panel.
.
TIP To remove an attachment you added to an email: Throw the attachment off
the side of the screen and tap Delete to confirm.
, and tap Save As Draft.
4
Tap a message in the middle panel to open it (see Work with panels
in Email).
5
(Optional) If the email contains links, phone numbers, or other email
addresses you can do the following:
• To call a number: Tap the number, and tap
to call it. This
feature is available only if your device is connected to a
compatible HP webOS smartphone or you have a video calling
account set up on your device (see How can I make and receive
calls with my HP TouchPad?).
• To send an email: Tap the email address, enter your message, and
tap Send.
• To go to a web address: Tap it.
58
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
• To copy a link to a web site: Tap and hold the web address, and
tap Copy URL.
4
• To copy text in the body of an email so you can paste it into a
memo or other document: Tap and hold the message text. To
expand the selection, drag the arrows at the beginning and end of
the selected text. Tap Copy.
Print an email
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device supports printing on all network-capable
HP printers that support PCL page description language in the local LAN.
These printers include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart,
Officejet, and LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years
old or newer. Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your
device and the printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless
network. For personal printers, see the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
1
Open the email that you want to print.
2
Tap
at the top of the right-hand panel, or open the application
menu and tap Print.
Printers that are available on your current wireless network are
displayed.
3
Do one of the following:
(Optional) Depending on the printer you are using, you can set the
following printer attributes:
Number of Copies: Tap 1 and tap the number of copies you want to
print.
Color Printing: Tap On to switch color printing from On to Off.
5
Tap Print.
To cancel a print job, tap Cancel while the file is preparing to print,
or while printing is in progress, tap
at the top of the screen, tap
the notification, and then tap
to the right of the print job in the
Print Queue.
Open email attachments
You can receive any kind of file sent to you in email, but you can open an
attachment only if your device has an application that can open the file
type.
• To open a single attachment: Tap the attachment name to download the
attachment. If the attachment is a supported file type (PDF, DOC,
DOCX, XLS, XLSX, PPT, PPTX, TXT, GIF, PNG, BMP, or JPG), it opens
automatically.
• To open multiple attachments: Tap the list of attachment names to view
the attachments, and tap an attachment name to open the file.
• If this is your first time using a printer on this network: If a list of
printers is displayed, tap one.
• If you have already used a printer on this network: The last printer
you used is remembered and is selected. If you want to select
another printer, scroll down and tap Select Another Printer.
• To set up a printer manually or on a corporate network: Scroll
down in the list of printers and tap Add a Printer. Tap Enter an IP
address and enter the IP address of the printer. (Optional) Tap
Name this printer and enter a name to identify the printer. Tap
Done.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
59
• To play an MP3 file attachment: Tap the attachment name to download
the attachment. When the attachment has finished downloading, tap
the attachment name to play. Tap the progress indicator to pause, and
tap it again to resume playing. MP3 files you download from Email are
not saved to USB storage, and they are not listed in Music.
Add a contact from an email message
Save attachments
1
You can add a contact name or email address to your Contacts list
directly from the header or from the To or Cc field of an incoming email
message. You can either create a new contact or add the information to
an existing contact.
• To add a contact from the message header: Tap the name or
email address in the header.
You can save any attachment to your device. If an attachment is
supported by an application on your device, you can view it at any time
from that application.
1
Open the email containing the attachment.
2
Do one of the following:
• If only one file is attached: Tap and hold the attachment file name
and tap Save Attachment.
• If there is more than one attachment and you want to save one of
them: Tap the attachments, tap and hold the attachment you want
to save, and tap Save Attachment.
• If there is more than one attachment and you want to save all of
them: Tap the attachments, tap and hold one of them, and tap
Save All Attachments.
3
To open a saved attachment on your device, open the application
that can display the attachment. The attachment appears in the list of
available files. Tap the file to open it.
Do one of the following in a message you’ve received:
• To add a contact from the To or Cc field: Tap To and tap an email
address in the list of recipients.
2
Tap one of the following:
Add New Contact: Create a new contact for the name or address.
Add to Existing: Tap the contact you want to add the name or
address to.
View and edit a contact from an email message
• In a message you’ve received from someone listed in the Contacts app,
tap the name in the message header to open the contact entry. Tap Edit
Contact to edit the contact in Contacts. Tap Done to save your changes.
Search for an email message
Save an inline image
If a message contains an inline image—an image inserted right into the
body text—in JPG, BMP, or PNG format, you can save it to and view it in
the Photos & Videos app.
• Tap and hold the image file name, and then tap Copy To Photos (if
available).
60
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
You can search for messages in any email folder. Incoming messages
must be fully downloaded to your device to show up in search results.
Do one of the following:
• In Card view, tap Just type, and type a few characters of a name, email
address, or subject of an email. Tap Email, scroll to find the email you
want, and tap to open it.
• Open Email
, and open the folder containing the message. Tap
Search; type a name, email address, or subject line of a message
you're looking for; and tap
.
Reply to a message
1
Open a message.
2
Tap one of the following:
Copy messages
You can copy the body text of a message.
1
Open a message, and tap and hold the message text.
2
To expand the selection, drag the arrows at the beginning and end
of the selected text.
3
Tap Copy.
: Reply to just the sender.
: Reply to the sender and all other addressees.
3
Enter the reply message text and tap Send.
Forward a message
1
Open a message and tap
2
Address the forwarded message (see Create and send an email
message).
3
.
Enter the forwarded message text and tap Send.
Show or hide message recipients
Move a message to another folder
Do one of the following:
• To move a single message: Open a message, tap
, and tap the
folder you want.
• To move more than one message: Tap
at the bottom of the message
list panel, tap the messages you want to move or tap Select All. Tap
and tap the folder you want.
Mark a message as read or unread
1
Open a message.
2
Tap Mark as Read/Unread.
You can show all recipients in the To or Cc fields of an email you
received.
Mark all messages in a folder as read
1
Open a message.
1
Open a folder.
2
Tap the To field to show all recipients.
2
Open the application menu, tap Mark All As Read.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
61
Flag or unflag a message
TIP If you change the folder where you store deleted messages for an IMAP
account (see Enter advanced account settings), deleting messages from the
folder removes them from your device.
When you flag a message, a
is placed beside the message in the
messages list. You might flag a message to highlight it at the top of
Account List view as something that you need to return to.
Do one of the following:
Add a signature to outgoing messages
• To flag a single message: Open a message and tap
.
• To flag more than one message: Tap
at the bottom of the message
list panel, tap the messages you want to flag or tap Select All, and tap
.
A signature includes information you want to add to the closing of all your
outgoing messages—for example, your name, address, and phone
numbers; your website; or a personal motto. You can use a different
signature for each email account.
To remove a flag, open a message, and tap
1
Open Email
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account you want.
4
Tap the Signature field and enter the signature text.
5
Tap Done, and then tap Done again.
.
TIP You can set a preference to show all flagged emails in a single folder,
called All Flagged, at the top of the Account List panel (see Set email
preferences).
Delete a message
Deleting a message moves it to your deleted items folder, so it’s still on
your device. Depending on your email account, this folder is called
Deleted Items, Deleted, Trash, or something else.
Do one of the following:
• In the message list: Throw the message off the side of the screen and
tap Delete.
• In an open message: Tap
and tap Delete.
To avoid deleting a message accidentally, you can turn the Delete
Confirmation preference on (see Set email preferences). If you do
accidentally delete a message, you can move it back to the original folder
(see Move a message to another folder). To remove a message from your
device permanently, delete it from the deleted items folder. To delete all
messages from the deleted items folder, open the application menu while
in the folder, tap Empty Trash, and then tap Empty Trash again.
62
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
.
Show or hide folders in the Accounts List panel
The Accounts List panel contains expandable folders for Favorites and
each of your email accounts. The Favorites folder gives you quick access
to the inbox for each of your accounts. By default, it also contains a folder
called All Inboxes, which contains a merged view of all your inboxes. You
can also set a preference to add a folder called All Flagged under
Favorites to display all your flagged messages in a single folder. To add
or remove the All Inboxes or All Flagged folders from Favorites, see Set
email preferences. To add any other email folder to Favorites, see Add an
email folder as a favorite.
1
Open Email
.
2
Tap
3
Tap the folder name you want to open.
to the right of Favorites or an account name.
4
(Optional) Open the application menu and tap About This Folder to
view information such as last sync and number of messages.
Accounts: Tap an account name to enter advanced settings or to
change synchronization settings for email, contacts, or calendar
events (see Enter advanced account settings and Rename an
account).
Add Account: See Set up email.
5
Tap
Default Account: Tap the account shown and then tap the account
you want to set as the new default. The default account is used to
send a message when you create a new message in the Account List
panel or in a merged folder such as All Inboxes or All Flagged.
to hide the folders under Favorites or an account name.
4
Tap Done.
Add an email folder as a favorite
Reply to meeting invitations
Favorites appear at the top of Account List panel.
1
Open Email
2
If the folder you want is not displayed, tap
email account name to display the folder.
3
Tap
.
to the right of the
Tap to accept, tentatively accept, or decline an invitation.
to the right of the folder name.
To remove a folder as a favorite, repeat steps 1 and 2 and tap
right of the folder name.
Here are the key features of meeting invitations:
to the
Set email preferences
1
Open Email
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Set any of the following:
You receive meeting invitations on your device in the same way that you
receive email messages. You cannot create meeting invitations on your
device.
.
Smart Folders: Set whether to include All Inboxes and/or All
Flagged messages as favorites at the top of the Account List panel.
• Meeting invitations appear on your device in the Email application, not
in the Calendar application.
• From within the Email application, you can accept, decline, or
tentatively accept a meeting invitation.
• If you accept or tentatively accept an invitation, it appears as an event
in Calendar.
• You can reply to and forward meeting invitations in the same way as
email messages.
TIP If you receive an updated meeting invitation, you can again choose to
accept, decline, or tentatively accept. If you receive a meeting cancellation,
open the message and tap Remove From Calendar to delete the meeting from
your calendar.
Delete Confirmation: Tap to turn this setting On/Off. When Delete
Confirmation is on, you are asked to confirm deletion of email
messages.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
63
Send email messages from within another application
Work with conversations
Use the share feature in any application that supports this to send an item
as an attachment to an email message. This feature is available in the
Adobe Reader and Memos applications, among others. Depending on
the app, this feature may be accessed from a menu that might be named
Share, Send, or Email, or it might be accessed from an icon. For details,
see the section in this guide on the specific application.
When you exchange more than one message with a person, the
messages are grouped into a conversation. When you start or continue a
conversation, the upper part of Conversations view displays all messages
you’ve exchanged with this person, and the bottom part provides the area
where you type your next message.
You can carry on multiple conversations at the same time.
Messaging: All messages in one application
1
Open Messaging
2
Do one of the following:
• Start a new conversation: Create a message (see Send and
receive IM messages or Create and send a text message), or tap a
message and reply to it.
What kinds of messages can I send and receive?
You can use the Messaging application to send and receive the following
types of messages:
• Instant messages for an IM account you already have set up online (see
Set up an instant messaging (IM) account). Instant messaging is
available only when your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see
Connect to a new open network or Connect to a new secure network).
• Text messages (see Create and send a text message). This feature is
available only if your device is connected to a compatible HP webOS
smartphone (see Connect your device to a webOS smartphone).
The Synergy feature enables the Messaging app to gather all your
messages to and from the same contact into a single conversation
(sometimes called a “thread”). So you can see your entire message
history with someone regardless of the different methods you happened to
use to communicate with that person (see Work with conversations). You
can even switch from account to account (and, if your device is connected
to a compatible webOS smartphone, from IM to text messaging) without
losing the thread of your conversation (see Switch between messaging
accounts in a conversation)—just pick the messaging account that’s most
likely to keep you in unbroken contact with the person you’re talking to.
• Continue an existing conversation: Tap the conversation.
3
Enter your message.
4
Tap Enter.
TIP You can copy the contents of a conversation as plain text, which you can
paste in a memo, email message, and so on (see Copy messages).
TIP If your device is connected to a compatible webOS smartphone, a single
conversation can contain text and IM messages (see Connect your device to a
webOS smartphone).
Switch between Conversations, Buddies, and Favorites lists
The conversations list shows all of your Messaging conversations, the
buddies list shows all of your IM buddies, and the favorites list shows all
contacts that you have added to Favorites.
1
64
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
.
Open Messaging
.
2
Do one of the following:
• To see your conversations list: Tap
• To see your buddies list: Tap
.
• To see your favorites list: Tap
.
.
Search for conversations or buddies
TIP You can set a preference to show all your buddies, whether they are online
or offline, or to hide offline buddies. Open the application menu and tap Show/
Hide Offline Buddies.
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Do one of the following:
• To search for conversations: Tap
, tap Search, and begin
entering the contact name, IM address, or phone number of the
person the conversation was with.
Switch between messaging accounts in a conversation
• To search for buddies: Tap
the buddy name.
, tap Search, and begin entering
In a single conversation, you can switch between text messaging and an
IM account. So if you are having an IM chat with someone and he or she
goes offline, you can send the person a text message to wrap up the
conversation. Text messaging is available only if your device is connected
to a compatible HP webOS smartphone (see Connect your device to a
webOS smartphone).
Add a favorite
1
Open Messaging
1
2
Tap
3
Tap a contact, or tap Search, begin entering a contact name, and
tap the contact name.
4
Tap a contact.
5
(Optional) Tap the contact name to edit the contact details in
Contacts.
2
In Messaging, start a new conversation or open one that’s listed in
Conversations view.
Tap the button in the upper-right corner of the screen. This button
could be labeled Text, Mobile, or an IM account name. If available,
the other ways to communicate with this contact appear in a list. Tap
the account or phone number you want to use.
.
and tap Add Favorite.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
65
Use emoticons in a message
Table 1. Supported emoticons
To include an emoticon in a message, tap
to display the symbol
keyboard, and then tap an emoticon key. Tap
to return to the
alphanumeric keyboard. If the emoticon you want is not available on the
keyboard, use the table below to add keyboard character combinations
for other emoticons. To learn about entering symbols and alternate
characters, see Enter symbols and alternate characters. Most emoticons
can be created by more than one combination. After you send the
message, the emoticon image appears in the conversation on your device
and on the recipient’s device, as long as the receiving IM application
supports the image.
To display this
emoticon...
This table shows the emoticons that are supported on your device.
NOTE Emoticon combinations that use words, such as :cool or :cry, are not
supported in most messaging applications. Emoticons created using these
combinations may not appear correctly on the recipient’s device.
Table 1. Supported emoticons
To display this
emoticon...
Enter any of these keyboard character combinations...
>:o
>:-o
o_O
>:O
>:-O
>:-(
:angry :mad
8)
8-)
B)
B-)
:’(
=’(
:cry
:[
:-[
:S
:-S
:!
:-!
:eek
:(
:-(
=(
^_^
<3
:heart
O:)
O:-)
^-^
:grin
o:)
o:-)
:-*
:*
=*
=-*
:-D
:D
=D
=-D
>:-)
>:)
:|
:-|
:-&
:&
:)
:-)
:/
:-/
;)
;-)
>:->
=)
:laugh
>:>
:-\
:angel
:lol
:evil
:twisted
:meh
=-&
=-)
:\
:innocent
:kiss
:neutral
=&
:biggrin
:-@
:@
=@
=-@
:sick
:smile
=/
=-/
=\
=-\
:doh
:wink
:-b
=p
=P
=b
=-b
=-p
:cool
Forward a message
=[
=-[
:redface
:s
:-s
%-(
=-(
^^
:P :-P :p :-p :b
=-P :yuck :razz
:confused
%(
X-(
X(
:eww :gross
:sad
:O :-O :o :-o
:shock :omg
66
>:(
Enter any of these keyboard character combinations...
=O
=-O
=o
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
=-o
:surprised
1
Open Messaging
.
2
In a conversation, tap a message.
3
Do one of the following:
• To forward the message through Messaging: Tap Forward, tap the
To field, and enter the recipient’s IM address or number in the To
field, or tap
to search for a contact.
• To forward the message in an email: Tap Forward Via Email, and
enter the recipient’s name or email address in the To field, or tap
to search for a contact.
4
(Optional) Tap the message text, and edit the text.
5
Tap Enter to send a message, or tap Send to send an email.
Copy messages
Resend a failed message
A message might fail to be sent if your device is not connected to a Wi-Fi
network (for IM), or to a webOS smartphone (for text messages), or if it is
experiencing technical problems. When a message fails to be sent, a
is displayed beside it.
1
Tap the message and tap View Error.
2
Tap Send again. Tap Cancel to close the error message.
You can copy an individual message as plain text.
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Tap a conversation.
3
Tap the message and tap Copy Text.
Customize messaging notifications
You can set your device to show a notification and/or play a sound when
a new message arrives. These settings apply to all your Messaging
accounts.
1
Open Messaging
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
In Show Notifications, tap On or Off.
4
When Show Notifications is on, tap Alert, and tap any of the
following:
Delete a message
1
Tap
to open Conversations view and tap a conversation.
2
Tap a message and tap Delete.
Delete a conversation
1
Tap
2
If the Delete Conversation button is not visible in the right-hand
panel, flick down on that panel to scroll to the beginning of the
conversation.
3
Tap Delete Conversation.
.
to open Conversations view and tap a conversation.
Messaging: Instant messaging
Vibrate: The device vibrates with no other sound.
Set up an instant messaging (IM) account
System Sound: The system sound plays.
Your device supports instant messaging through popular online IM
services, such as Google Talk and AIM. If you already have an IM
account, you can sign in through the Messaging app or through the
Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account).
Mute: No sound plays and the device does not vibrate.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
67
The HP Synergy feature (see Your HP TouchPad) provides another
advantage: During the same process you go through to set up a
messaging account, you also set up the same account for all other
applications that can display data from that account. For details on how
Synergy works for the current list of online accounts, see Online accounts
available for webOS devices.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Google Talk account on
your device. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that you
want to receive data from your Google account (besides Messaging, you
can include Contacts, Calendar, Email, and Documents). After setup is
complete, your device begins to download your messages and all data
for all other apps you selected for synchronization.
1
Open Messaging
2
Do one of the following:
Create a Skype account in Messaging
You do not need to have a Skype account set up before using Skype in
Messaging—you can set one up directly from Messaging. You can also
create a Skype account in Accounts (see Use the Accounts application to
set up an online account), Contacts (see Create a Skype account in
Contacts), and Phone & Video Calls.
1
Open Messaging
2
Do one of the following:
• If you have not set up an account in another app that takes
advantage of the Synergy feature: Tap Skype.
.
• If you have not set up an account in another app that takes
advantage of the Synergy feature: Tap an account type and go to
step 3, or tap Find more to find an app for an account type that is
not listed and follow the instructions onscreen.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one: Tap Add an
Account.
• Any other time: Open the application menu and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Tap Add an Account.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one: Tap Add an
Account and tap Skype.
• Any other time: Open the application menu and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Tap Add an Account and tap Skype.
3
Tap Create Account.
4
Tap Accept to agree to Skype’s terms and conditions.
5
Enter the following details:
• Full Name: Enter your full name.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and you want to use that account: Tap Go. You
are done!
68
.
• Skype Name: Enter a name that you will use to identify yourself to
other Skype users.
• Password: Enter a password and then enter it again.
• Email Address: Enter your email address and then enter it again.
3
If you are setting up a Skype account, tap Sign In.
4
Enter your username and password.
6
Tap Create Account, and then tap Create Account.
5
Tap Sign In.
7
Tap Done.
6
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create.
7
Tap Done.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
Sign in to an IM account
1
2
Open Messaging
Tap
TIP You can include emoticons in your message (see Use emoticons in a
message).
.
4
When the message recipient replies, the reply appears below your
message in the conversation. Repeat step 3 to reply to that person.
5
(Optional) If the message contains links, phone numbers, or other
email addresses you can do the following:
to the left of the text Offline and tap Available.
• To call a number: Tap the number, and tap
. This feature is
available only if your device is connected to a compatible HP
webOS smartphone or you have a video calling account set up on
your device (see How can I make and receive calls with my HP
TouchPad?).
Sign out of an IM account
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Tap the status icon to the left of your online status (Available or Busy)
and tap Offline.
• To add a number to Contacts: Tap the number, and tap Add to
Contacts.
• To send an email: Tap the email address.
• To go to a web address: Tap it.
Send and receive IM messages
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that the device is connected to a Wi-Fi
network (see Connect to a new open network or Connect to a new secure
network).
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Do one of the following to start or continue a conversation:
• Tap
to see your buddies and tap a buddy name. If there’s
more than one account for that buddy, the most recently used IM
account is opened. To switch to another IM account, tap the IM
account name in the upper-right, and tap an IM address.
• Tap
to see your favorites and tap a favorite.
• Tap
to see your conversations and tap a conversation.
• Tap
and tap New Conversation. Tap To, enter an IM address,
and tap Enter, or tap
to search for a contact.
3
Tap Enter message here, enter the message text, and tap Enter.
Add a buddy
To add a buddy to an IM account, you must send a buddy request and be
accepted as a buddy by the invitee.
To send a buddy request:
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Tap
3
Tap the IM Service field and tap the account in which you want to
add the buddy.
4
Do one of the following:
and tap Add Buddy.
• To add a Skype buddy: Tap the Buddy Name field, tap Search All
Skype, enter the name or screen name of the buddy you want to
add, and tap
. Tap the buddy name.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
69
• To add a buddy in any other IM account: Tap the Buddy Name
field and enter the buddy details required by the account, for
example, an email address or IM address.
Delete a buddy
1
Open Messaging
5
(Optional, if available) Tap the Invitation Message field and enter a
message for your buddy invitee.
2
Tap
6
Tap Add Buddy.
3
Tap Delete.
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Tap the conversation containing the invitation.
3
Do one of the following:
• To accept a buddy request: Tap
.
• To decline a buddy request: Tap
, and tap Delete.
Block a message sender
You can block a person from contacting you by text or IM if you don’t
want to receive any further messages from them.
1
Open Messaging
2
Tap the status icon to the left of the status description (Available,
Busy, or Offline), and tap your new status.
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Tap a conversation with the person you want to block and tap Block
Sender.
Tap Block Sender.
Your custom message is seen by your IM buddies. It appears next to your
IM screen name and status. It can contain any text you want.
1
Open Messaging
2
Do one of the following:
.
• If you already have a custom message, tap the current message
and enter the new message text.
• If you’re creating a custom message for the first time, tap the status
text (Available or Busy) and enter the custom message text.
3
Tap
.
Change your IM account username and password
If you change the username or password for your IM account online, you
need to enter the updated information for the account on your device.
1
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
.
Change your custom message
You cannot, however, block a person if they are on your IM buddy list. To
block an IM buddy you first need to delete them from your buddy list (see
Delete a buddy).
70
and throw the buddy’s name off the side of the screen.
Change your online status
Receive a buddy request
3
.
Open Messaging
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN The webOS smartphone you are connecting with must
be discoverable. Check the documentation that came with your
smartphone for information on making it discoverable.
4
Tap a field to enter new information and tap Sign In.
1
Open Messaging
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap Connect Phone and do one of the following:
Delete an IM account
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Account again to confirm.
Messaging: Text messaging
.
• If the smartphone you want to connect to is listed in the Devices
list, tap it.
• If the smartphone you want to connect to is not listed in the
Devices list, tap Add Device, tap the Type field, and then tap
webOS Phone. When the smartphone you want to connect to is
found, tap it.
Create and send a text message
BEFORE YOU BEGIN
IMPORTANT You can view, reply to, and send text messages on your HP
TouchPad only if the device is connected to a compatible HP webOS
smartphone. See Connect your device to a webOS smartphone for information.
Connect your device to a webOS smartphone
To send and receive text messages on your device, you must use Bluetooth
to pair and connect your device and a webOS smartphone. You can do
this manually from the Bluetooth app (see Make a pairing request to
another device and Connect with a paired device) or, if your device and
smartphone share the same HP webOS Account, you can use Touch to
Share to create a Bluetooth connection (see Pair with an HP webOS
smartphone using Touch to Share).
• Connect your device to a webOS smartphone (see Connect your
device to a webOS smartphone).
• Before you use your device to send or receive text messages, refer to
your smartphone’s service plan for pricing and availability of text
messaging.
• Make sure that the smartphone your device is connected to is on and
that you’re inside a coverage area. See the documentation that came
with your smartphone for information about turning wireless services
on.
TIP You can also use Just Type to write a text message from Card view. Tap Just
type and start typing a message. Under Quick Actions, tap New Message. The
Messaging application opens at a new message, with the text you entered in the
body of the message.
1
Open Messaging
.
You can also make the pairing request or connection from the Messaging
app.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
71
2
Tap New Conversation. Tap the To field and do one of the following
to address the message:
3
• To call a number: Tap the number, and tap
. This feature is
available only if your device is connected to a compatible HP
webOS smartphone or you have a video calling account set up on
your device (see How can I make and receive calls with my HP
TouchPad?).
• Enter a contact’s first or last name or initials, screen name, phone
number, or email address. When you enter a contact name,
favorites appear at the top of the search results (see Create a
favorite). Tap the phone number, IM account name, or email
address you want to use to send the message when it appears.
• Tap
3
4
(Optional) Do any of the following from the body of the message:
• To add a number to Contacts: Tap the number, and tap Add to
Contacts.
to open your full contact list. Tap the contact you want.
• Enter a phone number for a recipient who is not a contact.
• To send an email: Tap the email address.
• Do you need to enter a short code that contains letters—for
example, to text a vote to a TV poll or to make a donation to a
charity? Use the keyboard to enter it; just tap the letter keys and
tap the code that appears under Short Code. This is not the same
as dialing a number that is expressed as letters—for example,
(555) 256 TALK. To dial a number like this, you must use the
Phone app’s dial pad and tap the numbers that correspond to the
letters T,A,L,K— which would be 8255.
• To go to a web address: Tap it.
(Optional) Tap the To field and repeat step 2 to enter additional
recipients.
Tap Enter message here, enter the message text, and tap Enter.
TIP You can include emoticons in your message (see Use emoticons in a
message).
Add a contact from a text message
To add a message sender as a contact:
1
In Conversations view, tap a conversation with someone who is not a
contact.
2
Tap the header at the top of the screen.
3
Tap Add to contacts.
4
Tap one of the following:
Add New Contact: Create a new contact for the number.
Receive and view text messages
NOTE If your device is connected to compatible webOS smartphone and you
receive a message that contains multimedia attachments, such as pictures,
videos, animated GIFs, music files, or vCards, a notification is displayed, saying
“New MMS on your phone”. You must open the message on your smartphone
to view the attachment.
72
1
Open Messaging
.
2
Tap a conversation to view messages.
Chapter 6 : Email, text, multimedia, and instant messaging
Add To Existing: Tap the contact you want to add the number to.
View a contact’s information from a message
• In a conversation, tap the header of a message received from a contact
to open the contact entry.
7 Photos, videos, and music
73
77
78
78
Work with panels in Photos & Videos
Photos & Videos
HP Movie Store
YouTube
Music
When the Photos & Videos app opens, there are two panels visible on the
screen. For information about hiding and resizing these panels, see Resize
panels/display or hide levels in an app.
Photos & Videos
Look at pictures
To get pictures on the device, you can do any of the following:
Use Photos & Videos for the first time
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Do one of the following:
.
• To set up an online account to sync: To set up an account that is
listed, tap the account type, and go to step 3. To set up an
account type that is not listed, tap Find more to find an app and
follow the instructions onscreen.
• To use Photos & Videos without creating an online account: Tap
Done.
3
4
Enter the account information, and then tap Sign in.
• Copy pictures from your computer (see Copy files between your device
and your computer).
• Receive pictures as email attachments (see Open email attachments).
• View pictures downloaded from an online account (see Set up an online
pictures or videos account on your device).
• Copy a picture from a web page (see Work with images on a web
page).
The following table shows you the picture formats that you can see on
your device and the apps you can see them in.
Table 1. Picture formats viewable on your device
Picture format
Download from Email
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create Account.
View in Photos &
Videos
BMP
√
√
Tap Go.
JPG
√
√
PNG
√
√
GIF
√ (see Note)
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
73
NOTE You can download and look at GIFs in Email, and they are saved to USB
storage, but you can't look at GIFs in Photos & Videos or use one as wallpaper.
You can also look at pictures on the web directly in the web browser (see
Web).
1
Open Photos & Videos
.
2
Tap the album containing the picture, and tap the thumbnail of the
picture.
3
Swipe left or right on the screen to look at other pictures in the
album.
4
To return to the album, tap [album name]. Tap the screen if the
album name button is not visible.
2
Tap an album.
3
Tap the thumbnail of the video you want to watch. Video thumbnails
are identified with a
icon.
Use YouTube to view YouTube videos (see YouTube).
Use video playback controls
• Tap the video to manually display or dismiss the playback controls.
Table 2. Video playback controls
Control
Function
Play.
Watch a video
Pause.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you put videos on your device, make sure you
Move forward or backward (tap and hold the slider, and
then drag it right to move forward or left to move backward).
have enough storage space on your device to fit the file. Open Device
Info
and look at the Available field under Device.
To get videos on your device, you can do any of the following:
• Copy videos from your computer (see Copy files between your device
and your computer).
• Receive videos as email attachments (see Open email attachments).
You can view DRM-free videos that you receive as email attachments or
that you copy from your computer in the MPEG-4, H.263, and H.264
formats. Videos play on your device in landscape orientation.
KEY TERM DRM-free: A file that is not protected by Digital Rights Management.
DRM-free video files can be copied as many times as you like and can be
played on your HP TouchPad.
1
74
Open Photos & Videos
.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
Switch between full-screen view and the original size.
Use the volume button on the side of your device to control the sound
level.
Organize your pictures and videos into albums
The Photos & Videos app organizes the pictures and videos you add to
your device into predefined libraries and albums. There are two libraries,
All Photos & Videos and My TouchPad, each containing several albums.
The All Photos & Videos library contains all albums on your device,
including those downloaded from online accounts. Pictures downloaded
from online accounts are not stored on your device. The My TouchPad
library contains only albums containing pictures and videos that are
stored on your device. The following table tells you where to find your
pictures and videos both in the Photos & Videos app and in your device’s
USB Drive storage.
Copy pictures or videos to an album
Table 3. Picture and video locations
Origin of pictures or
videos
Album in Photos &
videos
Folder in USB storage
Email
Downloads
1
Open Photos & Videos
.
downloads
2
Tap the album containing the pictures or videos.
Copied from computer Miscellaneous
Root level of USB
storage
3
Do one of the following:
Device
Screen captures
screencaptures
Preinstalled on your
device
Wallpapers
wallpapers
Online account
Folder downloaded
from the online
account
Not available in USB
storage
Copied from another
album in Photos &
Videos
Album created by you
in Photos & Videos
Album created by you
in Photos & Videos
Copied from
elsewhere
[Folder created by you
in USB storage]
[Folder created by you
containing at least
one BMP, JPG, PNG,
or MP4]
• To copy more than one picture or video: Tap
and tap Select All
to select all pictures or videos in an album. To remove a file from
the selection, tap it.
• To copy a single picture or video: Tap the thumbnail of the picture
or video.
4
Tap
. Tap the screen if
5
Do either of the following:
is not visible.
• To create a new album: Tap Create New Album, enter the album
name, and tap Create Album.
• To select an existing album: Tap an album.
You can use any picture that is stored on your device as wallpaper (see
Change your wallpaper). The picture does not have to be in the
Wallpapers album.
Look at pictures in a slideshow
You can assign any pictures or videos on your device to one of these
albums or to an album you create.
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Tap the album you want to view as a slideshow.
3
Do one of the following:
Create an album
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Tap New Album.
3
Enter the album name and tap Create Album.
You can view the pictures in any album as a slideshow.
.
• To start with the first picture in the album: Tap
.
.
• To select a different starting point: Tap the picture you want the
slideshow to start at and tap
.
4
To exit the slideshow, tap a picture.
New albums that you create are added to the All Photos & Videos
and My TouchPad libraries.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
75
Print pictures
6
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device supports printing on all network-capable
Number of Copies: Tap 1 and tap the number of copies you want to
print.
HP printers that support PCL page description language in the local LAN.
These printers include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart,
Officejet, and LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years
old or newer. Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your
device and the printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless
network. For personal printers, see the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
For more information about working with printers, see Print Manager.
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Tap the album containing the pictures.
3
Do either of the following:
• To print more than one picture: Tap
and tap Select All to select
all pictures in an album. To remove a file from the selection, tap it.
4
Tap
. Tap the screen if
is not visible.
Printers that are available on your current wireless network are
displayed.
5
Do one of the following:
• If this is your first time using a printer on this network: If a list of
printers is displayed, tap one.
• If you have already used a printer on this network: The last printer
you used is remembered and is selected. If you want to select
another printer, scroll down and tap Select Another Printer.
• To set up a printer manually or on a corporate network: Scroll
down in the list of printers and tap Add a Printer. Tap Enter an IP
address and enter the IP address of the printer. (Optional) Tap
Name this printer and enter a name to identify the printer. Tap
Done.
76
Size: Tap the current size and tap to select another size. The sizes
displayed are those that are available on your printer.
Color Printing: Tap On to switch color printing from On to Off.
7
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
Tap Print.
To cancel a print job, tap Cancel while the file is preparing to print,
or while printing is in progress, tap
at the top of the screen, tap
the notification, and then tap
to the right of the print job in the
Print Queue.
.
• To print a single picture: Tap the thumbnail of the picture.
(Optional) Depending on the printer you are using, you can set the
following printer attributes:
Add a comment to a picture or video in an online account
You can add comments to pictures that were downloaded from an online
account, and you can view comments that have been made by others
about those pictures.
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Tap the album containing the picture or video, and tap a picture or
video thumbnail.
3
Tap
4
Tap the comment box and enter a comment.
5
Tap
. Tap the screen if
.
is not visible.
to upload your comment. Tap
to close the comment box.
Set up an online pictures or videos account on your device
Delete pictures or videos
To view pictures in an account you have with a web service such as
Facebook or Snapfish, you must set up the account on your device.
You can delete pictures and videos that are stored on your device. These
are displayed in the My TouchPad library. Pictures and videos that were
downloaded from an online account cannot be deleted from your device.
To delete these, you must log in to the online account and delete them
from there.
DID YOU KNOW? If you set up a Facebook account in the Photos & Videos
application and you leave “Use account with” Calendar and Contacts turned on
when setting up the account, your Facebook contacts and calendar events
appear in the Contacts and Calendar applications on your device also.
Likewise, if you set up a Facebook account in Contacts, and you accept the
default options while setting up that account, the account is already set up in
Photos & Videos. See Online accounts available for webOS devices for
information about the behavior of Facebook, Snapfish, and other online
accounts on your device.
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap Add an Account, and tap the type of account you want to add.
To set up an account type that is not listed, tap Find more to find an
app and follow the instructions onscreen.
1
Open Photos & Videos
2
Tap the album containing the pictures or videos.
3
Tap
Enter your account username and password and tap Sign In.
5
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create Account.
Delete an online pictures or videos account
1
Open Photos & Videos
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Account again to confirm.
and do one of the following:
• To delete more than one file: Tap Select All to select all pictures or
videos in an album. To remove files that you do not want to delete
from the selection, tap the file thumbnails.
.
4
.
• To delete a single file: Tap a thumbnail.
4
Tap
.
5
Tap Delete to confirm.
HP Movie Store
HP Movie Store allows you to buy and rent the latest movies and television
shows in high definition. Shows are downloaded directly to your device,
and, once downloaded, can be enjoyed without an Internet connection.
Install HP Movie Store
1
Open HP App Catalog
.
2
Tap Search, and type HP Movie Store in the search field.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
77
3
4
Tap Free beside the HP Movie Store app.
Get music onto your device
HP Movie Store is added to the Downloads page on the Launcher.
To get music onto your device, you can do any of the following:
(Optional) Tap Launch.
YouTube
Watch a YouTube video
The YouTube icon on your device takes you to the YouTube website, where
you can watch videos available online.
1
Open YouTube
.
2
Enter a search term for a video and tap Enter, or browse to a video.
3
Tap the video thumbnail to play the video.
4
Use the YouTube playback controls to interact with the video.
Music
• Copy music files from your computer (see Copy files between your
device and your computer). You can copy music files to any folder on
your device’s USB drive. However, to make it easy to find and manage
files, consider creating a “Music” folder to store your files.
• Use solutions that may be available from third-party software
developers (sold separately) that facilitate the transfer of music files to
your device. For more information about the availability of third-party
solutions, open the browser on your computer and go to
hpwebos.com/sync-solutions.
• Listen to music files received as email attachments (see Open email
attachments).
• Sync with HP Play on your computer (see Use HP Play to sync music
from your computer to your device).
Table 4. Music formats playable on webOS devices
File format
Play in Music/Copy to USB
storage
Download from Email
AAC
√
√ (see Note)
AAC+
√
√ (see Note)
eAAC+
√
√ (see Note)
AMR
MP3TM
You can add and listen to DRM-free music files on your device. You can
listen to music through the stereo speakers on your device (see Front view)
or through headphones (sold separately). If you have speakers or a stereo
headset (both sold separately) that are equipped with Bluetooth® wireless
technology, you can also use them to listen to music. You can also listen to
streaming music from the web directly in the web browser (see Web).
KEY TERM DRM-free: A file that is not protected by Digital Rights Management.
DRM-free music files can be copied as many times as you like and can be
played on your HP TouchPad.
78
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
√ (see Note)
√
QCELP
WAV
√ (see Note)
√ (see Note)
√
√ (see Note)
NOTE Depending on how the sender’s email server has configured the
attached music file, you may be able to download and listen to any of the listed
file types in Email, but files you play Email are not saved to USB storage. To
save an attachment to USB storage, tap and hold the attachment name, and tap
Save Attachment. QCELP and AMR files are not listed in Music.
Show/hide the Library or Playlist lists
• To listen to an album: Tap Albums and tap the album name. Tap
the first song.
The Music app organizes the audio content you add to your device under
two main headings: Library and Playlists. The Library heading organizes
your audio content into four predefined categories: Songs, Artists,
Albums, and Genres. Tap a category to see content organized in that
category. The Playlists list contains playlists that you create on the device
and playlists you import from other sources, for example from HP Play.
• To listen to all songs in a genre: Tap Genres and tap the genre
name. Tap the first song.
• To show the Library or Playlists lists: Tap
. To hide them, tap
.
By default, items in a Library category or playlist are displayed in a list in
the right-hand panel. To see Album Art instead of the list, tap
. To
return to the list, tap
.
4
(Optional) Songs play in the order they are displayed onscreen. To
listen to them in random order: Tap
.
5
To end play, close the Music app.
Use music playback controls
Use the volume button (see Get to know your device) to control the sound
level.
Listen to music
Table 5. Music playback controls
After you begin to play music, music continues to play if you switch to
another application or turn off the screen. If you are connected to a
webOS smartphone using a Bluetooth connection and a call comes in,
music pauses automatically and resumes when you hang up or ignore the
call.
Control
Play.
Pause.
Rewind.
If you put the Music app in the background while you work in another
app, a music notification icon appears at the top of the screen. Tap the
icon to display the music playback controls. You can use the controls even
if the screen is locked.
1
Add music files to your device. See Get music onto your device.
2
Open Music
3
Do one of the following:
Fast forward.
Shuffle current playlist.
Play in list order.
Move forward or backward in a song. Tap and hold the
slider, and then drag it right to move forward or left to
move backward.
.
• To listen to all songs on your device: Tap Songs. Tap the first song.
• To listen to a specific song: Tap Songs, Artists, Albums, Genres, or
a playlist you created, to search that category. Continue making
selections until the song you want appears. Tap the song name.
• To listen to all songs from an artist: Tap Artists and tap the artist
name. Tap the first song.
Function
Create a playlist
1
Open Music
.
2
Tap Add Playlist.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
79
3
Enter a name for the playlist.
Delete songs from a playlist
4
Tap Create.
You can delete songs from playlists you created on your device. Songs
you delete from a playlist are not deleted from the Music app. You can still
access them in the Library and any other playlist they are in.
Add music to a playlist
1
Open Music
.
2
Tap and hold a song or album, wait for the visual cue, and then
drag the song or album to the playlist.
Sort all songs or a playlist
1
Open Music
.
2
Tap Songs or a playlist you created and do one of the following:
Songs in playlists you synchronized from HP Play cannot be deleted on
your device. To delete a song from a HP Play playlist, you must delete it
from the playlist in HP Play on your computer and then synchronize HP
Play with your device (see Manually sync music from HP Play to your
device).
1
Open Music
.
2
Tap the playlist name and tap
3
Tap
4
Tap Done.
.
beside the songs you want to delete.
• To sort by song: Tap Song.
• To sort by artist: Tap Artist.
Search Songs, Artists, Albums, Genres, or playlists
• To sort by Album: Tap Album.
Table 6. Search for music
Edit a playlist name
1
Open Music
.
2
Tap the playlist name and tap
3
Tap the playlist name field and enter a new name for the playlist.
4
Tap Done.
.
NOTE If you sync with HP Play, playlist names for playlists you created in HP
Play on your computer cannot be changed on the device.
80
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
To do this...
Do the following...
Search for a song
Tap Songs, tap
name.
, and begin entering the song
Search for an artist Tap Artists, tap
name.
, and begin entering the artist
Search for an
album
Tap Albums, tap
album name.
Search for a genre Tap Genres, tap
name.
To close the search field, tap
.
, and begin entering the
, and begin entering the genre
Delete a playlist
On a Windows computer, right click the drive representing your
device and click Eject.
You can delete playlists you created on your device.
Playlists you synchronized from HP Play cannot be deleted on your device.
To delete a HP Play playlist, you must delete it from HP Play on your
computer and then synchronize HP Play with your device (see Manually
sync music from HP Play to your device).
1
Open Music
.
2
Tap the playlist name and tap
3
Tap Delete Playlist.
On a Mac computer, drag the drive representing your device to the
Trash. The Trash icon changes to Eject.
7
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB Drive
screen no longer appears on your device.
Use HP Play to sync music from your computer to your device
.
Delete a song from your device
To delete a song file from your device, you must put your device in USB
Drive mode and delete the song using your computer.
1
Connect your device and your computer using the USB cable.
2
On your device, tap USB Drive. If prompted, tap OK. On your
computer, your device appears as a removable drive.
For computer system requirements for using USB Drive mode, go to
hpwebos.com/webos-usbmode-en.
3
On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard
opens, click Cancel to close the wizard.
4
Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac), and double click the drive
representing your device.
5
Delete the song using your computer’s controls.
6
End the connection safely. If you do not eject your device safely, your
device resets, and may experience data loss, when you disconnect
the USB cable:
If you have music in your HP Play library on your computer, you can sync
the songs in your HP Play library to the Music app on your device. If you
have music in an iTunes library, the contents of that library are copied to
HP Play when you install it on your computer (see Install HP Play), and you
can then sync all your iTunes music to your device from HP Play. Music
you add to iTunes after you install HP Play is copied to HP Play
automatically.
You can set up HP Play to sync automatically with your device each time
you connect it to your computer (see Set up HP Play to sync with your
device), or, if you choose not to sync automatically, you can manually
sync HP Play with your device at any time (see Manually sync music from
HP Play to your device). Playlists sync one way, from HP Play on your
computer to your device, and playlists synchronized from HP Play cannot
be changed on your device.
Install HP Play
On a Windows computer:
1
Open your computer’s browser and go to hpplay.com.
2
Click Download the installer and double-click to install, and then
click Run.
3
If an “Unknown publisher” message appears, click Run to continue.
4
Click Install, (optional) uncheck Launch HP Play to stop HP Play from
opening immediately, and click Finish.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
81
If you chose to open HP Play immediately, see Set up HP Play to sync
with your device.
On a Mac:
6
(Optional) To automatically sync music to your smartphone when it is
connected to the computer, check Automatically sync music to this
device.
7
Click OK.
8
Your device appears under Devices in the left-hand panel of HP Play.
Click the device name and do either of the following:
1
Open your computer’s browser and go to hpplay.com.
2
Click Download the MAC installer.
3
If required, click OK.
• To set up manual sync: Click Manual, and then click Apply. You
are done! See Manually sync music from HP Play to your device.
4
When HP Play has finished downloading, drag the HP Play icon to
the Applications folder.
• To set up automatic sync: Click Auto and continue to step 9.
9
Auto Sync Music: If you selected the auto sync option in step 6, this
is already selected. Uncheck this box to turn off auto sync.
Set up HP Play to sync with your device
BEFORE YOU BEGIN We recommend that you copy all of your music files
from your device to your computer as a backup before beginning to sync
with HP Play (see Copy files and folders using USB Drive mode).
Optionally, you can then add these files to HP Play on your computer and
sync them from there back to your device.
1
If HP Play did not open automatically after installing it, do one of the
following on your computer to open it:
• On a Windows computer: Open HP Play from the start menu or
double-click
.
• On a Mac: Open the Applications folder and double-click
2
.
For computer system requirements for using USB Drive mode, go to
hpwebos.com/webos-usbmode-en.
82
Sync all music and playlists: Available only when Auto Sync Music is
turned on. Sync all HP Play music and playlists to your device.
Sync selected playlists: Available only when Auto Sync Music is
turned on. Allows you to choose which of the listed playlists you
want to sync.
10
If you made changes to the default sync settings, click Apply, and
then click Sync. If you did not make changes, click Sync.
11
A warning may appear to tell you that the contents of the Music app
on your device will be erased and replaced with the files you are
syncing from HP Play. Click Continue if you want to proceed.
12
When HP Play finishes synchronizing, end the connection between
your device and the computer safely. If you do not eject your device
safely, your device resets, and may experience data loss, when you
disconnect the USB cable:
Connect your device and your computer using the USB cable.
3
On your device, tap USB Drive. If prompted, tap OK.
4
On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard
opens, click Cancel to close the wizard.
5
In the Device Setup dialog box, click the Name field and enter a
name for your device.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
Select any of the following sync settings:
On a Windows computer, in Windows Explorer, right-click the drive
representing your smartphone and click Eject.
On a Mac computer, drag the drive representing your smartphone to
the Trash. The Trash icon changes to Eject.
13
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB Drive
screen no longer appears on your smartphone.
Manually sync music from HP Play to your device
1
Open HP Play on your computer.
2
Connect your device and your computer using the USB cable.
3
On your device, tap USB Drive. If prompted, tap OK.
For computer system requirements for using USB Drive mode, go to
hpwebos.com/webos-usbmode-en.
4
On a Windows computer, if the Found New Hardware wizard
opens, click Cancel to close the wizard.
Your device appears under Devices in the left-hand panel of HP Play.
5
Do one of the following:
• To add a song or playlist: Click a song or playlist and drag it on
top of your device’s name. Repeat for any other songs or playlists.
• To delete a playlist: Right-click the playlist and click Delete.
• To delete a song from a playlist: Click the playlist name, right-click
the song, and click Remove. Click Remove to confirm.
6
When HP Play finishes syncing, end the connection between your
device and the computer safely. If you do not eject your device
safely, your device resets, and may experience data loss, when you
disconnect the USB cable:
On a Windows computer, in Windows Explorer, right click the drive
representing your device and click Eject.
On a Mac computer, drag the drive representing your device to the
Trash. The Trash icon changes to Eject.
7
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB Drive
screen no longer appears on your device.
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
83
84
Chapter 7 : Photos, videos, and music
8 Web
85
89
Search the web
Web
Maps
Do one of the following:
• In Card view, tap Just type, type the search term, and then tap a search
engine (for example, Google).
• Open Web
, enter the search term, and tap Enter.
Web
Go to a website
The web browser on your device is capable of displaying most web
content. The browser supports HTML5 and Adobe Flash.
1
Do one of the following:
• In Card view, tap Just type, type the site address (for example,
hp.com), and tap Go to website.
• Open Web
and enter the site address. If the page appears in
the history list, tap it to go there again. If not, tap Enter.
When entering a website address (URL), you don’t need to enter
“http://www.”
DID YOU KNOW? If you browse to a secure web page, the lock icon in the
address line appears closed.
2
To cancel a page while it is loading, tap
.
Navigate a web page
Table 1. Web page navigation
To do this...
Do the following...
Move back
through previously
viewed pages
Tap
.
Move forward
through previously
viewed pages
Tap
.
Refresh
Tap
.
Scroll
Drag or flick up/down on the screen.
View in landscape
Turn the device on its side.
Chapter 8 : Web
85
Table 1. Web page navigation
To do this...
Do the following...
Zoom in/out of a
page
Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen. Pinch in to
decrease the size of items onscreen. Double-tap
the screen to zoom in or out a specified amount.
Zoom in on a
column
Double tap the column to center it and enlarge it.
Double tap again to zoom out to see the whole
page again.
Pan
Tap, hold, and drag the page.
Enter information
in a form
Tap the form field. Enter or select information and
tap Enter.
Share a web
address as a link
in an email
message
Tap
and then tap Share Link. Create the email
message.
old or newer. Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your
device and the printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless
network. For personal printers, see the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
1
Open the web page that you want to print and wait until the blue
progress bar runs the full way from left to right across the top of the
screen and disappears.
2
Open the application menu and tap Print.
Printers that are available on your current wireless network are
displayed.
3
• If this is your first time using a printer on this network: If a list of
printers is displayed, tap one.
• If you have already used a printer on this network: The last printer
you used is remembered and is selected. If you want to select
another printer, scroll down and tap Select Another Printer.
Open another browser
• To set up a printer manually or on a corporate network: Scroll
down in the list of printers and tap Add a Printer. Tap Enter an IP
address and enter the IP address of the printer. (Optional) Tap
Name this printer and enter a name to identify the printer. Tap
Done.
If you are looking at one web page and need to check something on a
different one, simply open another browser.
1
Tap
2
Enter the address or search term for the second instance of the
browser.
3
To move between the two pages, press Center
to display Card
view. The web pages are displayed in a stack. Tap the one you
want.
.
Print a web page
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device supports printing on all network-capable
HP printers that support PCL page description language in the local LAN.
These printers include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart,
Officejet, and LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years
86
Chapter 8 : Web
Do one of the following:
4
Depending on the printer you are using, you can set the following
printer attributes:
Number of Copies: Tap 1 and tap the number of copies you want to
print.
Color Printing: Tap On to switch color printing from On to Off.
5
Tap Print.
To cancel a print job, tap Cancel while the file is preparing to print,
or while printing is in progress, tap
at the top of the screen, tap
the notification, and then tap
to the right of the print job in the
Print Queue.
Use Flash content
Flash content plays as soon as you open a website.
Do any of the following:
• To use playback controls with Flash content and interact with other
active areas: Tap the Flash content.
• To zoom in on Flash content: Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen.
• To zoom out on Flash content: Pinch in to decrease the size of items
onscreen.
• To exit full-screen mode while using Flash content: Press Center
.
The ability to use Flash content is turned on by default. To turn it off: Open
the application menu and tap Preferences. In Enable Flash, tap On to
switch it from On to Off. You can turn Flash auto-load off also. If auto-load
is turned off, when you open a web page, Flash content on the page
appears with a play
button. Tap
to play the Flash content. To turn
auto-load off: Open the application menu and tap Preferences. In
Autoload Flash, tap On to switch it from On to Off.
3
Do any of the following:
To edit the title: Tap the title. See Text selection gestures for useful
gestures if you want to edit the page title.
To edit the URL: Tap the URL and enter or edit the URL for the page.
For example, change the URL to the home page of a site instead of a
drill-down page within the site.
4
Tap Add to launcher.
Flash on your device does not support the following:
The page now appears as an icon on the Favorites page of the Launcher.
Tap the icon to open the page. To delete the page from the Launcher, see
Delete an application.
• Games that require arrow keys as controls. The device keyboard has no
arrow keys, so unless a game enables the remapping of keys, you
cannot play that game on your device.
• Hover states on Flash content.
• Some video streaming methods.
Create a bookmark
1
Open the page you want to bookmark.
2
Tap
Add a web page to the Launcher
, and tap
on the bookmarks tab.
If the bookmarks tab is not open, tap
.
Add any web pages you visit frequently to the Launcher so you can
access them in a few taps.
1
Open the page you want to add to the Launcher.
2
Tap
, and tap Add to Launcher.
3
Tap
to close the Bookmarks panel.
Chapter 8 : Web
87
NOTE Web bookmarks are part of the data backed up to your HP webOS
Account.
Open a bookmarked page
• Open Web
and enter a term or address in the address bar that
matches the page name or address.
• To clear your browsing history: Open Web
, open the application
menu, tap Preferences, and then tap Clear History.
Use links on a web page
Do one of the following:
Table 2. Use links on a web page
• In Card view, tap Just type, type a few characters of the bookmark title,
and then tap Bookmarks & History. Scroll to find the bookmark you
want, and tap to open it.
• To open a bookmark if it’s not on the start page, or after you navigate
away from the start page: Tap
, and tap the bookmark on the
Bookmarks tab. If the Bookmarks tab is not open, tap .
To do this...
Do the following...
Go to another
page
Tap the link.
Open a link in
another browser
Tap and hold the link. Tap Open In New Card.
Share via email
Tap
Copy the URL
Tap and hold the link. Tap Copy URL.
Edit or delete a bookmark
1
Open Web
.
2
Tap
3
Do either of the following:
.
• To edit: Tap
to the right of the bookmark name. Change the
title or URL and tap Save Bookmark.
• To delete: Throw the bookmark off the side of the screen and tap
Delete.
Return to previously viewed web pages
, and tap Share Link.
Work with images on a web page
Table 3. Work with images on a web page
To do this...
Do the following...
Copy an image to
Photos & Videos
Tap and hold the image. Tap Copy to Photos.
Pictures you copy from the web are stored in the
Miscellaneous album in Photos & Videos.
Share an image
via email
Tap and hold the image. Tap Share Image.
Use an image as
wallpaper
Tap and hold the image, tap Set Wallpaper, and
then tap OK.
Do one of the following:
• In Card view, tap Just type, type a few characters of a keyword relating
to the page you are looking for, and then tap Bookmarks & History.
Scroll to find the page you want, and tap to open it.
• Open Web
, tap
, and then tap
. Scroll to the page name and
tap the page.
88
Chapter 8 : Web
Download files from the web
1
Open Web
.
2
Go to the web page with the file you want to download.
3
Tap the file name.
4
If an app on your device supports the file type, the file name is
displayed in the Downloads panel. Tap Open.
3
Set any of the following:
Default Web Search Engine: Select your default search engine.
Block Popups: Prevents websites from opening up new browser
windows. Tap On to switch Block Popups from On to Off.
Accept Cookies: Allows cookies from any website you view, even if
you are redirected to a site from another site. Tap On to switch
Accept Cookies from On to Off.
Enable JavaScript: Tap On to switch JavaScript from On to Off.
Turning off JavaScript may prevent some websites from functioning
properly.
All files are downloaded to the device’s USB storage. If an app on
your device supports the file type, you can also find the file in that
app. For example, if it’s a PDF file, find it in Adobe Reader, and if
it’s an MP3 file, find it in Music.
Enable Flash: Tap On to switch it from On to Off. Turning off Flash
content prevents Flash content from displaying.
Autoload Flash: Enables Flash content to begin playing as soon as
you open a website. Tap Off to switch it from Off to On.
Add a web search engine
Clear Bookmarks: Tap to delete your bookmarks.
When you browse to some websites that use search functionality, such as
dictionary.com, you may see the notification Web Search Engine
Available. This means that you can add this website to the list of search
engines your device uses when you use Just Type to enter a search term
while in Card view.
1
Tap
at the top of the screen and then tap the Tap to add as
Search Engine notification.
2
Check the box to the left of the website name in the Search Using
section of the Just Type preferences to add this website as a search
option in Just Type.
Customize web browser settings
1
Open Web
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences.
Clear History: Tap to delete your browsing history.
Clear Cookies: Tap to delete cookies used by some websites to
remember visiting history and user settings.
Clear Cache: Tap to delete any web page content that has been
stored in the local cache. This ensures that you are viewing the most
current content when you visit a web page.
4
Tap Done.
Maps
.
Search for a location
1
Open Maps
.
Chapter 8 : Web
89
2
If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services for this
session.
3
Do one of the following:
• To search for a new address: Tap the Search or Address field,
enter an address, and tap Enter.
• To find an address you saved: Tap
location.
5
If you want to start at a location other than your current location, tap
Current Location, and enter a new starting location or tap a location
you viewed recently.
6
Tap the address field to the right of Current Location and enter a new
starting location and tap Enter, or tap a location you viewed
recently. To get directions to an address you saved, tap
, and tap
Saved. Tap a location and tap Directions To Here.
7
Do any of the following:
, tap Saved, and tap a
• To find an address you searched for recently: Tap
Recents, and tap a location.
4
(Optional) To save the location, tap
, tap
5
(Optional) To get directions to the location, tap
, tap
• For driving directions: Tap
• For public transport directions: Tap
, and tap Save.
, tap
.
NOTE The Maps app cannot determine your location and therefore cannot
work properly unless a location service is turned on (see Turn Google Services
on/off).
• For walking directions: Tap
.
To see the route in writing, tap
. Tap the transit mode icons at the
top of the panel to see driving, public transport, or walking routes.
Tap
to close the directions panel.
9
Tap Start to see step-by-step directions on the map. Tap
to the next step, and
to go to the previous step.
type, start typing the address or location name and, under Search Maps, tap
Maps. If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services for this session.
The Maps application opens with the closest match to your search term
displayed in the map header.
to move
NOTE The Maps app cannot determine your location and therefore cannot
work properly unless a location service is turned on (see Turn Google Services
on/off).
Work with saved locations
Get directions
1
Open Maps
2
If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services for this
session.
3
Tap
.
4
If required, tap OK to turn on your location.
.
Chapter 8 : Web
.
8
TIP You can search for a location in Maps directly from Card view. Tap Just
90
.
1
Open Maps
.
2
If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services for this
session.
3
Do any of the following:
• To view a saved location: Tap
tap a location.
, tap
, tap Saved, and then
• To get directions to a saved location from your current location:
Tap
, tap
, and tap Saved. Tap a location and tap
Directions To Here.
• To get directions from a saved location to your current location:
Tap
, tap
, and tap Saved. Tap a location and tap
Directions From Here.
• To get directions from one saved location to another saved
location: Tap
, tap
, and tap Saved. Tap a location and tap
Directions From Here. Tap
, tap Saved, tap a location, and
then tap Directions To Here.
• To delete a saved location: Tap
, tap Saved, throw the location
off the side of the screen and tap Delete to confirm.
Work with locations you viewed recently
Open Maps
.
2
If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services for this
session.
Do any of the following:
• To view a recently viewed location: Tap
and then tap a location.
, tap
Do one of the following:
• If you have Location Services turned on: Tap
.
• If you do not have Location Services turned on: Tap
and tap
Launch. Open the Location Services application menu, tap Locate Me
Using, and tap Google Services. Press Center
and tap the Maps
app in Card view. Tap Allow Once to allow the Maps app to use your
location for this session.
Do any of the following:
• To pan a map: Tap, hold, and drag the map.
• To zoom in/out on a map: Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen. Pinch in
to decrease the size of items onscreen.
, tap Recents,
• To get directions to a recently viewed location from your current
location: Tap
, tap
, and tap Recents. Tap a location and
tap Directions To Here.
• To get directions from a recently viewed location to your current
location: Tap
, tap
, and tap Recents. Tap a location and
tap Directions From Here.
• To save a recently viewed location: Tap
, tap
, tap Recents,
and then tap a location. Tap , tap
, and then tap Save.
• To get directions from one recently viewed location to another
recently viewed location: Tap
, tap
, and tap Recents. Tap a
location and tap Directions From Here. Tap
, tap Recents, tap a
location, and then tap Directions To Here.
• To delete a location: Tap
, tap Recents, throw the location off
the side of the screen, and tap Delete .
• To delete all recently viewed locations: Tap
tap Clear.
If you are viewing a map of a location far from where you are currently,
you can reposition the map to show your current location.
Move around and zoom in/out on a map
1
3
View your current location
Customize the map view
1
Open Maps
.
2
If prompted, tap Allow Once to turn on Location Services for this
session.
3
Tap
and tap any of the following:
Road: Displays a two dimensional view showing roads and
landmarks.
Satellite: Shows a satellite image.
Bird’s Eye: Shows a map made up of images taken from the air.
, tap Recents, and
Chapter 8 : Web
91
Show Traffic: Shows major roads and commute paths colored to
indicate their current traffic status. The color scale runs from green
(meaning free-flowing traffic), through yellow, red, and finally gray
(meaning slow traffic).
Drop a pin: Allows you to drag a pin to a map location and get
directions to that location or add the location to your saved
locations. Tap Drop a pin to drop a pin on the map. Tap, hold, and
drag the pin to an address. Remove your finger from the pin and
tap
to get directions or tap
and tap Save to save the
location. To remove a pin from a map, tap
, and then tap Drop a
pin.
Clear Map: Clear the current map view.
4
92
Tap
to close the map preferences panel.
Chapter 8 : Web
9 Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
93
101
107
108
Contacts
Calendar
Memos
Facebook Tablet
Contacts
How do I add names and other info into Contacts?
You have a few options for getting info into Contacts.
Connect to an online address book: If you have an address book in an
online account that works with the HP Synergy feature (see Your HP
TouchPad), for example, Google or Microsoft Exchange, you can set up
Contacts on your device to synchronize and display contacts that you
store in the online address book. After you set up the connection to the
online address book, contacts you enter online show up automatically in
Contacts, and contacts you enter on your device sync to the online
account, provided the account allows writing from the device to the online
account.
You can set up your contacts accounts in either of these locations.
• The Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account)
• The Contacts app (see Use Contacts for the first time, Set up an online
account in Contacts, and Customize Contacts)
The Synergy feature provides another advantage: During the same
process you go through to set up a contacts account, you also set up the
same account for all other applications that can display data from that
account. For details on how Synergy works for the current list of online
accounts, see Online accounts available for webOS devices.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Google contacts account
on your device. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that
you want to receive data from your Google account (besides Contacts,
you can include Messaging, Calendar, Email, and Documents). After
setup is complete, your device begins to download your contacts and all
data for all other apps you selected for synchronization.
NOTE In the Launcher, tap Accounts and then tap Add Account to see the
current list of online accounts you can set up on your device and from which you
can access contact info. See Online accounts available for webOS devices to
see how major online accounts synchronize data between the web-based
account and your device.
Enter a contact directly in Contacts: See Create a contact for instructions.
You can assign the contact to one of your online address books—if you
do, it synchronizes with the online address book. Or you can create the
contact in your HP webOS Account, which means it shows up on your
device only. HP webOS Account contacts are included in the daily
backup of your HP webOS Account information, so you can restore them
if they are accidentally erased.
NOTE With some online accounts, such as Facebook or Yahoo!, data you enter
on your device does not sync to the online account.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
93
Use a third-party sync solution (if available): If you want to use a desktop
app to store your contacts, you may be able to use a third-party solution
(sold separately) to sync your contacts directly with your computer (see
Sync your desktop organizer and your device or to go hpwebos.com/
sync-solutions to see if third--party solutions are available for your device.
If there are no solutions available for your device, check with the
developers of existing sync software for other webOS devices to see if
they are developing a solution for your device).
Transfer contacts from an existing HP webOS Account: When setting up
your device, you can choose to sign in to an existing HP webOS Account
that you may be using already with a webOS smartphone. If you decide
to sign in to an existing account, you can choose to do a one-time transfer
of the data, including contacts, stored in the existing HP webOS Account
to your device.
Download vCard info to Contacts: A vCard is a file type made especially
for contact info. A vCard may contain one or many contact entries. A
vCard can be attached to an email, and you can download the info in a
vCard to your Contacts app. See Receive vCards.
1 Tap [number of] linked profiles to see the contacts that are linked.
2 Steven is a contact in your HP webOS Account and your Google online account.
3 Steven’s combined contact info is listed.
You can unlink linked contacts, and you can manually link contacts (see
Unlink a contact or Link a contact).
Linked contacts
The Synergy feature automatically links contacts from different accounts if
it finds data in common between them. For example, if you have a contact
in Exchange and in Google for Steven Grayson, your device links the
contacts so that all of Steven’s info shows up on a single contact screen.
You need to open just one view to see all of Steven’s info. The actual data
remains separate in the various accounts where you originally created the
data; it’s just assembled in one view on your device for your convenience.
How can you tell if a contact is linked? Look in the upper-right corner of
the contact panel. If you see [number of] linked profiles beside the photo
icon, that means that you’re looking at a linked contact, with combined
info from contacts you’re storing in separate accounts.
Use Contacts for the first time
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Do one of the following:
• To set up an online account to sync: To set up an account that is
listed, tap the account type, and go to step 3. To set up an
account type that is not listed, tap Find more to find an app and
follow the instructions onscreen.
• To use accounts you have set up already in another app: Tap Go.
This opens your HP webOS Account and any online accounts,
and you can start creating contacts in these accounts.
• To use Contacts without creating an online account: Tap your HP
webOS Account name. You can now start creating contacts in
your HP webOS Account.
94
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
Set up an online account in Contacts
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Do one of the following:
• To set up an online account the first time you use Contacts: See
Use Contacts for the first time.
• To set up an online account any other time: Open the application
menu, tap Preferences & Accounts, tap Add an account, tap an
account type, and go to step 3. To set up an account type that is
not listed, tap Find More to find an app and follow the instructions
onscreen.
3
If you are setting up a Skype account, tap Sign In.
4
Enter the account information, and then tap Sign in.
5
If you are setting up an Exchange account, you may see a message
telling you that you must set a PIN or password for the device the
next time you wake up the screen. Tap OK to continue with account
creation. The next time you wake up the screen, tap Set PIN or Set
Password. Enter a PIN or Password and tap Done. If you encounter
problems while setting up an Exchange account, see Set up email:
Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes to learn about setting up an
account manually.
6
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create account.
NOTE If you add your Facebook or LinkedIn account to Contacts, your friends’
Facebook and LinkedIn email addresses show up in Contacts. You cannot
change Facebook or LinkedIn info from Contacts on your device. You also
cannot add friends to your Facebook or LinkedIn account from Contacts. To
work directly with Facebook or LinkedIn, download the free Facebook or
LinkedIn application from App Catalog (see Download a free application and
Facebook Tablet), or go to facebook.com or linkedin.com in the Web
application (see Web).
3
If you are setting up a Skype account, tap Sign In.
4
Enter the account information, and then tap Sign in.
5
If you are setting up an Exchange account, you may see a message
telling you that you must set a PIN or password for the device the
next time you wake up the screen. Tap OK to continue with account
creation. The next time you wake up the screen, tap Set PIN or Set
Password. Enter a PIN or Password and tap Done. If you encounter
problems while setting up an Exchange account, see Set up email:
Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes to learn about setting up an
account manually.
6
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create account.
Create a Skype account in Contacts
You do not need to have a Skype account set up before using Skype in
Contacts—you can set one up directly from Contacts. You can also create
a Skype account in Accounts (see Use the Accounts application to set up
an online account), Messaging (see Create a Skype account in
Messaging), and Phone (see Create a Skype account in Phone & Video
Calls).
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
95
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Do one of the following:
2
Tap Add Contact.
3
(Optional) Tap the account icon in the upper-right corner of the
screen to change the account to which the new contact will be
added.
• If you have not set up an account in another app that takes
advantage of the Synergy feature: Tap Skype.
• If you have already set up an account that takes advantage of the
Synergy feature and want to set up another one: Tap Add an
Account and tap Skype.
• Any other time: Open the application menu and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Tap Add an account and tap Skype.
3
Tap Create Account.
4
Tap Accept to agree to Skype’s terms and conditions.
5
Enter the following details:
* Account icon, showing HP webOS Account
• Full Name: Enter your full name.
NOTE If an account doesn’t appear in the list, you can’t add data to that
account from your device.
• Skype Name: Enter a name that you will use to identify yourself to
other Skype users.
• Password: Enter a password and then enter it again.
• Email Address: Enter your email address and then enter it again.
4
Tap Name to enter the contact name.
6
Tap Create Account, and tap Create Account again.
5
To add detailed name information, such as prefix, suffix, or middle
name, to a name, tap
beside the Name field.
7
Tap Done.
6
Tap fields to enter contact details.
In some fields, such as Phone Number, a label button is displayed
on the right. Tap the button to change the label for your entry—for
example, to identify a number as a mobile or work phone.
Create a contact
You can add a contact to an account. If you don’t specify the account, the
new contact is added to your default account.
If you are using Contacts for the first time, you go through a few different
steps to add or access the contacts on your device (see Use Contacts for
the first time). Follow this procedure to add contacts directly on your
device after the first time you use Contacts.
1
96
Open Contacts
.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
7
(Optional) To assign the contact as a favorite, tap
favorite).
(see Create a
8
(Optional) To add a photo to the contact, see Add or change a
contact photo.
9
Tap Done.
Find a contact
4
• To add information: Tap the field and enter the info. For a linked
contact, you can also tap the account icon on the left side of the
field, and then tap the account you want to add the info to (see
Enter information in a field).
To find a contact within the Contacts app, use these steps.
1
Open Contacts
2
Do one of the following:
.
• To change information: Tap a field and enter the info (see Enter
information in a field).
• Scroll through the list of contacts in the contacts list (left-hand
panel).
NOTE Info that originates from some accounts (like Facebook) can’t be edited
on your device. If you tap a field and nothing happens, this is a field that can't
be edited on the device. To make changes, go to the online account.
• Tap Search and begin typing first, middle, or last name, first and
last initial (with no space between), company, or nickname.
• For more search options, tap Global Address Search. (This option
is available if you are using Microsoft Exchange with a Global
Address List.)
3
Do any of the following:
• To change a contact picture: Tap
beside the current picture. If
required, tap Change Photo. Tap the album containing the picture
and tap the picture thumbnail, or tap Search, enter a file name,
and tap a picture thumbnail. Tap OK.
Tap the contact.
• To delete a piece of contact information: Throw the item off the
side of the screen and tap Delete.
For quick access to the contacts you use regularly, you can create a
favorite in Contacts (see Create a favorite) or in Phone (see Create a
favorite in Phone & Video Calls).
• To delete a contact picture: Tap
tap Delete Photo.
beside the current picture and
• To delete a contact: Tap Delete at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE You can make calls from your device only when it is connected to a
compatible HP webOS smartphone (see Make a pairing request to another
device and Pair with an HP webOS smartphone using Touch to Share).
In a linked contact, information from the various accounts is
displayed in a single view. Tap any field to edit information specific
to an account.
5
Tap Done.
View, edit, or delete contact information
Add or change a contact photo
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.
3
To the contact info, tap
1
While creating (see Create a contact) or editing (see View, edit, or
delete contact information) a contact, tap
beside the current
photo.
2
If you are replacing an existing photo, tap Change Photo.
.
NOTE The fields that make up the contact header (name, photo, nickname, job
title, company) are unique to each account. You must open a specific account to
edit these fields.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
97
3
Do one of the following:
1
Open Contacts
• To browse to a photo: Tap the album containing the picture and
tap the picture thumbnail.
2
Tap a contact and then tap the contact name again.
3
Tap one of the following:
• To search for a photo: Tap Search, enter a photo name, tap the
photo name, and then tap the photo thumbnail.
4
• To start an IM chat with a buddy: Tap Chat, enter your message,
and tap Enter.
Tap OK.
• To make a voice call to a buddy: Tap Voice Call.
• To make a video call to a buddy: Tap Video Call.
Create a favorite
You can make a contact a favorite, so that it appears at the top of the
search results list when you search using Just Type.
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.
3
Tap
in the contact details panel.
In the All contacts list, favorites are identified with a
Link a contact
When your device recognizes matching information in two or more
contacts—for example, the same name and phone number—it
automatically gathers the info from the two records into a single view that
displays all the contact information. You can also manually link contacts.
The info for your linked contacts appears combined only on your device;
the actual info is kept separate and distinct in the accounts it came from.
.
IMPORTANT To maintain the integrity of your contact data, it’s important that
you link only one person’s contact info in different accounts. For example, if you
have contact info for Steven Grayson in Google, Facebook, Microsoft
Exchange, and your HP webOS Account, go ahead and link all four contacts
into a linked contact. But don’t link Steven’s contact info with his brother John’s.
Remove a contact from favorites
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Tap Favorites.
3
Tap a contact and tap
.
Call or chat with a Skype contact
When you add or create a Skype account on your device, your Skype
buddies are added to Contacts. From here, you can chat with a buddy, or
make a voice or video call to a buddy.
98
.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.
3
In the contact details panel, tap 1 profile or [number of] linked
profiles, and tap Link more profiles.
Get in touch with a contact
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.
3
Do any of the following:
• To send an email or instant message: Tap the appropriate field.
For example, tap an email address to send an email to the
contact.
• To locate an address on a map: Tap an address field.
• To send a text message: Tap
.
• To call that contact: Tap a phone number.
4
Search for the contact (see Find a contact) and tap it to link the two
contacts.
5
(Optional) After you create the link, you can ensure that the linked
contact appears in your Contacts list under the name you’re most
likely to recognize (and not, say, under a person’s IM screen name,
which can be unrelated to their real name). To do this, tap [number
of] linked profiles, tap the contact name you want to appear, and
tap Set as primary profile.
Unlink a contact
1
Open Contacts
2
Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.
3
Tap [number of] linked profiles, and tap the contact you want to
unlink.
4
Tap Unlink this profile.
NOTE You can only make calls and send text messages from your device when
it is connected to a webOS smartphone (see Make a pairing request to another
device and Pair with an HP webOS smartphone using Touch to Share).
Delete a contact
1
Open Contacts
2
Search for a contact (see Find a contact), and tap the contact name.
.
.
NOTE Entries that you cannot change on your device, like those from Facebook
and LinkedIn, you also cannot delete from the device. You must delete them from
your account on the web to remove them from your device.
3
Do one of the following:
• To delete only one entry in a linked contact: Tap [number of]
linked profiles. Tap the entry you want and tap Delete this profile.
• To delete an unlinked contact or an entire linked contact: Tap
and then tap Delete. Tap Delete All Profiles to confirm.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
99
You can also choose to sort by Company & first name or Company
& last name. In these cases, the company name is alphabetized,
and within the company, whichever you choose, the names are still
listed as first name followed by last name.
NOTE If you see Delete Other Profiles rather than Delete All Profiles, you have
linked contacts that come from accounts whose info you can't change on your
device (like Facebook and LinkedIn). Tap it. To delete any remaining profiles, go
to the account online using your computer and delete them there.
Default account: Tap the current default account to change the
default to another account. New contacts you create are assigned to
this account unless you specify otherwise.
If you delete a contact that is assigned to an online account, the
contact is deleted in the online account also.
Accounts: Tap an account to change login settings and sign in using
the new settings.
Customize Contacts
1
Open Contacts
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Set the following options:
Add an account: Tap, and then tap an account type. Enter the
account information. Before you can set up an account on your
device, you must already have an account online with the provider.
.
List Order: Tap to select the criteria by which the contact list is
sorted. If you select Last name to sort on, the names are
alphabetized by last name, but they still appear in the Contacts list
as first name followed by last name. If you select First name to sort
on, names are alphabetized by first name.
Sync Now: Tap to manually synchronize your online accounts (see
Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts).
4
Tap Done.
Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts
If you want to get contacts from an online account on your device
immediately, or upload contacts from your device to the online account,
you can do a manual sync. This synchronizes Contacts with all the
accounts you have set up on your device, and it syncs all other apps
associated with all online accounts that you selected for synchronization.
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap Sync Now.
Delete an online account from Contacts
1 Contact list sorted by first name
2 Contact list sorted by last name
100
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
If you synchronize contacts with an online account, deleting the account
from Contacts stops synchronization of contacts only—if you also sync
email or calendar events with that online account, those continue to
synchronize. Deleting the account from Contacts also deletes the
associated contact entries from your device only. The entries are not
deleted from the online account.
1
Open Contacts
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Account.
To restart synchronization with an account you have deleted from
Contacts: Open Accounts
, tap the account name, and tap Off beside
Contacts to turn synchronization on.
Receive vCards
To get an emailed vCard into Contacts:
1
for example, Google or Microsoft Exchange, you can set up Calendar on
your device to synchronize and display events in the online calendar.
After you set up the connection to the online calendar, events you enter
online show up automatically in Calendar, and events you enter on your
device sync to the online account, provided the account allows writing
from the device to the online account.
You can set up your calendar accounts in either of these locations.
• The Accounts app (see Use the Accounts application to set up an online
account)
• The Calendar app (see Use Calendar for the first time, Set up an online
account in Calendar, and Customize Calendar)
DID YOU KNOW? If you synchronize with your Google calendar, you can add
Google Weather to the calendar on your computer and have it appear in
Calendar on your device. On your computer, log in to your Google Calendar
account and open Calendar Settings. Click the General tab, enter your location,
and click the temperature unit you want in Show weather based on my location.
The next time your device synchronizes with your Google account, Google
Weather appears in Calendar on your device.
From the open Email message, tap the attachment.
The vCard opens automatically within Contacts.
2
Tap the account icon in the upper-right corner, and tap the account
to which you want to add the new contact.
3
Tap Done.
Calendar
How do I get events into Calendar?
You have a few options for getting events to show up in Calendar:
Connect to an online calendar: If you have a calendar in an online
account that works with the HP Synergy feature (see Your HP TouchPad),
The Synergy feature provides another advantage: During the same
process you go through to set up a calendar account, you also set up the
same account for all other applications that can display data from that
account. For details on how Synergy works for the current list of online
accounts, see Online accounts available for webOS devices.
For example, suppose you want to set up your Google calendar account
on your device. The last step in setup is to select all the other apps that
you want to receive data from your Google account (besides Calendar,
you can include Contacts, Messaging, Email, and Documents). After
setup is complete, your device begins to download your calendar events
and all data for all other apps you selected for synchronization.
NOTE In the Launcher, tap Accounts and then tap Add Account to see the
current list of online accounts you can set up on your device and from which you
can access Calendar events. See Online accounts available for webOS devices
to see how major online accounts synchronize data between the web-based
account and your device.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
101
Enter an event directly in Calendar: See Create an event for instructions.
You can assign the event to one of your online calendars—if you do, it
synchronizes with the online calendar. Or you can create the event in your
HP webOS Account, which means it shows up on your device only. HP
webOS Account events are included in the daily backup of your HP
webOS Account information, so you can restore them if they are
accidentally erased.
You can also look at the events of just one calendar at a time.
Use Calendar for the first time
1
Open Calendar
2
Do one of the following:
NOTE With some online accounts, such as Yahoo!, data you enter on your
device does not sync to the online account.
.
• To set up an online account to sync: To set up an account that is
listed, tap the account type, and go to step 3. To set up an
account type that is not listed, tap Find more to find an app and
follow the instructions onscreen.
Use a third-party sync solution: If you want to use a desktop app to store
your calendar events, you may be able to use a third-party solution (sold
separately) to sync your calendar events directly with your computer (see
Sync your desktop organizer and your device or go to hpwebos.com/
sync-solutions) to see if third-party solutions are available for your device.
If there are no solutions available for your device, check with the
developers of existing sync software for other webOS devices to see if
they are developing a solution for your device).
• To use accounts you have set up already in another app: Tap Go.
This opens your HP webOS Account and any online accounts,
and you can start creating events in these accounts.
• To use Calendar without creating an online account: Tap your HP
webOS Account name. You can now start creating contacts in
your HP webOS Account.
Transfer calendar events from an existing HP webOS Account: When
setting up your device, you can choose to sign in to an existing HP
webOS Account that you may be using already with a webOS
smartphone. If you decide to sign in to an existing account, you can
choose to do a one-time transfer of the data, including calendar events,
stored in the existing HP webOS Account to your device.
Layered calendars
Suppose you use the calendar in both Microsoft Exchange and in
Google. If you set up both of those accounts to sync with your device,
your device’s Calendar app shows the events from both in a single view—
a layered calendar with events that are color-coded to identify which
provider they come from. Individual events are stored separately with your
different providers; the events are just assembled in one view on your
device for your convenience.
If you change an event, the change is made in the appropriate calendar.
102
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
3
Enter the account information, and then tap Sign in.
If you are setting up an Exchange account, you may see a message
telling you that you must set a PIN or password for the device the
next time you wake up the screen. Tap OK to continue with account
creation. The next time you wake up the screen, tap Set PIN or Set
Password. Enter a PIN or Password and tap Done. If you encounter
problems while setting up an Exchange account, see Set up email:
Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes to learn about setting up an
account manually.
4
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create account.
NOTE If you choose to sync Calendar with an online Facebook account, your
Facebook events show up in Calendar, but you cannot add calendar events to
Facebook from the Calendar app. To work directly with Facebook, use the
Facebook application developed for your device (see Facebook Tablet). To
work directly with LinkedIn, go to linkedin.com in the Web application (see
Web) or download the free LinkedIn application from App Catalog.
Set up an online account in Calendar
1
Open Calendar
.
2
Do one of the following:
5
Create an event
If you are using Calendar for the first time, you go through a few different
steps to add or access the calendar events on your device (see Use
Calendar for the first time). Follow this procedure to add events directly on
your device after the first time you use Calendar. For information on
managing your device’s time settings, see Date & Time.
1
Open Calendar
2
Tap New event.
3
Tap Event Name and enter the event name.
4
Tap the account name below the Event Location field, and tap the
calendar you want to use for this event.
• To set up an online account the first time you use Contacts: See
Use Calendar for the first time.
• To set up an online account any other time: Open the application
menu, tap Preferences & Accounts, tap Add an account, tap an
account type and go to step 3. To set up an account type that is
not listed, tap Find More to find an app and follow the instructions
onscreen.
3
Enter the account information, and then tap Sign in.
4
If you are setting up an Exchange account, you may see a message
telling you that you must set a PIN or password for the device the
next time you wake up the screen. Tap OK to continue with account
creation. The next time you wake up the screen, tap Set PIN or Set
Password. Enter a PIN or Password and tap Done. If you encounter
problems while setting up an Exchange account, see Set up email:
Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes to learn about setting up an
account manually.
Depending on the account, you may be presented with options for
which apps should download data from that account. For each app,
tap On or Off, and then tap Create account.
.
NOTE If an account doesn’t appear in the list, you can’t add data to that
account from your device.
5
In the From and To fields, tap the start and finish times and dates for
the event.
6
Tap Done.
Enter the event location
1
To create a new event, tap New event. To enter the event location
after creating an event, tap the event name in Day view, and tap
Edit.
2
Tap Event location and enter the location.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
103
3
Schedule a repeating event
Tap Done.
TIP Need to find the event location on a map? Open an event that has a
1
To create a new event, tap New event. To set an event as repeating
after creating the event, tap the event name in Day view, and tap
Edit.
2
Tap No Repeat, and then tap a repeat interval or Custom to define a
repeat interval and set the end date.
3
Tap Done.
location specified in the Event Location field, and tap the location address. The
location is displayed in the Maps app.
Invite others to an event
You can invite others to an event you create in an Exchange calendar.
untimed event. Then select Yearly on [date] as the repeat interval. See Create an
all-day (untimed) event.
1
To create a new event, tap New event. To invite others to an event
after creating the event, tap the event name in Day view, and tap
Edit.
2
Tap the account name below the Event Location field, and tap an
Exchange calendar.
Add an alarm to an event
3
Tap To. Enter an email address or tap
address.
1
To create a new event, tap New event. To add an alarm after
creating an event, tap the event name in Day view, and tap Edit.
4
Tap Send.
2
The default alarm setting is 15 minutes before the start of the event.
To change the setting, tap 15 minutes before and tap the new setting
for the alarm.
3
Tap Done.
and tap a contact email
Contact meeting invitees
You can send an email to invitees to an event you created in an Exchange
calendar.
Customize event notification sounds
1
Tap the event name in Day view and tap [number of] attendee/
attendees.
The settings you apply here apply to all of your Calendar accounts.
2
Tap Contact Attendees.
1
Open Calendar
This opens an email message with the participants’ addresses
added to the To field. The default message text is “Running late. On
my way...”. You can edit the text before sending the message.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the Event Reminders field and tap any of the following:
3
104
DID YOU KNOW? To enter a birthday, anniversary, or holiday, create an
Tap Send.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
.
Vibrate: The device vibrates and makes a vibrating sound but makes
no other sound.
System Sound: The system sound plays.
1
Open Calendar
Mute: No sound plays and the device does not vibrate.
2
Do any of the following:
Add a note to an event
1
To create a new event, tap New event. To add a note after creating
an event, tap the event name in Day view, and tap Edit.
2
Tap Event Notes and enter the note.
3
Tap Done.
.
• To see different calendar views: Tap
(month) on the bottom of the screen.
(day),
(week), or
• To remove a Calendar account from the layered calendar view:
Tap the account you want to remove on the upper-left corner of the
screen. Tap the account again to add it to the layered view. To
hide all accounts, tap Hide All. Tap Show All to display all
accounts.
• To change the color that identifies a Calendar account: Open the
application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts. In Calendar
Colors, tap the current color for an account, tap a new color in the
list, and then tap Done.
NOTE If a URL is displayed in an event note as an underlined link, you can tap
it to open the web page in the Web app.
Move around in Calendar
Create an all-day (untimed) event
An all-day event such as a birthday appears in your calendar without a
specific time slot.
1
Open Calendar
.
2
Open the application menu, tap New, and then tap All Day Event.
3
Enter the event details.
4
Tap Done.
Change the Calendar display
• To go to the next or previous day: In Day view, swipe left or right on the
screen.
• To go to the next or previous week: In Week view, swipe left or right on
the screen.
• To go to the next or previous month: In Month view, swipe left or right
on the screen.
• To go to a specific day from Week or Month view: Tap the day.
• To go to a specific month, date, or year: Tap Jump to. Tap the month,
day, and year and tap Go To Date.
• To go to today: Tap Jump to and tap Show Today.
Quickly glimpse your schedule
• In Day, Week, or Month view, slightly drag left or right to peek at the
next/previous day, week, or month without changing the current view.
You can change the display of Calendar to show the events from all of
your calendars or just the events recorded in one of your calendars. You
can also change the color that identifies a calendar account, and you can
display events in Day, Week, or Month view.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
105
Delete an event
1
On your calendar, tap the meeting. The participants field shows the
organizer name plus the number of participants.
If you delete an event that is assigned to an online account, the event is
deleted in the online account also.
2
Tap the number to see the participants’ names.
3
(Optional) Tap a participant’s name. If the participant is a contact,
the contact entry is displayed. If the participant is not a contact, tap
Add to Contacts to add the participant to your contacts list.
4
(Optional) Tap Contact Attendees to send an email to all
participants.
IMPORTANT When you delete an Exchange event on your device, notification
is not sent to attendees.
1
Open Calendar
.
2
Tap the event name, tap Delete, and tap Delete again to confirm. If
this event is one of a series of repeating events, tap the option to
delete just this event or the entire series.
1
Open Calendar
Respond to an event reminder
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
When an event reminder appears on the screen, tap the event description
to open the event, or tap one of the following:
3
Set the following options:
• Contact Meeting Attendees: This opens an email message with the
participants’ addresses added to the To field. The default message text
is “Running late. On my way...”. You can edit the text before sending
the message.
• Dismiss: Close the notification.
• Snooze: The reminder reappears in five minutes.
View meeting participants
If you receive a meeting request, you can view the participants.
106
Customize Calendar
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
.
Accounts: For all calendar accounts, tap an account to change login
settings or remove the account. You should change login settings
only if you have changed this information for the calendar account
online—the information you enter here must match the information in
the online account.
Add account: Tap the account type and enter your username and
password for the online calendar account. Before you can set up an
account on your device, you must already have an account online
with the provider.
Default Calendar: If you create an event in All Calendars view, the
event is assigned to your default calendar. Tap to change the default
calendar.
First Day of Week: Select the day that appears as the start of the
week in Week view and Month view.
Day Start and End: Tap to enter the default start and end times that
appear in Day view and Week view.
Default Event Duration: The default event duration is set to one hour.
Tap to change this to 30 minutes or 2 hours.
Default Event Reminder: Tap the time interval for a notification to
appear for timed and all-day events. Reminders you set for
individual events override the default setting.
Event Reminders: Select to play a sound when a calendar
notification appears.
Calendar Colors: Set the color for events created in that account.
4
3
Under Accounts, tap the account name.
4
Tap Remove Account and tap Remove Account again to confirm.
To restart synchronization with an account you have deleted from
Calendar: Open Accounts
, tap the account name, and tap Off beside
Calendar to turn synchronization on.
Memos
Tap Done.
All memos are backed up to your HP webOS Account.
Manually synchronize Calendar with your online accounts
If you want to get calendar events from an online account on your device
immediately, or upload events from your device to the online account (if
the account allows it), you can do a manual sync. This synchronizes
Calendar with all the accounts you have set up on your device, and it
syncs all other apps associated with all online accounts that you selected
for synchronization.
1
Open Calendar
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Sync Now.
Create a memo
1
Open Memos
2
Tap
3
Enter the memo text. Memos are saved as you type.
4
Tap outside the memo to close it.
1
Open Calendar
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
.
See Enter and save information and Text selection gestures.
TIP You can also use Just Type to create a memo directly from Card view. Tap
Just type and start typing the memo text . Under Quick Actions, tap New Memo.
The Memos application opens at a new memo, with the text you entered in the
body of the memo.
Delete an online account from Calendar
If you synchronize calendar events with an online account, deleting the
account from Calendar stops synchronization of calendar events only—if
you also sync contacts or email messages with that online account, those
continue to synchronize. Deleting the account from Calendar also deletes
any associated events from your device only. The entries are not deleted
from the online account.
.
Find a memo
1
Open Memos
.
2
Tap Search memos and begin typing the letters or numbers that start
the memo.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
107
3
Tap the memo when it appears.
NOTE The results of a Just Type search that you access in Card view do not
include memos.
Delete a memo
1
In an open memo, tap
2
Tap Delete to confirm.
.
Email a memo
Edit a memo
1
Open Memos
.
2
Tap the memo you want to edit.
3
Tap the screen to position the cursor (see Text selection gestures),
and edit the memo text (see Cut, copy, and paste information).
1
In an open memo, tap
2
Enter the email address.
.
The subject, “Just a quick memo”, is automatically filled in. You can
edit the text before sending the message.
3
Tap Send.
Change the color of a memo
Color-code your memos to help you recognize memos of a certain type.
For example, make all of your grocery lists blue.
1
Open Memos
.
2
Tap the memo.
3
Tap a color at the top of the screen.
Facebook Tablet
The Facebook Tablet app allows you to update your status, view and
respond to friends’ comments, and more.
Install Facebook Tablet
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To use Facebook Tablet on your device, you must
already have a Facebook account.
This section describes the procedure for downloading and installing the
free Facebook Tablet app. Installing this app is different from setting up
an online account on your device, which enables you to see your
Facebook data in Contacts, Calendar, and Photos & Videos (see Use the
Accounts application to set up an online account). We recommend that
you both install the free app and create the online account on your
device.
4
108
Tap outside the memo to close it.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
1
Open Facebook Tablet
. This opens the Facebook Tablet app
page in HP webOS App Catalog.
2
If this is your first time using App Catalog, tap your country, and tap
Continue.
3
If required, tap Accept to agree to the terms and conditions.
4
Tap Free beside Facebook Tablet.
5
If a Location Services notification appears, tap Continue.
6
When the app is installed, tap Launch.
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
109
110
Chapter 9 : Contacts, Calendar, and other personal information
10 Documents and eBooks
111
114
116
Quickoffice
Adobe Reader
Amazon Kindle
• If the Add an Account button is displayed: Tap Add an Account,
and then tap the account type.
TIP Alternatively, you can open the Quickoffice app to the files list and tap Add
Account at the bottom of the screen. Or open the app to the files list, open the
application menu, tap Preferences & Accounts, and then tap Add an Account.
Quickoffice
With Quickoffice, you can view Microsoft Word, Excel®, and PowerPoint®
files on your device.
NOTE The Quickoffice app is periodically updated. Because of this, the app
may offer more functionality and features than those described in this chapter.
For the most up-to-date information on Quickoffice, see the on-device Help.
Set up Quickoffice to access files from an online account
You can use the Quickoffice app to view files that are stored on your
device. You can also set up the Quickoffice app to access files in online
accounts such as Google Docs, Dropbox, or MobileMe. You must have
an account online, and then set up the account in Quickoffice on your
device.
1
Open Quickoffice
.
2
Do one of the following:
• If a list of accounts is displayed: Tap the account type.
3
Enter your account username or email address and password.
4
Tap Sign In.
5
Under Use Account With, make sure the Documents option is set to
On.
6
Tap Create Account.
Open a file
You can view files in an online account that you set up, files that you copy
from your computer (see Copy files between your device and your
computer), or files that you receive as an email attachment (see Open
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
111
email attachments). You can view files in DOC, DOCX, TXT, XLS, XLSX,
PPT, and PPTX formats.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you put a file on your device, make sure you
Send a file as an attachment to an email message
1
have enough storage space on your device to fit the file. Open Device
Info
and look at the Available field under Device.
1
Open Quickoffice
2
The first time you open the Quickoffice app, you have the option to
set up the app to work with files from an online account. To do that,
see Set up Quickoffice to access files from an online account. If you
just want to work with files on your device or with an account that’s
already set up, tap Go.
Any online accounts you set up on your device appear in the left
panel. The option My TouchPad also appears. Tap an account to
view files in that account. Tap My TouchPad to view files stored in the
USB drive storage on your device.
4
To view files of a certain type only, tap Show, and then tap
Documents, PDFs, Presentations, or Spreadsheets. To see all files,
tap All files.
5
Tap the file.
NOTE If you tap a PDF file, it opens in the Adobe Reader application on your
device. See Adobe Reader for information.
6
To return to the file list, tap Documents in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
Change the display size
• Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen.
• Pinch in to decrease the size of items onscreen.
For more information on zooming in and out, see Pinch (zoom gestures).
112
• To send a single file: With the file open, open the application
menu and tap Send.
• To send multiple files: On the file list, tap
. Tap the files you
want to send. To search for a specific file or files, tap Search
[account name] and type the file name. Tap Attach.
.
3
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
Do one of the following:
2
Create the email message and tap Send.
Print a Word document or PowerPoint presentation
You can print a document or presentation on an HP printer that is
connected to a wireless network. See the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device supports printing on all network-capable
HP printers that support PCL page description language in the local LAN.
These printers include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart,
Officejet, and LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years
old or newer. Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your
device and the printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless
network. For personal printers, see the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Tap
at the top right corner of the screen, or open the application
menu and tap Print.
TIP If the print icon is not displayed at the top of the screen, tap the screen to
display it.
Printers that are available on your current wireless network are
displayed.
3
Do one of the following:
Switch among sheets in a spreadsheet
• If this is your first time using a printer on this network: If a list of
printers is displayed, tap one.
•
• If you have already used a printer on this network: The last printer
you used is remembered and is selected. If you want to select
another printer, scroll down on the Print dialog box (if needed),
tap Select Another Printer, and then tap a printer.
Resize rows and columns in a spreadsheet
• To set up a printer manually or on a corporate network: Scroll
down in the list of printers (if needed) and tap Add a Printer. Tap
Enter an IP address and enter the IP address of the printer.
(Optional) Tap Name this printer and enter a name to identify the
printer. Tap Done.
4
1
To resize a row, tap and hold the row number. To resize a column,
tap and hold the column header line to the right of the column you
want to resize.
2
Drag the row or column.
(Optional) Depending on the printer you are using and the file type,
you can set the following printer attributes:
Switch among slides in a PowerPoint® slideshow
Number of Copies: Tap 1 and tap the number of copies you want to
print.
Do one of the following:
2-Sided Printing: Tap Off to switch 2-sided printing from Off to On.
Color Printing: Tap On to switch color printing from On to Off.
Print Quality: Tap the currently displayed option, and tap the quality
you want (Draft, Normal, or Best).
5
Tap the sheet you want to jump to at the bottom of the screen.
• To move to the next or previous slide: Drag up or down on the screen.
• To jump to a different slide: Tap the currently displayed slide number in
the upper-right corner of the screen. Tap the slide you want to jump to.
• To view all slides as thumbnails: Tap
in the upper-right corner of the
screen. Tap a thumbnail to open the slide. To dismiss the thumbnails
panel, drag
all the way to the right.
Tap Print.
To cancel a print job, tap Cancel while the file is preparing to print,
or while printing is in progress, tap
at the top of the screen, tap
the notification, and then tap
to the right of the print job in the
Print Queue.
Scroll rows or columns in a spreadsheet
• To scroll rows: Flick up or down on the screen.
• To scroll columns: Swipe left or right on the screen.
TIP If the page number and thumbnail icons are not displayed at the top of the
screen, tap the screen to display them.
Edit or delete an online account in Quickoffice
If you change the username, email address, or password you use with an
online account, you need to enter the new information in the account
settings on your device.
1
Open Quickoffice
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
113
3
Tap the account name.
4
Do one of the following:
• If the Add an Account button is displayed: Tap Add an Account,
and then tap the account type.
TIP Alternatively, you can open the Adobe Reader app to the files list and tap
Add Account at the bottom of the screen. Or open the app to the files list, open
the application menu, tap Preferences & Accounts, and then tap Add an
Account.
• To change the account display name: Under Account Name, tap
the current name to highlight it, and enter the new name.
• To change the username, email address, or password associated
with the account: Tap the appropriate field and enter the new
information. Tap Sign In.
• To delete the account: Tap Remove Account. Tap Remove Account
again to confirm.
Adobe Reader
With Adobe Reader, you can view PDF (Adobe Acrobat) files on your
device.
NOTE The Adobe Reader app is periodically updated. Because of this, the app
may offer more functionality and features than those described in this chapter.
For the most up-to-date information on Adobe Reader, see the on-device Help.
Set up Adobe Reader to access files from an online account
You can use the Adobe Reader app to view files that are stored on your
device. You can also set up the Adobe Reader app to access files in
online accounts such as Google Docs, Dropbox, or MobileMe. You must
have an account online, and then set up the account in Adobe Reader on
your device.
1
Open Adobe Reader
2
Do one of the following:
.
• If a list of accounts is displayed: Tap the account type.
114
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
3
Enter your account username or email address and password.
4
Tap Sign In.
5
Under Use Account With, make sure the Documents option is set to
On.
6
Tap Create Account.
Open a file
You can view a PDF file that you copy from your computer (see Copy files
between your device and your computer) or receive as an email
attachment (see Open email attachments).
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you put a file on your device, make sure you
have enough storage space on your device to fit the file. Open Device
Info
and look at the Available field under Device.
1
Open Adobe Reader
.
2
The first time you open Adobe Reader, you have the option to set up
the app to work with files from an online account. To do that, see Set
up Adobe Reader to access files from an online account. If you just
want to work with files on your device or with an account that’s
already set up, tap Go.
3
4
1
Any online accounts you set up on your device appear in the left
panel. The option My TouchPad also appears. Tap an account to
view files in that account. Tap My TouchPad to view files stored in the
USB drive storage on your device.
To return to the file list, tap Documents in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
Move around in a file
• To move to the next or previous page: Drag up or down on the screen.
• To jump to a different page: Tap the currently displayed page number
in the upper-right corner of the screen. Tap the page you want to jump
to.
• To view all file pages as thumbnails: Tap
in the upper-right corner of
the screen. Tap a thumbnail to open the page. To dismiss the
thumbnails panel, drag
all the way to the right.
TIP If the page number and thumbnail icons are not displayed at the top of the
screen, tap the screen to display them.
Change the text display size
• Pinch out to enlarge items onscreen.
• Pinch in to decrease the size of items onscreen.
• Double-tap the screen to zoom in or out a specified amount.
Do one of the following:
• To send a single file: With the file open, open the application
menu and tap Send.
• To send multiple files: On the file list, tap
. Tap the files you
want to send. To search for a specific file or files, tap Search and
type the file name. Tap Attach.
Tap the file.
If the PDF file was created with a password, enter the password to
open the file.
5
Send a file as an attachment to an email message
2
Create the email message and tap Send.
Print a PDF file
You can print a file on an HP printer that is connected to a wireless
network. See the instructions that came with your printer for information
about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device supports printing on all network-capable
HP printers that support PCL page description language in the local LAN.
These printers include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart,
Officejet, and LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years
old or newer. Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your
device and the printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless
network. For personal printers, see the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
1
Open the file you want to print.
2
Tap
at the top right corner of the screen, or open the application
menu and tap Print.
TIP If the print icon is not displayed at the top of the screen, tap the screen to
display it.
Printers that are available on your current wireless network are
displayed.
For more information on zooming in and out, see Pinch (zoom gestures).
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
115
3
Do one of the following:
Edit or delete an online account in Adobe Reader
• If this is your first time using a printer on this network: If a list of
printers is displayed, tap one.
If you change the username, email address, or password you use with an
online account, you need to enter the new information in the account
settings on your device.
• If you have already used a printer on this network: The last printer
you used is remembered and is selected. If you want to select
another printer, scroll down on the Print dialog box (if needed),
tap Select Another Printer, and then tap a printer.
• To set up a printer manually or on a corporate network: Scroll
down in the list of printers (if needed) and tap Add a Printer. Tap
Enter an IP address and enter the IP address of the printer.
(Optional) Tap Name this printer and enter a name to identify the
printer. Tap Done.
4
1
Open Adobe Reader
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Do one of the following:
(Optional) Depending on the printer you are using, you can set the
following printer attributes:
• To change the account display name: Under Account Name, tap
the current name to highlight it, and enter the new name.
Number of Copies: Tap 1 and tap the number of copies you want to
print.
• To change the username, email address, or password associated
with the account: Tap the appropriate field and enter the new
information. Tap Sign In.
2-Sided Printing: Tap Off to switch 2-sided printing from Off to On.
• To delete the account: Tap Remove Account. Tap Remove Account
again to confirm.
Color Printing: Tap On to switch color printing from On to Off.
Page Range: Tap the currently displayed range, and enter the range
you want.
Print Quality: Tap the currently displayed option, and tap the quality
you want (Draft, Normal, or Best).
5
Tap Print.
To cancel a print job, tap Cancel while the file is preparing to print,
or while printing is in progress, tap
at the top of the screen, tap
the notification, and then tap
to the right of the print job in the
Print Queue.
116
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
Amazon Kindle
The Amazon Kindle app lets you read eBooks from the Amazon Kindle
store on your HP TouchPad. The app is available as a free download from
HP webOS App Catalog.
1
On the Launcher, tap Amazon Kindle
Kindle app page in App Catalog.
. This opens the Amazon
2
If this is your first time using App Catalog, tap your country, and tap
Continue.
3
If required, tap Accept to agree to the terms and conditions.
4
To download and install the app, tap Free.
5
To open the app after you install it, tap Launch.
After installation, the Amazon Kindle Launcher icon opens the app itself,
not App Catalog.
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
117
118
Chapter 10 : Documents and eBooks
11 Phone & Video Calls
119
119
124
129
129
130
131
131
133
How can I make and receive calls with my HP TouchPad?
Use Skype voice and video calling
Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone
Listen to voicemail messages
View your call history
Work with favorites
Save a phone number to Contacts
Use a phone headset
Customize Phone & Video Calls settings
How can I make and receive calls with my HP
TouchPad?
You can make and receive calls on your HP TouchPad in the following
ways:
• If you have a Skype account set up on your device, you can use Skype
to make Skype video and voice calls, as well as calls to a phone
number. See Use Skype voice and video calling.
• If you have an HP webOS smartphone, you can connect your HP
TouchPad to the smartphone and then make, receive, and manage calls
on your HP TouchPad using the connected smartphone. See Use your
HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone.
Use Skype voice and video calling
To use Skype on your device, you need to either sign in to a Skype
account you already have set up online, or create a new Skype account.
See Create a Skype account in Phone & Video Calls or Sign in to a Skype
account in Phone & Video Calls.
What kinds of calls can I make and receive with Skype?
You can use Skype to make and receive the following types of calls:
• Free Skype-to-Skype video calls
• Free Skype-to-Skype audio calls
• Skype calls to a mobile or other phone number. These calls require a
paid Skype account (see Use Skype to dial a phone number).
Create a Skype account in Phone & Video Calls
If you do not have a Skype account, you can create one right on your
device in the Phone & Video Calls application. You can also create a
Skype account in Accounts (see Create a Skype account in Accounts),
Contacts (see Create a Skype account in Contacts), and Messaging (see
Create a Skype account in Messaging).
After you create a Skype account, you remain signed in to that account
and can use it at any time. To sign out of a Skype account, remove it from
your device (see Edit or delete a Skype account).
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
119
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Do one of the following:
After you sign in to a Skype account, you remain signed in to that account
and can use it at any time. To sign out of a Skype account, remove it from
your device (see Edit or delete a Skype account).
• If a Skype button is displayed when you open the app: Tap Skype.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Do one of the following:
• If an Add an Account button is displayed: Tap Add an Account
and tap Skype.
• Any other time: Open the application menu and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Tap Add account and tap Skype.
3
Tap Create Account.
4
If prompted, tap Accept to agree to the account terms and
conditions.
5
Enter the following details:
• Full Name: Enter your full name.
• Skype Name: Enter a name that you will use to identify yourself to
other Skype users.
• Password: Enter a password and then enter it again.
• If a Skype button is displayed when you open the app: Tap Skype.
• If an Add an Account button is displayed: Tap Add an Account
and tap Skype.
• Any other time: Open the application menu and tap Preferences &
Accounts. Tap Add account and tap Skype.
3
Tap Sign In.
4
Enter your Skype name and password, and tap Sign In.
5
Tap Create Account.
• Email Address: Enter your email address and then enter it again.
Make a Skype-to-Skype video or audio call
6
Tap Create Account. On the next screen, tap Create Account again.
7
Tap Done.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must have one or more Skype buddies set up to
make Skype-to-Skype calls (see Add a buddy).
Sign in to a Skype account in Phone & Video Calls
If you have a Skype account but have not yet set it up on your device, you
do not need to create the account again on your device. Simply sign in to
the account to start using Skype on your device.
You can also sign in to a Skype account in Accounts (see Sign in to a
Skype account in Accounts), Contacts (see Set up an online account in
Contacts), and Messaging (see Set up an instant messaging (IM)
account).
120
.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Tap Contacts.
3
Tap the Search field.
4
Type a name or initials until the Skype contact you want appears.
5
Tap the contact.
6
By default, the outgoing call is sent as voice only. To send outgoing
video, tap
.
7
If the other person answers the call as voice only, you can only hear
audio from that person. If the other person answers the call as a
video call, how you see incoming video depends on your Skype call
preferences:
• If you have the Auto-Accept Video preference turned on: Incoming
video appears automatically.
• If you have the Auto-Accept Video preference turned off: To see
incoming video, tap Accept when prompted.
See Set Skype calling preferences for information.
Use Skype to dial a phone number
You can use Skype to make an international or domestic call to a phone
number. The number you call does not need to be associated with a
contact.
• Dial by contact name in the Phone & Video Calls application
• Redial the last number dialed
• Dial from another application.
3
Tap
.
4
If prompted, select Skype to make the call using Skype.
Answer a Skype call
If a call comes in, an incoming call notification appears on your device.
Skype calls are designated by Skype under the name or number on the
notification.
1
To answer the call, do one of the following:
• Tap
.
You can choose to use Skype for all calls to phone numbers, or to be
prompted whether to use Skype or a connected HP webOS smartphone
for a given call (see Set your dialing method).
2
Calls to phone numbers are subject to Skype charges and require a
Skype credit balance.
By default, when you answer a call, you answer as voice only. To
send outgoing video, tap
.
3
If the other person makes the call as voice only, you can only hear
audio from that person. If the other person makes the call as a video
call, how you see incoming video depends on your Skype call
preferences:
TIP To check if you have a Skype credit balance, do the following: Open Phone
& Video Calls, open the application menu, and tap Check Skype Credit. If you
don’t see this menu item, it means you are not logged into your Skype account.
Do this instead: Open Phone & Video Calls, open the application menu, and
tap Preferences & Accounts. Under Accounts, tap Skype, and tap Sign In. Your
Skype credit balance appears under Skype Credit.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Enter the number you want to call using any of the ways to dial
described in these sections:
• Dial by contact name using Just Type
• If a headset is attached, press the button on the headset.
• If you have the Auto-Accept Video preference turned on: Incoming
video appears automatically.
• If you have the Auto-Accept Video preference turned off: To see
incoming video, tap Accept when prompted.
See Set Skype calling preferences for information.
TIP If you miss a call, a notification appears at the top of the screen. Tap the
notification to open the missed call dashboard item. On the dashboard item,
tap the name or number to call the person back, or tap the icon on the left to
open your call history (see View your call history).
• Dial using the onscreen dial pad
• Dial a favorite
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
121
Silence the ringer on an incoming Skype call
When you silence the ringer on an incoming call, you can answer the call
or let it ring through to voicemail.
Do one of the following:
• Press the power button.
• Press volume.
* Volume
Ignore an incoming Skype call
Manage a Skype-to-Skype voice call
To send a call immediately to voicemail, do one of the following:
Do any of the following:
• Tap
.
• Press the power button twice.
To reply to a caller who is in your Contacts list after you ignore a call, tap
the ignored call notification. This opens the caller’s contact entry, where
you can select a reply method. To reply to a caller who is not in your
Contacts list, go to your call history (see View your call history).
Manage a Skype-to-Skype video call
Do any of the following:
• Turn off outgoing video: Tap .Tap again to turn outgoing video back
on.
• Mute the microphone so you can’t be heard: Tap . Tap again to
unmute the microphone.
• Adjust call volume: Press volume.
122
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
• Make the call a video call: Tap
(see Manage a Skype-to-Skype
video call).
• Switch call audio between the device and a connected Bluetooth
headset: Tap
.
• Mute the microphone so you can’t be heard: Tap
. Tap again to
unmute the microphone.
TIP You don’t need an on-hold button to put a call on hold. Just tap the mute
icon to mute your end of the line.
• Open the dial pad to enter numbers for navigating phone trees,
responding to prompts, and so on: Tap
.
• Add a call: Tap
. When the dial pad appears, tap Contacts. Tap
the contact you want to call.
• Adjust call volume: Press volume.
Make a second Skype voice call
1
While on a Skype voice call, tap
. This does not mute the
microphone or put the first call on hold.
2
Tap Contacts, and then tap the Skype contact.
Answer a second Skype voice call (call waiting)
If you are on a Skype voice call, when a second Skype voice call
notification appears, tap
. The first call is put on hold.
Switch between two Skype voice calls
* Volume
1
Tap
to put the active call on hold and switch to the other call.
2
Tap
to end either call. If you end the currently active call, the call
on hold becomes active.
Use another application while on a Skype call
While you’re on a Skype call, you can use the other applications on your
device.
1
Make a conference call from multiple Skype voice calls
1
Make or answer a Skype voice call, and then make or answer a
second Skype voice call.
2
Tap
3
When you’re done, tap
While on a call, do one of the following:
• Display Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap
Just type, and begin typing the name of the app.
• Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).
2
Tap the application to open and work in it.
3
Tap the call notification at the top of the screen to return to the call
screen.
to create the conference call.
to end the conference call.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
123
End a Skype call
Edit or delete a Skype account
Do one of the following:
If you change the name or password you use with a Skype account, you
need to enter the new information in the account settings on your device.
• Tap
.
• Minimize the call screen to a card, and throw the card off the top of the
screen.
• If a headset is attached, press the button on the headset.
Set Skype calling preferences
.
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Under Accounts, tap Skype.
4
Do one of the following:
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
• To change the Skype name or password associated with the
account: Tap the appropriate field and enter the new information.
Tap Sign In.
3
Under Accounts, tap Skype.
• To delete the account: Tap Remove Account. Tap Remove Account
again to confirm.
4
Set any of the following:
Allow Skype Calls From: Tap Only My Skype Contacts to allow calls
from people in your Skype contacts only. Tap Anyone to allow calls
from any Skype user.
Allow Video Calls: Select On to allow both incoming Skype video
and Skype audio calls. Select Off to allow incoming Skype audio
calls only.
Auto-Accept Video: Select On to have your device automatically
allow an incoming video call. Select Off if you want to be prompted
whether to receive an incoming video call.
Show Video is Enabled: Select On if you want your Skype contacts
to see if you have video enabled or not. Select Off if you do not
want your contacts to see this.
5
124
1
Tap Done.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP
webOS smartphone
If you have an HP webOS smartphone, you can connect your HP
TouchPad to the smartphone. When the two are connected, you can
manage calls directly on your HP TouchPad.
You can connect your HP TouchPad to a webOS smartphone in the
following ways:
• Touch to share: For certain supported webOS smartphones, simply
touch the smartphone to your HP TouchPad to make a connection. To
share calls, the smartphone and your device must use the same HP
webOS Account. See Touch to Share.
• Bluetooth® wireless technology: For many webOS smartphone models,
use your device’s Bluetooth feature to pair with and connect to the
smartphone. See Bluetooth® wireless technology.
• The Phone & Video Calls application: If you open the Phone & Video
Calls application on your device before you have connected to a
smartphone, the app prompts you to connect your device to a
smartphone. See Connect your device to a webOS smartphone in the
Phone & Video Calls application.
do not see the Allow prompt, you cannot share text messages
between your device and your smartphone.
7
NOTE For certain supported webOS smartphones, connecting through Touch to
Share enables you to read, send, and reply to text messages from your device
through the connected smartphone (see Messaging: Text messaging).
Auto-Connect: The device and smartphone connect anytime they are
within range of one another.
Receive Phone Calls: Manage incoming and outgoing phone calls
directly on your device.
Connect your device to a webOS smartphone in the Phone &
Video Calls application
Receive SMS: Send, receive, and reply to text messages directly on
your device. This feature is supported on certain HP webOS
smartphones only.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN The webOS smartphone you are connecting to must be
discoverable. Check the documentation that came with your smartphone
for information on making it discoverable.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
If the Connect Phone option appears, tap Connect Phone. If this
option does not appear, do not continue with this procedure.
Instead, use the Bluetooth app to connect your device to the webOS
smartphone (see Bluetooth® wireless technology).
If Bluetooth is off, tap Off to turn Bluetooth on.
4
Do one of the following:
• If the smartphone you want to connect to is listed in the Devices
list, tap it.
• If the smartphone you want to connect to is not listed in the
Devices list, tap Add device, tap the Type field, and then tap
webOS Phone. When the smartphone you want to connect to is
found, tap it.
5
6
TIP If you want to change these settings later, you can do so in the Bluetooth
.
3
On your smartphone, tap Yes, Allow to complete the pairing
process.
On your smartphone, if prompted, tap Allow to allow shared
messaging between the smartphone and your HP TouchPad. This
feature is supported on certain HP webOS smartphones only. If you
(Optional) On your device, tap
beside the smartphone name
and turn any of the following options on or off for how you want to
use your device with the smartphone:
app (see Bluetooth® wireless technology).
NOTE You cannot send or receive multimedia messages on your device. If you
receive a multimedia message on a connected smartphone, a notification
appears on your device. You need to view the message on the smartphone,
however.
Dial by contact name using Just Type
1
Open Card view (see Manage applications in Card view) and tap
Just type.
2
Begin typing a contact’s first or last name, initials (no space), email
address, or phone number.
NOTE Just Type searches contacts on your HP TouchPad, not on a connected
smartphone.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
125
3
Tap one of the contact’s phone numbers to dial it. If only the contact
name appears, tap the name to display the phone numbers for that
contact, and tap a number.
4
If prompted, tap Bluetooth to make the call using a connected
smartphone.
TIP Tap the onscreen backspace icon (at the top of the dial pad, to the right of
the number you entered) to delete numbers one at a time. Tap and hold the icon
to delete all the numbers.
Dial a favorite
Dial using the onscreen dial pad
The onscreen dial pad is useful when you need to dial numbers that are
expressed as letters and when you need large, brightly lit numbers that
you can tap.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
If the dial pad is not displayed, tap Dialpad.
3
Tap the dial pad numbers to enter the number.
See Create a favorite in Phone & Video Calls for instructions on creating a
favorite.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Tap Favorites.
3
Tap the favorite. The call is made using the default number you
selected for that favorite.
4
If prompted, tap Bluetooth to make the call using a connected
smartphone.
Dial by contact name in the Phone & Video Calls application
See How do I add names and other info into Contacts? for instructions on
adding contacts to your device. You can also look up and dial contacts
using Just Type (see Dial by contact name using Just Type).
NOTE If you set up a Skype account on your device, see Use Skype voice and
video calling for information on calling Skype contacts.
126
4
Tap
to dial.
5
If prompted, tap Bluetooth to make the call using a connected
smartphone.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Tap Contacts.
3
Tap the Search field.
.
4
Type a name or initials until the contact you want appears. If your
company uses Microsoft Exchange Server with a Global Address List
(GAL), entering the contact search information returns matching
results from the GAL as well.
1
If a phone number appears as an underlined link, tap the number.
This displays the dial pad with the number already entered.
2
Tap
3
If prompted, tap Bluetooth to make the call using a connected
smartphone.
to dial.
Answer an incoming call through a connected smartphone
5
Tap the number.
If a call comes in, an incoming call notification appears on your device.
To answer the call, do one of the following:
6
If prompted, tap Bluetooth to make the call using a connected
smartphone.
• Tap
.
• If a headset is attached, press the button on the headset.
Redial the last number dialed
.
TIP If you miss a call, a notification appears at the top of the screen. Tap the
notification to open the missed call dashboard item. On the dashboard item,
tap the name or number to call the person back, or tap the icon on the left to
open your call history (see View your call history).
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
If the dial pad is not displayed, tap Dialpad.
3
Tap
. When the contact name or number appears at the top of
the screen, tap
again to dial.
Silence the ringer on an incoming call through a connected
smartphone
4
If prompted, tap Bluetooth to make the call using a connected
smartphone.
When you silence the ringer on an incoming call, you can answer the call
or let it ring through to voicemail. Silencing the ringer on your device
does not silence the ringer on a connected smartphone.
Dial from another application
Do one of the following:
If a phone number appears in another application as an underlined link,
you can begin dialing the number directly from that application. For
example, you can dial phone numbers that appear in web pages; in
messages; or in notes to calendar events.
• Press the power button.
• Press volume.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
127
Ignore a call through a connected smartphone
• Mute the microphone so you can’t be heard: Tap
To send a call immediately to voicemail, do one of the following:
.
TIP You don’t need an on-hold button to put a call on hold. Just tap the mute
icon to mute your end of the line.
• Tap
.
• Press the power button twice.
To reply to a caller who is in your Contacts list after you ignore a call, tap
the ignored call notification. This opens the caller’s contact entry, where
you can select a reply method. To reply to a caller who is not in your
Contacts list, go to your call history (see View your call history).
• Open the dial pad to enter numbers for navigating phone trees,
responding to prompts, and so on: Tap
.
• Adjust call volume: Press volume.
Manage a call through a connected smartphone
This information applies to calls through a connected smartphone, as well
as Skype calls to a phone number. For information on Skype-to-Skype
voice calls, see Manage a Skype-to-Skype voice call.
* Volume
Do any of the following:
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text messages during a call. This is
a great way to stay connected with friends and colleagues during a long call
(see Create and send a text message).
Use another application while on a call through a connected
smartphone
While you’re on a call using a connected smartphone, you can use the
other applications on your device.
1
While on a call, do one of the following:
• Display Card view (see Manage applications in Card view), tap
Just type, and begin typing the name of the app.
• Open the Launcher (see Open an application in the Launcher).
• Switch call audio between the smartphone and the device: Tap
and then tap TouchPad or Phone.
128
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
,
2
Tap the application to open and work in it.
3
Tap the call notification at the top of the screen to return to the call
screen.
End a call through a connected smartphone
Do one of the following:
• Tap
.
• Minimize the call screen to a card, and throw the card off the top of the
screen.
• If a headset is attached, press the button on the headset.
Listen to voicemail messages
You can check voicemail messages left on Skype calls, as well as on calls
through a connected smartphone. To use voicemail on your device, you
must have a Skype account set up on your device, or have voicemail set
up on the connected smartphone.
• If you do not have visual voicemail set up: If prompted, tap Skype
or Bluetooth to select which type of voicemail messages you want
to listen to. Your device connects the appropriate voicemail system.
3
Follow the voice prompts to listen to your messages.
View your call history
Your call history is more than just a log. It’s also a place where you can
dial a number, send a text message, and save or view contacts. Your
device displays entries for any calls you made or received on the device
itself, either using Skype or through a connected smartphone. The history
does not display entries for smartphone calls that you did not make or
answer on the device.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Tap Call-Log.
3
Do any of the following:
.
If you have visual voicemail set up on either Skype or a connected
smartphone, you can view a list of voicemail messages on your device.
1
Do one of the following:
• Tap a voicemail notification at the top of the screen.
2
• Open Phone & Video Calls
. Then tap Voicemail.
• Open Phone & Video Calls
hold 1 onscreen.
. Tap Dialpad, and then tap and
Do one of the following:
• If you have visual voicemail set up on either Skype or a connected
smartphone: A list of your voicemail messages is displayed. Tap a
message to listen to it.
• To call a number: Tap the number.
• To display other options for the contact or number: Tap
right side of the call history entry.
on the
DID YOU KNOW? If a call history entry displays a number next to the contact
picture or icon, this indicates that you made and/or received multiple calls to or
from that phone number or contact in the same day. If you had calls to or from a
contact using more than one of that contact’s phone numbers, all calls are
collapsed into a single entry, and the most recently used phone number is
displayed.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
129
• To delete a call history entry: Throw the entry off the side of the
screen. Tap Delete to confirm.
• To clear the call history: Open the application menu, tap Clear
Call History, and tap Clear Call History to confirm.
4
3
Tap Add Favorite, search for the contact, and tap the contact when
the name appears.
4
If the contact has more than one phone number, tap the number you
want to set as the favorite. When you call the favorite, the call is
made using this number.
If you displayed additional options for the contact or number, do
any of the following:
• To call an alternate number for a contact: Tap the number.
• To send a text message: Tap
.
• To save the number to Contacts: Tap Add to Contacts (see Save a
phone number to Contacts).
View favorite details
From the favorites list, you can dial a different phone number for that
contact, send a message, or view the favorite’s contact entry.
• To view a contact entry: Tap View Contact.
TIP In the favorites list, you can change the order of any favorite with an
assigned default number (see Create a favorite in Phone & Video Calls and Set
or change the default number for a favorite) by tapping and dragging. So you
can put the people you call most at the top of the list.
DID YOU KNOW? The additional options display includes the time and type
(incoming, outgoing, missed) of the call. If a call history entry collapses multiple
calls, the additional options show information for each call.
Work with favorites
You can quickly reach your closest contacts by phone, email, or text
message by designating them as favorites. Creating a favorite from a
contact lets you view and touch base with that contact in just a few taps.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Tap Favorites.
3
Tap
4
Do one of the following:
to the right of the favorite name.
• To call the favorite using a different number: Tap the number.
• To send the favorite a text message: Tap
For instructions on calling a contact you designate as a favorite, see Dial
a favorite.
130
.
.
• To view the favorite’s contact entry: Tap View Contact.
Create a favorite in Phone & Video Calls
Add a phone number to a favorite
You can also create favorites in Contacts (see Create a favorite).
If you create a favorite in Contacts, but the contact does not have a phone
number associated with it, you can add a phone number to the favorite in
Phone & Video Calls.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Tap Favorites.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Tap Favorites and tap the favorite.
3
Enter the number, and tap to select the phone number type (see
Create a contact for information).
4
Tap Done.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Tap Favorites.
3
Throw the favorite off the side of the screen. Tap Delete to confirm.
NOTE You can enter more than one phone number for the favorite here. If you
do, you need to set one of the numbers as the default (see Set or change the
default number for a favorite).
Set or change the default number for a favorite
If you create a favorite in Contacts, but the contact has more than one
phone number associated with it, you need to set the default number for
the favorite in the Phone & Video Calls app.
Also follow these steps if you want to use a different number as the default
number for a favorite.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
2
Tap Favorites.
3
Do one of the following:
TIP You can also remove a contact as a favorite from within the Contacts app
(see Remove a contact from favorites).
Save a phone number to Contacts
You can create a new contact directly from an incoming or outgoing call
in Phone & Video Calls. If an incoming call uses caller ID blocking, you
cannot create a contact for the number.
1
.
4
Tap the number you want to use.
Remove a contact from the favorites list
When you remove a contact as a favorite, you do not delete the contact
itself. The contact no longer shows up as a favorite in Phone & Video
Calls, Contacts, Email, Messaging, or Just Type search results.
Do one of the following:
• If you enter a phone number in Just Type that is not associated with
a contact, tap Add to Contacts.
• Before dialing a number you entered in the dial pad, tap Add to
Contacts.
• During a call, tap
• To set a default number: Tap the favorite.
• To change the default number: Tap
to the right of the favorite
name, and tap Change Default Number.
.
at the top of the screen.
• After a call, from the dial pad, tap Call-Log. Tap
on the right
side of the call history entry, and tap Add To Contacts.
2
On the new contact screen, enter the information for the contact,
and tap Done.
Use a phone headset
You can connect a 3.5mm headset to your device for hands-free
operation. You can also connect to a wireless headset using Bluetooth®
wireless technology. Both 3.5mm and wireless headsets are sold
separately.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
131
Set up and use a Bluetooth® hands-free device
WARNING If driving while using a phone is permitted in your area, we
recommend using a headset or hands-free car kit (sold separately). However, be
aware that use of a headset that covers both ears impairs your ability to hear
other sounds. Use of such a headset while operating a motor vehicle or riding a
bicycle may create a serious hazard to you and others, and may be illegal. If
you must use a stereo headset while driving, place a speaker in only one ear.
Leave the other ear free to hear outside noises, and use the headset only if it is
legal and you can do so safely.
If you are on a Skype call, you can listen to the call audio through a
compatible headset enabled with Bluetooth® wireless technology.
NOTE You cannot use a Bluetooth headset with calls made through a
connected webOS smartphone.
Your device is compatible with many headsets (sold separately) enabled
with Bluetooth version 2.1, with EDR and Stereo (with AVRCP media
controls).
Use a wired headset
Your device works with headsets that have a 3.5mm connector (look for
three colored bands on the plug). When in doubt, ask the third-party
headset manufacturer if the product is compatible with your device. If you
hear a headset buzz or poor microphone performance, your headset may
be incompatible with your device.
1
2
After you set up a connection with a Bluetooth headset, you can
communicate using that device whenever it is within range and the
Bluetooth feature on your device is turned on. The range can vary greatly,
depending on environmental factors. The maximum is about 30 feet (10
meters).
Insert a 3.5mm headset into the headset jack on the top of your
device. When you are on a call, the call audio is automatically
routed to the headset.
NOTE You can use an A2DP-enabled Bluetooth headset or speakers to listen to
music files on your device.
The button on the headset performs different actions depending on
the headset model and what’s happening on the device. Press the
button once to perform any of the following tasks supported by your
particular headset:
1
Open Bluetooth
2
If the Bluetooth setting at the top of the screen is off, tap Off to switch
the Bluetooth feature from Off to On.
3
Tap Add device.
4
In Type, make sure Audio is selected.
5
Tap the device name.
6
To use a Bluetooth device with your HP TouchPad, follow the
instructions that came with the Bluetooth device.
• Answer an incoming call.
• Respond to call waiting.
• Hang up a single active call or all calls on a conference call.
3
To switch the call audio to a different device, do one of the
following:
• To switch from the headset to your device’s speakers: Disconnect
the headset.
• To switch from the headset to a connected smartphone: Tap
and then tap Phone.
132
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
,
.
7
To switch the call audio to a different device, do one of the
following:
• To switch from the headset to the speakers on your HP TouchPad:
Disconnect the headset.
• To switch from the headset to a connected smartphone: Tap
and then tap Phone.
,
For more information on using the Bluetooth feature on your device, see
Bluetooth® wireless technology.
Customize Phone & Video Calls settings
Use dialing shortcuts
Dialing shortcuts add a prefix at the beginning of a number, so you can
dial an extension instead of the whole number.
1
Open Phone & Videos Calls
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Under Dialing Shortcuts, tap Add a number.
4
Set the following:
5
.
Example: A complete phone number in your company’s phone system has
11 numbers, for example, 1-408-555-1122. When dialing from a phone
that’s part of the system, you need to dial only the last five digits (51122).
When you create a dialing shortcut on your device, you select “5 digit
numbers” for When I Dial and enter “140855” in Use This Dialing Prefix.
So when you dial your co-worker’s five-digit extension (51122), your
device automatically dials the whole number: 1-408-555-1122.
Set your dialing method
If you have both a Skype account and a connected smartphone (see
Create a Skype account in Phone & Video Calls or Sign in to a Skype
account in Phone & Video Calls), you can set whether your device dials
calls using a connected smartphone or the Skype account. Alternatively,
you can select to be prompted for the account to use each time you make
a call.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
In Use, tap one of the following:
• To use a connected smartphone for outgoing calls: Tap Bluetooth.
• To use your Skype account for outgoing calls: Tap Skype.
• To see a prompt asking you which method you want to use every
time you make a call: Tap Always Ask.
When I Dial: Tap this field and select the number of digits you need
to enter to have your device add a dialing prefix.
4
Use This Dialing Prefix: Enter the prefix to be added at the
beginning of the dialed number. The combination of prefix and
digits you enter must add up to a complete phone number.
Select the smartphone to use for calls and text messages
Tap Done.
Tap Done.
If your device is paired with more than one webOS smartphone, you can
select the one to use for calls (and text messages, if supported). You can
connect with only one smartphone at a time.
1
Open Phone & Video Calls
.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
133
134
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Under Tap the device you’d like to use, tap the smartphone you want
to use for calls (and text messages, if supported).
4
Tap Done.
Chapter 11 : Phone & Video Calls
12 HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
135
136
137
138
138
139
139
139
140
140
Browse applications in HP webOS App Catalog
Download a free application
Buy an application
Reinstall a deleted application
Set up a billing account
Set billing account preferences
Update or delete a billing account
Manage applications with Software Manager
Update a downloaded application from a notification
Manually check for application updates
Browse applications in HP webOS App
Catalog
Use HP webOS App Catalog to browse and download any of the many
applications available for your device. App Catalog contains both free
apps and apps you can buy.
NOTE HP webOS App Catalog is periodically updated. Because of this, the
app may offer more functionality and features than those described in this
chapter. For the most up-to-date information on App Catalog, see the on-device
Help.
NOTE Applications you installed on your old Palm OS by ACCESS or Windows
Mobile smartphone do not work on your HP TouchPad because your HP
TouchPad uses the new HP webOS. In addition, some apps developed for HP
webOS smartphones may not work on your HP TouchPad. Check App Catalog
for a new version of your old favorites.
1
Open HP App Catalog
.
2
The first time you open App Catalog, if prompted, select your
country.
IMPORTANT Be sure to select the correct country. You can’t change it later.
3
The first time you open App Catalog, review the terms of use and tap
Accept.
4
Do one of the following:
• To browse Pivot, a magazine showcasing new apps: Tap Featured
at the bottom of the screen. Swipe right and left on the screen to
turn pages.
• To search by category: Tap Categories at the bottom of the screen,
and tap a category. To view subcategories for a category, tap All
[category name] at the top of the screen, and tap a subcategory. If
a subcategory screen displays the subcategory name at the top,
tap the name to view further subcategories. Tap the arrow next to
the subcategory name to return to the list of subcategories.
• To search applications you bookmarked: Tap Bookmarks at the
bottom of the screen.
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
135
• To search by name: Tap Search at the bottom of the screen. Type a
search term, and then tap
or tap Enter on the onscreen
keyboard. A list of apps whose name or category matches your
search term appears.
if your device is connected to an HP webOS smartphone (see Use
your HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone).
• To see more apps from this app developer: Tap Developer Apps.
• To go to the developer’s product support page: Tap Support (if
available).
• To search within featured, paid, free, or new apps only: After you
start a category, bookmark, or name search, tap Top, Paid, Free,
or New at the top of the screen.
5
When the app you want appears onscreen, tap the name to display
app details.
6
On the app details screen, do any of the following:
• To report a problem with the app: Tap Report a Problem. Tap Bug
and tap the type of problem you are reporting. Tap Type your
problem here, enter the problem description, and tap Send.
Download a free application
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Before you download an app, make sure you have
enough storage space on your device to fit the app. Open Device Info
and look at the Available field under Device.
1
Open HP App Catalog
.
2
Find a free app you want (see Browse applications in HP webOS
App Catalog).
3
Tap Free to the right of the app name.
TIP You can also tap the app name to open the app details screen, and tap Free
at the top of the screen.
• To see video of the app: Tap a thumbnail image that displays the
icon. Not all apps include videos.
• To see more thumbnails: Swipe right or left on the thumbnail area
of the screen.
• To bookmark the app: Tap
4
at the top of the screen.
If the application uses Location Services, a notification appears (see
Location Services). Tap Continue.
TIP To pause a download, tap the Downloading progress bar. To resume
downloading, tap Download paused.
TIP You can also bookmark an app in the app search results list by tapping the
bookmark icon to the right of the app name.
5
• To read reviews: Under Reviews, tap Positive or Negative. Scroll to
see more positive or negative reviews.
• To share info about the app with a friend: Tap Share, and then tap
Email or Text Message. Sharing via text message is available only
136
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
After you download an app, tap Launch to open it. The app also
now appears as an icon on the Downloads page in the Launcher, so
you can open it from the Launcher as well.
You can move to other screens and work in other applications while your
new app downloads in the background. For example, find another app in
App Catalog and start its download while the first download is finishing.
TIP A good way to get started with App Catalog is to download the free
Facebook Tablet app.
Buy an application
Buy an application using your billing account or by entering
a promo code
4
If the application uses Location Services, a notification appears (see
Location Services). Tap Continue.
5
If prompted, enter your HP webOS Account password to authorize
the purchase. Tap Submit.
6
If you have a billing account, if prompted, tap OK to verify the email
address where you want to receive purchase receipts, or enter a
different email address.
7
If you do not have a billing account, you are prompted to set one up.
See Set up a billing account.
8
Do one of the following:
• To purchase the app using a promo code: Tap Use Promo Code.
Tap Promo Code, enter the promo code, and then tap Use Promo
Code.
A promo code allows you to purchase one or more App Catalog apps for
free. You might receive a promo code for a specific app, or a general
code that allows you to purchase one or more apps up to a specific dollar
amount.
You need to have a billing account set up in App Catalog to purchase
apps with a promo code—however, your account is not charged when
you use the code. If you do not have a promo code for an app, the
purchase is billed to your billing account.
You can also purchase an app directly from a promo code link (see Buy
an application directly from a promo code link).
1
Open HP App Catalog
.
2
Browse to the app you want (see Browse applications in HP webOS
App Catalog).
3
Tap the price to the right of the app name.
• To purchase the app using your billing account: Tap Purchase.
TIP To pause a download, tap the Downloading progress bar. To resume
downloading, tap Download paused.
9
After you download an app, tap Launch to open it. The app also
now appears as an icon on the Downloads page in the Launcher, so
you can open it from the Launcher as well.
TIP If you delete a purchased application you can reinstall it without paying for
it again (see Reinstall a deleted application).
You can move to other screens and work in other applications while your
new app downloads in the background. For example, find another app in
App Catalog and start its download while the first download is finishing.
TIP You can also tap the app name to open the app details screen, and tap the
price at the top of the screen.
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
137
Buy an application directly from a promo code link
8
A promo code allows you to purchase one or more App Catalog apps for
free. You might receive a promo code for a specific app, or a general
code that allows you to purchase one or more apps up to a specific dollar
amount.
You need to have a billing account set up in App Catalog to purchase
apps with a promo code—however, your account is not charged when
you use the code.
1
If you receive a promo code link (such as in an email or text
message), click the link.
2
Do one of the following:
• If the main App Catalog page is displayed: Tap OK to dismiss the
promo code notification. Browse to the app you want. Tap the app
name.
TIP If you delete a purchased application you can reinstall it without paying for
it again (see Reinstall a deleted application).
You can move to other screens and work in other applications while your
new app downloads in the background. For example, find another app in
App Catalog and start its download while the first download is finishing.
Reinstall a deleted application
• If a specific app page is displayed: Tap OK to dismiss the promo
code notification.
If you delete an app you installed on your device (see Manage
applications with Software Manager), you can easily reinstall the app.
You do not need to buy the app again—App Catalog recognizes that you
bought it and now offers it as a free app.
3
Tap the price at the top of the app details screen.
1
Open HP App Catalog
4
If the application uses Location Services, a notification appears (see
Location Services). Tap Continue.
2
Browse to the app (see Browse applications in HP webOS App
Catalog).
5
If prompted, enter your HP webOS Account password to authorize
the purchase. Tap Submit.
3
Tap Free to the right of the app name.
6
If you do not have a billing account, you are prompted to set one up.
See Set up a billing account.
Set up a billing account
7
Do one of the following:
• To purchase the app using the promo code: Tap Use Promo Code.
• To purchase the app using your billing account: Tap Purchase.
TIP To pause a download, tap the Downloading progress bar. To resume
downloading, tap Download paused.
138
After you download an app, tap Launch to open it. The app also
now appears as an icon on the Downloads page in the Launcher, so
you can open it from the Launcher as well.
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
1
Open HP App Catalog
2
Do one of the following:
.
.
• Find an app you want to buy, and tap the price to the right of the
app name. Tap Setup Credit Card.
• Open the application menu, tap Preferences & Accounts, and tap
Add Credit Card.
3
Enter your HP webOS Account password and tap Submit.
4
Tap OK to verify your email address, or tap Change Email Address
to enter a different one. Purchase receipts are sent to the address
shown here.
5
Select your billing country and credit card type. Enter your credit
card and billing address details, and tap Done.
IMPORTANT Your credit card details are not stored on your device. They are
encrypted and stored in your HP webOS Account in the cloud.
Set billing account preferences
.
Update or delete a billing account
1
Open HP App Catalog
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
To change credit card information: Tap the credit card name.
4
To change the password requirements or receipt email: Tap the
current entry under Password Is Required or Send Receipts, and
select a new password requirement or enter a new email address.
5
If prompted, enter your HP webOS Account password and tap
Submit.
6
Do one of the following:
• To edit the account information: Change the information as
needed and tap Done.
• To delete the account information: Tap Remove Credit Card. Tap
Remove Credit Card again to confirm.
1
Open HP App Catalog
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Under Password is Required, select one of the following:
Manage applications with Software Manager
Once Every 4 Hours: You must enter your password the first time you
make a purchase. If you make any other purchases within four hours,
you don’t need to enter your password again. After four hours, you
enter your password again for the first purchase, which starts a new
four-hour clock.
Use Software Manager to work with applications and background
services that you add to your device.
Every Purchase: You must enter your password for each purchase,
regardless of the time interval.
4
Under Send Receipts, enter the email address where you want to
receive receipts for App Catalog purchases. This option appears
only if you have a billing account set up.
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
139
1
Open Software Manager
.
Update a downloaded application from a
notification
When an update is available for one or more apps you downloaded, you
get a notification.
Tap the notification and do one of the following:
2
Tap Apps to manage downloaded apps that appear in the
Launcher, or tap Other to manage background apps and services
that do not appear in the Launcher.
3
Tap an app or service name.
4
On the app details screen, do any of the following:
• To add a review: Tap Review App. Tap the stars to rate the app.
Tap the name you want displayed with your review. Tap Tap Here
to Type, enter your review, and then tap Send.
• To report a problem with the app: Tap Report a Problem. Under
Problem Type, tap Bug and tap the type of problem you are
reporting. Tap Tap Here to Type, enter the problem description,
and then tap Send.
• To display details about an app and the available update: Tap the app
name.
• To update one app: Tap the arrow icon to the right of the app name.
• To update all apps: Tap Install Updates.
Manually check for application updates
1
Open Software Manager
2
Tap Apps to manage downloaded apps that appear in the
Launcher, or tap Other to manage background apps and services
that do not appear in the Launcher.
3
If updates are available for any of your downloaded apps or
services, an [X] Updates Available button appears at the bottom of
the screen with a number. The number indicates the number of items
for which updates are available. Tap [X] Updates Available.
• To delete the app: Tap Delete. Tap Delete again to confirm.
TIP You can also delete an app by throwing it off the side of the screen from the
app list, and then tapping Delete to confirm.
TIP You can reinstall any app you delete (see Reinstall a deleted application).
140
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
.
4
Do one of the following:
• To display details about an app and the available update: Tap the
app name.
• To update one app: Tap the update version number to the right of
the app name.
• To update all apps: Tap Install All.
• To return to the list of apps: Tap My Apps.
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
141
142
Chapter 12 : HP webOS App Catalog and Software Manager
13 Preferences
143
148
148
151
153
154
155
Backup
Date & Time
Device Info
Exhibition
Regional Settings
Screen & Lock
Sounds & Ringtones
Backup
Backup is one of the major advantages of your HP webOS Account. You
create an HP webOS Account when you set up your device.
What is an HP webOS Account?
When you create an HP webOS Account during setup of your device, you
gain access to the many advantages of having an HP webOS Account,
including automatic, daily backup of your data.
NOTE You cannot access the info in your HP webOS Account anywhere but on
your device. View, add to, and edit the info in your HP webOS Account on your
device.
Automatic, daily backup to a secure server: Info stored in your HP webOS
Account is automatically, daily backed up to a secure server.
Your device backs up the contacts, calendar events, and memos that are
in your HP webOS Account, as well as system settings and applications
you downloaded to your device. If you ever need to erase the info from
your device, you can restore all your backed-up info. All data backed up
to your HP webOS Account is encrypted, and only you, the profile owner,
can access your data.
Backup does not affect information stored in online accounts like Google.
Information stored in online accounts is synchronized by the online
provider at regular intervals. Information stored in Exchange is
synchronized by your company’s Exchange server.
IMPORTANT Backup does not back up files stored on your device’s USB drive.
Your HP webOS Account gives you the following benefits:
You can turn off automatic backup, and you can also perform a manual
backup.
HP webOS Account on your device: Your HP webOS Account is
automatically created for you on your device. In this account you can
store Contacts and Calendar info that you don’t store in online accounts
like Google or Exchange.
Remote erase of a lost or stolen device: If your device is lost or stolen,
open the web browser on your computer, sign in to your HP webOS
Account on hpwebos.com/account, and do a remote erase of the info on
the device.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
143
Table 1. Backup details
NOTE If you want to erase data on your device while you are still in possession
of the device—for example, before you give it to someone else—don’t do a
remote erase. Instead, do a partial or full erase of the device itself (see Erase
data and reset your device).
Application
Backed up
Adobe
Reader
Nothing is backed up.
Keep a copy of these files
on your computer (see
Copy files between your
device and your
computer).
Amazon
Kindle
If you downloaded the
Amazon Kindle app from
HP webOS App Catalog,
when you sign in to your
HP webOS Account after
your device is erased, the
app is downloaded again.
App
Catalog
See entry for HP App
Catalog.
Backup
Backup setting is on by
default.
Bluetooth
Nothing is backed up.
Calendar
Events in your HP webOS
Account.
Access to system updates: Automatic system and software updates are
sent to your device.
Updating of HP webOS Account settings: To change your HP webOS
Account information after you set it up, see Update your HP webOS
Account settings. To see the email address you used when you set up your
HP webOS Account, open Device Info (see View system information).
What information is backed up?
All data backed up to your HP webOS Account is encrypted, and only
you, the profile owner, can access your data. Data in your HP webOS
Account can be viewed, added to, or edited only on your device.
IMPORTANT In the event that your device is lost or stolen, you can go to your
HP webOS Account on hpwebos.com/account and from there erase the data
on your device.
The following table lists info that is and is not backed up to your HP
webOS Account:
Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Table 1. Backup details
Preferences (see Customize
Calendar).
Application
Backed up
Not backed up
Accounts
Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Entries (contacts, events,
messages, and so on) in
online accounts
Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
144
Chapter 13 : Preferences
Contacts
Not backed up
Events in online accounts.
Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Contacts in your HP
webOS Account.
Contacts in online
accounts.
Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Google.
Favorites.
Linking relationships
between contacts.
Preferences (see Customize
Contacts).
Table 1. Backup details
Application
Backed up
Date & Time
Nothing is backed up.
Device Info
Nothing is backed up.
Email
Usernames for your email
accounts.
Table 1. Backup details
Not backed up
Application
Backed up
Not backed up
Messaging
Instant messages.
Passwords and history.
Usernames for IM
accounts.
Passwords for your email
accounts.
Text messages sent or
received when your device
was connected to a
webOS smartphone (see
Messaging: Text
messaging).
Emails, their contents, and
attachments, their sort
order, and account
preferences.
Excel
See entry for Quickoffice.
Exhibition
Nothing is backed up.
Facebook
Nothing is backed up.
Help
Nothing is backed up.
HP App
Catalog
When you sign in to your
HP webOS Account after
your device is erased, apps
you downloaded from App
Catalog are downloaded
again.
Just Type
Nothing is backed up.
Launcher
Reordered Launcher icons
(see Reorder Launcher
icons).
Location
Services
Preferences.
Maps
Nothing is backed up.
Memos
All memos.
App settings and data
stored in the app.
Applications from sources
other than App Catalog.
Music
Nothing is backed up.
Keep a copy of these files
on your computer (see
Copy files between your
device and your
computer).
Phone &
Video Calls
Call history entries for any
calls made, received, or
missed when your device
was connected to a
webOS smartphone (see
Use your HP TouchPad with
a connected HP webOS
smartphone).
Photos &
Videos
Usernames for online
accounts that sync, like
Facebook and Snapfish.
No photos or videos are
backed up. On your
computer, keep a copy of
the photos and videos that
are on your device (see
Copy files between your
device and your
computer).
Passwords for online
accounts that sync, like
Facebook and Snapfish.
PowerPoint
See entry for Quickoffice.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
145
Table 1. Backup details
Table 1. Backup details
Application
Backed up
Print
Manager
Nothing is backed up.
Quickoffice
Usernames and passwords
for your Quickoffice
accounts.
Regional
Settings
Nothing is backed up.
Screen &
Lock
Nothing is backed up.
Software
Manager
When you sign in to your
HP webOS Account after
your device is erased, apps
you downloaded from App
Catalog are downloaded
again.
Sounds &
Ringtones
Nothing is backed up.
System
Updates
Nothing is backed up.
Text Assist
Nothing is backed up.
Third-party
apps
Apps you downloaded are
downloaded again from
App Catalog.
VPN
Nothing is backed up.
Wallpaper
Nothing is backed up.
Web
Bookmarks.
Browser cookies.
Wi-Fi
146
Nothing is backed up.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
Not backed up
No documents,
spreadsheets, or
presentations are backed
up. Keep a copy of these
files on your computer (see
Copy files between your
device and your
computer).
Application
Backed up
Word
See entry for Quickoffice.
YouTube
Nothing is backed up.
Not backed up
Manually back up information to your HP webOS Account
Backup occurs automatically every day, but we recommend that you
manually back up your information before you reset your device or
change your HP webOS Account settings.
1
Open Backup
.
2
Tap Back Up Now.
App settings and data
stored in the app.
Applications from sources
other than App Catalog.
Downloads and web
settings.
Erase HP webOS Account information from the server
1
Open Backup
2
Do either of the following:
Update your HP webOS Account settings
.
• To stop backup of your info and delete all backed-up information
from the server: Tap On to switch backup from On to Off. Tap Turn
Off And Erase Backup. This deletes all your information on the
server. It does not affect the information on your device.
TIP Open Device Info to delete the information on your device (see Erase data
and reset your device).
• To turn on automatic backup if you had previously turned it off:
Tap Off to switch Backup from Off to On.
IMPORTANT To ensure that the data on your device is consistent with that
stored on your HP webOS Account, we recommend that you perform a manual
backup of your data both before and after you change any of your HP webOS
Account settings (see Manually back up information to your HP webOS
Account).
1
Open Accounts
2
Tap your HP webOS Account name.
3
Enter your HP webOS Account password and tap Sign In.
4
Edit any of the following:
Name: Tap the current name. Enter a new first name and/or last
name associated with your HP webOS Account.
Remotely erase HP webOS Account information from your
device
Email: Tap the current email address. Enter a new email address
associated with your HP webOS Account. A verification email is sent
to the new address. Click the link in the email to verify the new
address. After you verify, the email address is changed.
In the event that your device is lost or stolen, go to your HP webOS
Account on your computer and from there, erase the data on your device.
This does not affect the information stored in your online HP webOS
Account.
1
On your computer, go to hpwebos.com/account.
2
Sign in using your HP webOS Account email address and
password.
3
Click Device Info.
4
Click I Lost My Phone > Erase Device.
.
Password: Tap the current password (displayed as a series of *
characters). Enter your new password and confirm it. Tap Done.
Security Question/Answer: Tap the current question and tap a new
one. Then tap Answer and enter an answer.
5
To view information about a device associated with this account,
under Devices, tap the device. When you are finished viewing the
information, tap Done.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
147
Date & Time
3
To view application information, under Software, tap and hold an
app name, then release. Tap Done when you are finished viewing
the information.
You can set your device to adjust the date and time automatically to the
local date and time wherever you are, or you can turn this feature off and
enter this information manually.
4
To return to the summary view, tap Back.
1
Open Date & Time
.
2
Set any of the following:
Time format: Tap the field at the top of the screen and set whether to
use a 12-hour or a 24-hour format.
Network Time: Network time is set by your Wi-Fi network provider.
Tap On or Off. If you turn this option off, select the date and time. If
you switch from manual time to network time, there might be a delay
before the network time updates on your device.
Timezone: To change the time zone, tap the currently displayed city.
Tap the search field and begin typing the name a country or city in
the time zone you want, or scroll the list to find the location. Tap the
location when it appears.
Device Info
View system information
1
2
148
Open Device Info
. Basic system information is displayed, such as
your battery usage and available memory. The screen also displays
the email address you used when you set up your HP webOS
Account.
To view more detailed system information, tap More Info, and tap
Software or Hardware.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
Rename your device
The name you give your device appears on any paired Bluetooth® device
that has a display, such as a connected webOS smartphone. If you
rename your HP TouchPad, the name is updated automatically on the
other device—you don’t need to pair again.
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Under Name, tap the currently displayed name and enter the new
name.
Restart your device
If an application freezes, first try restarting your device.
An occasional restart can be good for your device just the way a restart
can be good for your computer. Every once in a while, restart your
device.
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Tap Reset Options and tap Restart.
NOTE If the screen does not respond to taps, press and hold the power button
and Center at the same time for 15 seconds to restart your device.
Erase data and reset your device
About the full erase options
If restarting your device does not solve the problem of application freezes,
you may need to reset the device. A reset deletes some or all information
from your device (depending on the type of reset you select). After a reset,
you must follow the prompts to sign in to your HP webOS Account again
before you can use your device.
In most cases, you can perform a regular full erase if you want to erase
downloaded applications and USB drive storage files from your device.
Perform a secure full erase when you give your device to somebody else
and you don’t want that person to be able to access your data.
IMPORTANT If possible, do a manual backup of your HP webOS Account data
before resetting your device (see Manually back up information to your HP
webOS Account). After you sign in to your HP webOS Account again, any
backed-up information is restored (see What information is backed up?).
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Tap Reset Options.
3
Tap one of the following:
Erase Apps & Data: Erases all application data and settings, as well
as any applications you installed from App Catalog.
Erase USB Drive: Erases all files stored in USB drive storage, such as
pictures, videos, and music.
Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you installed,
and USB drive storage files. Use Full Erase if you want a clean erase
of your currently installed apps and files but plan to continue using
the device.
Secure Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you
installed, and USB drive storage files. Use Secure Full Erase if you
plan to give the device away and you do not want your data and
files to be recoverable even using a third-party tool. Secure Full Erase
performs a complete wipe of the device and takes considerably
longer than a regular full erase.
4
Tap the button again to confirm your choice.
Regardless of which full erase option you choose, all your data on the
web—in your online accounts and in your HP webOS Account—is
untouched.
After either type of full erase, you can sign in to your HP webOS Account
either on a new webOS device or the same device you just erased.
Signing in restores your HP webOS Account data and information from
online accounts (see What information is backed up?), but not your stored
files such as pictures, videos, and music (you must copy those again to the
device; see Copy files between your device and your computer).
Run Automated Diagnostics
If you are troubleshooting your device with a support agent, you can run
Automated Diagnostics to supply the agent with diagnostic information
about your device. If you need more information after running Automated
Diagnostics, you can run Interactive Diagnostics (see Run Interactive
Diagnostics).
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Diagnostics.
3
On the screen that appears, tap Automated.
4
Work with the support agent to view and report the test results.
Run Interactive Diagnostics
If you are troubleshooting your device with a support agent and need
more information after running Automated Diagnostics (see Run
Automated Diagnostics), you can run Interactive Diagnostics.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
149
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Diagnostics.
3
On the screen that appears, tap Interactive.
• To change the default application to use for different functions:
Under Data Types, tap the currently displayed application for a
given data type, and tap a different application.
4
Work with the support agent to run and view results from one or
more tests.
• To change the default application to use for different file types:
Under File Types, tap the currently displayed application for a
given file type, and tap a different application.
Run a custom application
If you are troubleshooting your device with a support agent, the agent
may need to run a custom application on your device.
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Custom Application.
3
Work with the support agent to enter the custom application name
and run the application.
4
Do either or both of the following:
To override the default application setting when looking for the map
location of an address, tap and hold the address, and then tap the
application you want.
Use Certificate Manager
Certificates are digital documents that are used to authenticate and
exchange information on networks. Certificates can be issued for a user,
a device, or a service.
Install a certificate from USB drive storage
Change default applications
If you have more than one application on your device that can perform a
particular function, you can change the default application to use for that
function.
In addition, if you have more than one application on your device that
can open a particular file type, you can change the default application to
use for opening that file type.
150
1
Open Device Info
2
Open the application menu and tap Default Applications.
3
To find data types and file types for which more than one app is
available, look for app names that appear in black type.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
You can install a certificate that is located in the USB drive storage on
your device. For information on copying a certificate into USB drive
storage, see Copy files between your device and your computer.
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Certificate Manager.
3
Tap
and tap the certificate name.
.
Install a certificate from an email attachment
• Open the email attachment (see Open email attachments), and then
tap Trust Certificate.
View certificate details
Start Exhibition
You can view user-installed certificates only.
Do one of the following:
1
Open Device Info
2
Open the application menu and tap Certificate Manager.
3
Tap the certificate name.
• When the screen is off, place your device on a Touchstone. Exhibition
starts automatically.
• If you place your device on a Touchstone while the screen is on,
Exhibition starts when the device has been inactive for the period
defined in Screen & Lock (see Set the interval for turning the screen off
automatically). The screen does not lock.
• Open Exhibition
and tap Start Exhibition. This starts Exhibition
whether or not your device is on a Touchstone.
.
Delete a certificate
You can delete user-installed certificates only.
1
Open Device Info
.
2
Open the application menu and tap Certificate Manager.
3
Tap the certificate and tap Delete Certificate.
Exhibition
Exhibition gives you access to applications specially designed for use with
your device when it is placed on an HP Touchstone (sold separately).
These apps include Time (clock app), Photos & Videos (photo slideshow),
and Agenda (agenda based on your Calendar events for the day).
NOTE If you place your device on a Touchstone when you are on a call or
watching a video in the Pictures & Videos or YouTube app, Exhibition does not
start.
Exit Exhibition
Do any of the following:
• Press Center
.
• If your device is on a Touchstone, remove the device from the
Touchstone.
When you exit Exhibition, the last used item on the device is displayed:
the Launcher, Card view, or an app window.
NOTE You cannot use a Touchstone by connecting the USB cable to a
computer.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
151
Use Exhibition
does not have a checkmark next to its name to include it in the
slideshow. Tap an album that has a checkmark next to its name to
remove it from the slideshow. Tap Done.
Here are some key features of using Exhibition.
• When Exhibition starts, the last-used app is displayed. To switch to
another app, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap the app
you want.
• When Exhibition starts, notifications appear as usual, and tapping a
notification performs the same action as usual.
• If your device is on a Touchstone but Exhibition is turned off, Exhibition
starts automatically when the device has been inactive for the period
defined in Screen & Lock (see Set the interval for turning the screen off
automatically). The screen does not lock.
• If you have Secure Unlock turned on, you must enter your PIN or
password to use the device when you exit Exhibition.
Use your device as a clock
The Exhibition Time app provides a convenient way to use your device as
a clock while the device is sitting on a Touchstone.
• To pause playback: Tap
.
• To resume playback: Tap
.
• To change the timing of the slideshow: Tap
and tap a time
interval. This interval sets how long a picture is displayed before it
transitions to the next picture.
4
To manually move to the next or previous picture during a slideshow:
Swipe left or right on the screen.
5
To exit the slideshow: Press Center
.
View your day’s agenda
Agenda view displays any of the current day’s calendar events in list
format.
• In Exhibition, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap Agenda.
• In Exhibition, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap Time.
View a picture slideshow
When your device is in Exhibition, you can set it to play a continuous
slideshow of pictures from any album in the Photos & Videos app.
1
In Exhibition, tap the upper-left corner of the screen, and tap Photos.
Playback of the currently selected album starts automatically. The
default is to display photos from all albums.
2
To display playback controls, tap the screen.
3
When the playback controls are displayed, do any of the following:
• To choose which album(s) to use for the slideshow: Tap Select
Album in the upper-right corner of the screen. Tap an album that
152
Chapter 13 : Preferences
NOTE If Agenda is not displayed in the options in the upper-left corner of the
screen, you need to turn it on (see Customize Exhibition settings).
Customize Exhibition settings
1
Open Exhibition
2
2
Do either of the following:
• To change the layout or language of the keyboard you are
currently using: Tap the keyboard.
• To change which apps are available in Exhibition: Check or
uncheck the box to the right of each app name. You cannot
remove the Time app.
• To find more Exhibition apps: Tap Find More. This opens App
Catalog displaying a list of apps you can use in Exhibition. Tap an
app to download it (see Download a free application and Buy an
application). You can install as many Exhibition apps as you want.
Under Keyboard Type, do one of the following:
• To add a keyboard: Tap Add Keyboard.
3
To select a layout, tap the layout currently displayed, and then tap a
new layout.
4
To select a language, tap the language currently displayed, and
then tap a new language.
Regional Settings
5
Tap Done.
Change the display language
Select a default country code for phone numbers
You can set your device display to any language available for the device.
You can set the country code to be used with any phone numbers that do
not include a country code, including phone numbers contained in a
contact entry.
1
Open Regional Settings
.
2
Tap the language currently displayed in the Language field, and
then tap a new language.
3
If a region list is displayed, tap the region.
4
Tap Apply Changes and Reboot.
Your device restarts after you select a new language. The restart does not
affect your data or applications.
Set up and switch among multiple onscreen keyboard layouts
and languages
For information on using the onscreen keyboard, see Use the onscreen
keyboard.
1
Open Regional Settings
.
1
Open Regional Settings
.
2
Under Phone Numbers, tap the currently displayed country or
region.
3
Scroll down to find a country, and then tap it.
4
Tap Apply Changes and Reboot.
Your device restarts after you select a new default region for phone
numbers. The restart does not affect your data or applications.
Change the display formats
You can set your device to format numbers, currency, date, and time in the
style you prefer. You can select the format commonly used in your country
or region, or any style you want.
1
Open Regional Settings
.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
153
2
Under Formats, tap the currently displayed country name.
1
Open Screen & Lock
3
Scroll down to find a country, and then tap it.
2
4
Tap Apply Changes and Reboot.
In Turn off After, tap the interval shown, and then tap the number of
minutes.
Your device restarts after you select a new country format. The restart does
not affect your data or applications.
Turn auto dim on/off
By default, your screen dims after a period of inactivity. You can turn this
feature off.
1
Open Screen & Lock
2
In Auto Dim, tap On to change the setting from On to Off, or tap Off
to change the setting from Off to On.
1
Open Screen & Lock
2
Tap Change Wallpaper.
3
Tap the album containing the picture, and tap the picture.
4
(Optional) In the preview window, do either or both of the following:
1
Open Screen & Lock
.
2
Drag the Brightness slider left or right.
TIP You can also adjust the screen brightness in the system menu (see Use the
system menu).
Set the interval for turning the screen off automatically
By default, your screen turns off after two minutes of inactivity to save
battery power. You can change this interval.
.
• To zoom out or in on a part of the picture: Pinch in or out on the
picture, or double-tap the picture.
.
Adjust the screen brightness
Chapter 13 : Preferences
Change your wallpaper
Your wallpaper is the screen background in Card view. You can customize
the wallpaper to show a favorite picture.
Screen & Lock
154
.
• To capture the portion of the picture you want for your wallpaper:
Tap and hold the picture, and then drag the portion you want to
the fill the window. This portion becomes the wallpaper.
5
Tap OK.
Turn advanced gestures on/off
Turning on advanced gestures enables the up gesture.
The up gesture is a drag up from the bottom edge of the screen. When an
app is open full-screen, make the up gesture to go to Card view. When
Card view is displayed, make the up gesture to open the Launcher. When
the Launcher is open, make the up gesture to go to Card view.
1
Open Screen & Lock
.
2
In Enable Gestures, tap On or Off.
Set options for unlocking the screen
3
Enter the old PIN/password and the new PIN/password.
The screen locks five seconds after it turns off automatically, or
immediately if you turn the screen off manually. Use Secure Unlock if you
want to require a PIN or a password to unlock the screen.
4
Tap Done.
TIP If your company issued your device to you, check with your system
administrator about whether the company has its own settings for locking and
unlocking the screen of your device.
1
Open Screen & Lock
2
To turn Secure Unlock on: In Secure Unlock, tap Off. Tap Simple PIN
or Password, and do one of the following:
Get notifications when the screen is locked
1
Open Screen & Lock
.
2
In Show When Locked, tap On or Off to set whether notifications are
displayed when the screen is locked.
.
Simple PIN: Enter a PIN of any length. This is a PIN that you make
up. Enter the PIN again to confirm, and then tap Done.
Password: Enter a password containing any combination of letters
and numbers, and then tap Done. Enter the password again to
confirm, and then tap Done.
IMPORTANT Be sure to write down your PIN or password and keep it
somewhere safe. If you forget your PIN or password, you need to remotely reset
your device and may lose data.
3
Tap Lock After to choose whether the screen locks after a designated
time, or after the screen turns off.
4
To turn Secure Unlock off: In Secure Unlock, tap the currently
displayed option (Simple PIN or Password), and then tap Off. Enter
the PIN or password, and then tap Done.
Change your Secure Unlock password
1
Open Screen & Lock
2
In Secure Unlock, tap Change PIN or Change Password.
Turn blink notifications on/off
If blink notifications are turned on, when the screen is off, the Center
button blinks when a notification arrives and continues to blink until you
tap the notification or turn on the screen. Blink notifications are on by
default.
1
Open Screen & Lock
.
2
In Blink Notifications, tap On or Off.
Sounds & Ringtones
Set sound options
You can turn all sounds on or off. You can also turn a particular group of
sounds, including keyboard clicks, notification alerts, and system sounds
such as transition sounds, on or off. When sounds are on, you can set the
sound volume.
Sounds are turned on by default.
.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
155
1
Open Sounds & Ringtones
.
2
In Vibrate, tap On or Off to turn the vibrate setting off or on.
NOTE If you turn off system sounds using the system menu, the sounds are
muted even if they are turned on in Sounds & Ringtones (see Use the system
menu). Likewise, if sounds are turned off in Sounds & Ringtones, they do not
play even if you have the system menu sound setting turned on.
1
Open Sounds & Ringtones
.
Turn Beats Audio on/off
2
Do one of the following:
• To turn off all sounds: In Sounds, tap On to switch all sounds from
On to Off.
• To turn off a specific group of sounds: In System Sounds or
Keyboard Clicks, tap On to switch from On to Off.
Beats Audio lets you hear the music the way the artist intended you to
hear it. The dynamic Beats Audio profile delivers a clear, distortion-free
music listening experience with incredible highs and rich, warm lows.
Beats Audio is turned on by default.
1
Open Sounds & Ringtones
.
2
In Beats, tap On or Off to turns Beats Audio off or on.
NOTE Calendar, Email, and Messaging notification sounds are controlled
separately. If you have notification sounds turned on in any of those apps (see
Customize event notification sounds, Turn new email notifications on/off, and
Customize messaging notifications), the sound plays even if you have System
Sounds turned off.
3
If sounds are on, drag the Volume slider to set the sound volume.
Set your device to vibrate
You can set your device to vibrate whenever a sound would normally
play. The vibrate option can be turned on even when sounds are off.
156
Chapter 13 : Preferences
Add ringtones to your device
If you pair your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS smartphone, you can
answer calls made to your smartphone directly from your HP TouchPad
(see Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone for
details). You can select a ringtone to ring on your HP TouchPad when a
call comes in.
You can add a file in any of the following file types as a ringtone for your
device: MP3, AAC, AAC+, AMR, QCELP, or WAV. How to use the file as
a ringtone depends on the following: the file type, how you obtain the
file, and whether you want to use the file as a ringtone only, or play it in
the Music app.
You can obtain files to use as ringtones in any of the following ways:
• Download a ringtone from one of the many ringtone apps in HP
webOS App Catalog (see HP webOS App Catalog and Software
Manager).
• Copy a file from your computer (see Copy a ringtone to your device).
To use an AMR or QCELP file as a ringtone, the file must be stored in the
ringtones folder in your device’s USB drive storage. Here’s how to get the
file into the correct folder:
• Files downloaded from App Catalog: The file is placed in the ringtones
folder automatically.
• Files copied from your computer: You must place the file in the ringtones
folder (see Copy a ringtone to your device).
Select a file from the ringtones folder as a ringtone
If you pair your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS smartphone, you can
answer calls made to your smartphone directly from your HP TouchPad
(see Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone for
details). You can select a ringtone to ring on your HP TouchPad when a
call comes in.
1
Open Sounds & Ringtones
.
2
In Ringtone, tap the displayed ringtone to open the list of tones. This
list displays all files stored in the ringtones folder in your device’s
USB drive storage.
3
(Optional) Tap
4
Tap the name of the ringtone to select it.
5
To set the ringtone volume, drag the Ringtone Volume slider.
to listen to the ringtone.
TIP Adjusting the Ringtone Volume slider is the same as using the volume button
on the side of the device.
To use a file in the ringtones folder as a ringtone, see Select a file from the
ringtones folder as a ringtone.
For MP3, AAC, AAC+, and WAV files, you have two options:
Select a song as a ringtone
• To use the file as a ringtone only: Place the file in the ringtones folder
(see Copy a ringtone to your device). If the file is already on your
device, connect your device to your computer as described in that
procedure, navigate to the file, and move the file to the ringtones folder.
If you download a file from a ringtone app in App Catalog, it is
automatically placed in the ringtones folder. To use a file in the
ringtones folder as a ringtone, see Select a file from the ringtones folder
as a ringtone.
• To both use the file as a ringtone and listen to the file in the Music app:
Copy the file to your device and place the file in any folder in your
device’s USB drive storage except ringtones (see Copy files and folders
using USB Drive mode). To use the file as a ringtone, follow the steps in
Select a song as a ringtone.
If you pair your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS smartphone, you can
answer calls made to your smartphone directly from your HP TouchPad
(see Use your HP TouchPad with a connected HP webOS smartphone for
details). You can select a ringtone to ring on your HP TouchPad when a
call comes in.
If you have a song you listen to in the Music app, you can use that song
as the ringtone for your device.
1
Open Sounds & Ringtones
2
Tap the displayed ringtone.
3
Tap
.
.
Chapter 13 : Preferences
157
4
Tap
to the right of a song title to preview it. Tap the song title to
add it to your list of ringtones.
5
When the list of ringtones is displayed, tap the song you added to
use it as your ringtone.
6
To set the ringtone volume, drag the Ringtone Volume slider.
Copy a ringtone to your device
1
Identify a file on your computer to use as a ringtone on your device.
2
Connect your device to your computer using the USB cable.
3
On your device, tap USB Drive. On your computer, your device
appears as a removable drive.
4
Open My Computer (Windows XP), Computer (Windows Vista/
Windows 7), or the Finder (Mac), double-click the drive representing
your device, and drag and drop files to the ringtones folder on your
device.
5
End the connection safely. If you do not eject safely, your device
resets when you disconnect the USB cable:
• On a Windows computer, right-click the drive representing your
device and click Eject.
• On a Mac computer, from your desktop, drag the drive
representing your device to the Trash. Trash changes to Eject.
6
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer when the USB Drive
screen is no longer displayed on your device.
The new file appears in the list of ringtones on your device.
158
Chapter 13 : Preferences
14 Wireless connections
159
162
163
165
166
168
Wi-Fi
Print Manager
VPN
Location Services
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Touch to Share
Wi-Fi
What is a Wi-Fi connection?
Many environments, such as corporate offices, coffee shops, airports, and
libraries, offer access to a Wi-Fi network, which is a wireless local area
network (WLAN). To access this WLAN, you connect your device to the
WLAN through a Wi-Fi access point (also called a hotspot). When you’re
within range of an accessible Wi-Fi network, you can use your device’s
Wi-Fi feature to connect to that network and access the web.
Your device supports Wi-Fi connectivity based on the 802.11 standard
(802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n), with WPA, WPA2, WEP, and
802.1x authentication.
Are there different kinds of Wi-Fi networks?
There are two types of Wi-Fi networks.
Open networks: These networks broadcast their name (SSID) and do not
require you to enter a password or other settings. To learn how to connect
to an open network for the first time, see Connect to a new open network.
Secure networks: These networks may broadcast their name, but at the
very least, they require you to enter a password that you get from an
administrator (who may be, for example, the librarian or the person
behind the counter at the coffee shop). You may also have to get other
network settings from the system administrator. To learn how to connect to
a secure network for the first time, see Connect to a new secure network.
To connect to either type of network after the first time, see Connect to a
previously used network.
Turn Wi-Fi on/off
Wi-Fi is turned on by default. Do one of the following to turn it off or on:
• Open Wi-Fi
, and tap On or Off.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
159
• From any screen: Open the system menu in the upper-right corner of the
screen, tap Wi-Fi, and tap Turn on Wi-Fi or Turn off Wi-Fi.
• If the network you want is not displayed, tap Join network and
enter the network name. Make sure Open is displayed in the
Security field, and then tap Connect.
TIP You can also open Wi-Fi by opening the system menu, tapping Wi-Fi, and
tapping Wi-Fi Preferences.
Connect to a new secure network
For an explanation of secure networks, see Are there different kinds of
Wi-Fi networks?
1
Open Wi-Fi
.
2
Make sure Wi-Fi is on (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).
3
Do one of the following:
• If the network you want is displayed, tap the network name, enter
your Username and/or Password, and tap Sign In. You’re done.
* Tap the icons in this corner, or drag your finger down across the icons.
• If the network you want is not displayed, tap Join network and
enter the network name. Follow steps 4 to 7.
If your device finds the network you want, tap the network name to
connect to it. Otherwise, see Connect to a new open network and
Connect to a new secure network.
Connect to a new open network
For an explanation of open networks, see Are there different kinds of
Wi-Fi networks?
1
Open Wi-Fi
.
2
Make sure Wi-Fi is on (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).
3
Do one of the following:
• If the network you want is displayed, tap the network name.
160
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
4
Tap the Security field, and then tap the network type: Open,
WPA-personal, WEP, or Enterprise.
5
Tap Connect.
6
A series of different screens appears depending on the network
type. Enter or select the following if you are prompted to do so:
2
• Username and/or Password
Trust Certificate: Connects you to the captive portal page
automatically whenever you connect to this Wi-Fi access point.
• Certificate
7
Trust Certificate Once: Connects you to the captive portal page for
this session only. The next time you try to connect to this Wi-Fi access
point, you will be asked to trust this certificate again.
Tap Sign In.
Connect to a previously used network
• If Wi-Fi is turned off, turn on Wi-Fi (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off). Your device
automatically attempts to connect to a previously used network, starting
with the most recently used network.
• If you move to a new location and Wi-Fi is turned on, your device
automatically attempts to connect to a previously used network if one is
discovered at the new location. If more than one previously used
network is discovered, the device starts with the most recently used
network.
• If you are connected to one network and want to use a different one,
open Wi-Fi
and open the application menu. Tap Stored Profiles and
tap another network name.
If required, review the security certificate notices and tap one of the
following:
Don’t Trust Certificate: Cancels the connection.
3
Your Wi-Fi host may require you to view advertisements, pay a fee,
or accept conditions of use. Follow the instructions onscreen.
Disconnect from a network
Connect to a captive portal
When you disconnect from a network, you can keep it on your list of
known networks so that your device can automatically connect to it again.
If you remove the network from your list of known networks, however, you
must reconnect to the network. Follow the steps in Connect to a new open
network or Connect to a new secure network to connect to the network
again.
When connecting to some Wi-Fi access points, such as in a coffee shop,
a hotel, or an airport, the notification for a captive portal sometimes
appears. This means that to connect to this Wi-Fi access point, you must
first go to a special Internet page, known as a captive portal, before you
can connect to the Internet. A captive portal might be used by your Wi-Fi
host for authentication or for payment to access the Internet.
• To disconnect from a network but keep it on your list of known networks:
Turn off Wi-Fi (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off). This disconnects you from the
network.
• To disconnect from a network and remove it from your list of known
networks: Open Wi-Fi
. Tap the network name, and then tap Forget
Network.
To connect to a captive portal:
1
Tap
at the top of the screen and then tap the notification Captive
Portal Detected on WiFi.
Put Wi-Fi to sleep when the screen is off
By default, your device keeps its Wi-Fi connection active even when the
screen is dark. If, however, you find that a Wi-Fi connection is constantly,
unnecessarily waking up your device, you can save battery power by
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
161
turning off this setting. When you turn the screen on again, the Wi-Fi
connection is reactivated.
5
1
Open Wi-Fi
Print Manager
2
Open the application menu and tap Sleep Settings.
3
The current setting is displayed in the When Phone Sleeps field. To
change the setting, tap the current setting and then select the other
option from the displayed list.
.
Customize connection settings
Do not change Wi-Fi settings unless you are having trouble with your
network connection.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must be connected to the network you want to
customize (see Connect to a new open network, Connect to a new secure
network, or Connect to a previously used network).
.
Add a printer
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device supports printing on all network-capable
HP printers that support PCL page description language in the local LAN.
These printers include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart,
Officejet, and LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years
old or newer. Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your
device and the printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless
network. For personal printers, see the instructions that came with your
printer for information about setting up a printer on a wireless network.
Your device detects most HP printers that are connected to a wireless
network automatically. Some HP wireless-enabled printers or
wireless-enabled printers on a corporate network, however, may need to
be added manually to your device.
1
Open Wi-Fi
2
Tap the network name.
1
Open Print Manager
3
In Automatic IP settings, tap On or Off.
2
Tap Add or remove printer.
• When Automatic IP settings is on, the IP address is automatically
and dynamically configured.
3
Tap Enter Printer IP Address and enter the printer’s IP address.
4
(Optional) Tap Name Printer and enter a name for the printer. If you
do not enter a name, the printer’s IP address is used as the default
name.
5
Tap Add Printer.
• When Automatic IP settings is off, you can manually configure the
IP address.
4
If you turned Automatic IP settings off, enter any of the following:
Address: The IP address of the network
Subnet: The Subnet address of the network
Gateway: The Gateway address of the network
DNS Servers: Addresses (#1 and #2)
162
Tap Done.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
.
You can print emails (see Print an email), pictures (see Print pictures), web
pages (see Print a web page), Word documents or PowerPoint
presentations (see Print a Word document or PowerPoint presentation),
and PDF files (see Print a PDF file).
Cancel printing
1
Open Print Manager
2
Do one of the following:
.
• Your company’s wireless LAN is inside the firewall, but you are
accessing the network from outside the firewall (for example, from a
public location or at home).
Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is
required for accessing the corporate network.
• To cancel a single print job: Tap the print job under Print Queue.
• To cancel all your print jobs: Tap Cancel All.
TIP Being connected to VPN may sometimes interfere with web browsing. If you
are having problems browsing in Web, disconnect VPN (see Disconnect from a
profile) and then try using Web again.
Remove a printer
Your device does not need to be connected to a wireless network to
remove a printer that you had set up to print on that network.
Add a VPNC VPN profile
1
Open Print Manager
VPNC is a Cisco-compatible IPSEC client.
2
Tap Add or remove printer.
3
Tap the network name listed under the Add Printer button and select
the network that the printer you want to remove is associated with.
• Profile name
Tap Remove beside the printer you want to remove, and then tap
Yes.
• Username and password
4
.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get the following information from your system
administrator:
• VPN server
• Group ID
• Group secret
VPN
What is VPN?
If you want to use your device to access files on your company’s servers,
you may need to set up a VPN (virtual private network). You can do this
using the VPN application. VPN enables you to log in to your corporate
server through the company’s firewall (security layer). You need to set up
a VPN to access a corporate server in any of the following situations:
• Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is outside the
firewall.
• Domain
• Dead peer detection setting: When selected, if no VPN traffic is
received for five minutes, the client checks to see if the VPN server is
still available.
• Encryption method: Secure, Weak, None: Secure forces the client to
use more secure AES or 3DES algorithms. Weak allows the weaker
1DES algorithm. Strong encryption may still be used, depending on
what the VPN server decides. None enables no encryption. Encryption
is not disabled and may still be used, depending on the VPN server.
With the None option, the VPN profile is simply allowed to use no
encryption.
• NAT traversal method: Cisco-UDP, NAT-T (always), NAT-T (auto-detect),
or Disabled
1
Open VPN
.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
163
2
Tap Add Profile.
8
3
If VPNC is not selected already in the Connection Type field, tap the
Connection Type field, and tap VPNC.
If required, enter your security token or other password, and tap
Done.
9
4
Tap the VPN Server field and enter the server name.
Tap Continue to acknowledge that you are accessing a private
network.
5
Tap Next.
6
Enter the information you got from your system administrator.
7
Tap Connect.
8
If required, enter your security token or other password, and tap
Done.
9
Tap Continue to acknowledge that you are accessing a private
network.
Connect to a profile
1
Do one of the following:
• Open VPN
, and tap a profile.
• From any screen, open the system menu, tap VPN, and tap a
profile.
2
Tap Continue to acknowledge that you are accessing a private
network.
Add a Cisco AnyConnect VPN profile
View statistics for a connected profile
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Get the following information from your system
1
Open VPN
2
Tap
administrator:
• VPN server name
.
beside a connected profile.
• Username and password
• Security token or other password
164
.
Disconnect from a profile
1
Open VPN
2
Tap Add Profile.
3
Tap the Connection Type field, and tap Cisco AnyConnect.
4
Tap the VPN Server field and enter the server name.
5
Tap Next.
Edit a profile
6
If required, tap Accept to accept the Cisco license agreement. Tap
to view the full agreement.
1
7
Enter your login information, and tap Connect.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
Do one of the following:
• Open VPN
, and tap a connected profile.
• From any screen, open the system menu, tap VPN, and tap a connected
profile.
Do one of the following:
• Open VPN
.
• From any screen, open the system menu and tap VPN, and then
tap VPN Preferences.
2
Tap
beside the profile you want to edit, and tap
Profile Details.
3
Tap a setting to edit it.
4
Tap Done.
2
You can set Location Services to always ask your permission to send
your location to a website when the site requests this information or
you can set it to never share your location with any website. The
current setting is displayed in the For Websites field. To change the
setting, tap the current setting and then select another option from
the displayed list.
3
To clear all location data currently in use by websites, tap Clear My
Location Data, and then tap Clear.
to open
Delete a profile
Manage location information passed to applications
1
Open VPN
.
2
Do one of the following:
• Throw the profile off the side of the screen and tap Delete.
• Tap
beside the profile you want to delete and tap Delete
Profile.
An application might request your current location so it can provide you
with information that is relevant to where you are. For example, Maps
might use your current location to provide driving directions to a
destination.
1
Open Location Services
.
2
Select one of the following in the For Applications field:
Always Ask: Applications display a request to identify your location.
You choose whether to allow this for the current session only.
Location Services
Auto Locate: Applications can automatically identify your location.
The Location Services application allows you to control the sending of
information about your location to websites and applications that request
it.
3
Manage location information passed to websites
A website might request your current location so it can provide you with
information that is relevant to where you are. For example, a weather site
might require your location so it can let you know the weather forecast for
your area.
1
Open Location Services
.
(Optional) Tap On to switch Background Data Collection from On to
Off. Background Data Collection is available only when Google
Services is on (see Turn Google Services on/off). When Background
Data Collection is on, anonymous location data is collected from
your device. This data is used to improve the quality of location
services.
Turn Google Services on/off
Google Services must be turned on for Location Services to be enabled.
1
Open Location Services
.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
165
2
Open the application menu, tap Locate Me Using, and tap Google
Services.
Make a pairing request to another device
Google Services uses Wi-Fi access points to approximate your
location.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN The other device must be discoverable in order to
appear on your tablet’s Devices list. Check the documentation that came
with the other device for information on making it discoverable.
The first time you turn on Google Services you may be asked to
review and accept the terms of use, and decide whether to allow
anonymous data collection. Do the following:
You can make a pairing request to a Bluetooth audio device such as a
headset, car kit, or A2DP (stereo Bluetooth) device, or to a webOS
smartphone or Bluetooth-enabled keyboard.
• Review the terms of use.
• If you decide not to allow anonymous data collection, tap the
checkmark to remove it.
• Tap Agree or Don’t Agree.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
If you have a webOS smartphone that uses a different HP webOS
Account than the one used on your device, you can use the following
procedure to pair with it. When you have paired and connected with the
smartphone (see Connect with a paired device), you can manage phone
calls and, on compatible smartphones, text messages on your device. If
you have an HP webOS smartphone that shares an HP webOS Account
with your device, you can use Touch to Share to pair it with your device
(see What is Touch to Share?).
1
Open Bluetooth
.
What is Bluetooth® wireless technology?
With the Bluetooth® wireless technology on your device, you can connect
to a number of Bluetooth devices, including a hands-free device such as a
headset (see Set up and use a Bluetooth® hands-free device).
Before you can connect to another Bluetooth device, you need to pair with
that device. You can make the pairing request from your device (see Make
a pairing request to another device) or use Touch to share to pair with a
webOS smartphone (see What is Touch to Share?).
Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off
Do one of the following:
• Open Bluetooth
, and tap On or Off.
• From any screen: Open the system menu, tap Bluetooth, and tap Turn
on Bluetooth or Turn off Bluetooth.
166
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
TIP You can also open the Bluetooth app by opening the system menu, tapping
Bluetooth, and tapping Bluetooth Preferences.
2
Make sure Bluetooth is on (see Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off).
3
Tap Add device.
4
Tap the Type field, and tap Audio, webOS Phone, Keyboard, or
Other to filter the list of discoverable Bluetooth devices.
5
Tap a device name.
6
If a passkey is not required, pairing is complete when the Devices list
appears. If required, tap Allow on the other device to complete the
pairing. If a passkey is required, do one of the following.
Auto-Connect: Allows paired devices to reconnect automatically
when they are within range and a phone call or text message is
received.
• An automatically generated passkey appears on the passkey
screen: Check the other device screen to verify that the passkey is
correct, and tap Yes, connect to connect.
Receive Phone Calls: Allows you to make and receive phone calls on
both devices.
Receive SMS: Allows you to send and receive text messages on both
devices. This is available on compatible webOS smartphones only.
• The screen displays a passkey generated by your tablet: Enter the
displayed passkey on the other device.
• The screen prompts you to enter a passkey: Check the
documentation that came with the other device to see if there’s a
required passkey. If so, enter that passkey on your tablet. If not,
make up a passkey and enter it on both devices.
Connect with a paired device
After you pair with a device, you can connect to that device without
having to go through the pairing process again.
1
Open Bluetooth
2
Make sure Bluetooth is on (see Turn the Bluetooth feature on/off)
and tap the device name.
Disconnect from a device
Disconnecting from a device does not mean you delete the relationship
you created between that device and your tablet. See Connect with a
paired device for instructions on how to reconnect with the device.
1
Open Bluetooth
2
Tap the connected device name to disconnect from it. Or tap
another device name to disconnect from the current device and
connect to the new device.
3
Tap OK.
.
NOTE To connect with a paired computer, you must initiate the connection from
the computer. See the computer documentation for instructions.
Manage webOS smartphone connection preferences
1
Open Bluetooth
.
2
Tap
3
Tap On/Off for any of the following:
beside the smartphone name.
.
Delete a device
Deleting a device means you end the relationship you created between
your device and that device. This means that you will need to pair with
that device again if you want to connect (see Make a pairing request to
another device). If all you want to do is temporarily disconnect from a
device, see Disconnect from a device.
1
Open Bluetooth
.
2
Throw the name off the side of the screen and tap Delete.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
167
Rename a device
1
Open Bluetooth
2
Tap and hold the device name.
3
Enter a new name.
4
Tap outside the device name field to save your changes.
1
Make sure Bluetooth is turned on on your device (see Turn the
Bluetooth feature on/off) and on your smartphone (see the
documentation that came with your smartphone).
2
Touch the smartphone to your device, with the HP logo on the back
of the smartphone touching the area of the Center
button on
your device.
.
A ripple is displayed on the device screen to indicate that the
smartphone has been placed correctly, and a notification appears
on both devices to indicate that the pairing was successful.
Touch to Share
What is Touch to Share?
The devices remain paired while in range (approximately 30 feet (10
meters)). If the devices move out of range of each other, provided the
relationship between the two devices has not been deleted (see
Delete a device), they reconnect automatically upon receiving a
phone call or text message when they are back within range.
Touch to Share lets you easily transfer web pages between your HP
TouchPad and an HP webOS smartphone. If you have a web page open
on your HP TouchPad or on a webOS smartphone, simply touch the
devices to transfer the page from one device to the other.
When you set up a Touch to Share relationship with a webOS
smartphone, you can manage the connection preferences from the
Bluetooth app (see Manage webOS smartphone connection
preferences).
What’s more, if you have a compatible webOS smartphone that shares
an HP webOS Account with your device, you can use Touch to Share to
pair it with your device, allowing you to share calls, and, on some
smartphones, text messages between your device and your smartphone. If
you receive a phone call or text message, it appears on your device, and
if you want to make a phone call or send a text message, you can do that
from your device.
If your device and webOS smartphone do not share an HP webOS
Account, you can still pair them and you can manage phone calls and,
on compatible smartphones, text messages on your device (see Make a
pairing request to another device).
Share a web page using Touch to Share
1
Make sure Bluetooth is turned on on your device (see Turn the
Bluetooth feature on/off) and on your smartphone (see the
documentation that came with your smartphone).
2
Open Web
smartphone.
3
Tap the smartphone to the Center
and open a web page that you want to send to your
button of the device.
The web page opens in full screen on the smartphone.
Pair with an HP webOS smartphone using Touch to Share
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Your device must be connected to a Wi-Fi network to
use Touch to Share (see Connect to a new open network or Connect to a
new secure network).
168
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
You can also share a web page you open on your smartphone with your
device. This is useful when you want to view the web page on a larger
screen. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, except open the web page on your
smartphone, then Touch to Share it on your device.
Disconnect a Touch to Share connection
1
Open Bluetooth
.
2
Tap the webOS smartphone name to disconnect from it.
Delete a Touch to Share connection
1
Open Bluetooth
.
2
Throw the webOS smartphone name off the side of the screen and
tap Delete.
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
169
170
Chapter 14 : Wireless connections
15 Troubleshooting
171
173
176
177
178
179
181
181
182
183
186
187
187
190
191
191
192
193
194
5Ts: Ways to get your HP TouchPad working again
HP webOS Account
Battery
Screen and performance
Synchronization
Email
Messaging
Wi-Fi
Web
Calendar and Contacts
Photos & Videos, and Music
Print Manager
HP webOS App Catalog
Using your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS smartphone
Transferring information to and from your computer
Backing up and restoring data
System Updates
Hands-free devices
Making room on your device
5Ts: Ways to get your HP TouchPad working
again
Introduction
Is your HP TouchPad not working the way you expect it to? Has it stopped
responding to taps? Is one of your applications not responding or
behaving in an unexpected way?
These problems can be pretty easy to fix.
Here are five different methods—5Ts—that you can try, on your own, to
get your device working again.
Try each method in the order it’s presented to see if it solves your
problem. When the problem is solved, stop.
T1. Throw all open applications off the top of the screen
NOTE If the screen is off and you can’t turn it on, or if gestures don’t work, skip
to T3.Trigger a restart.
1
If you’re working in an application that’s displayed full-screen and it
isn’t responding, press Center
to send the app to Card view.
2
Throw the app off the top of the screen to close it.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
171
T3.Trigger a restart
1
Press and hold the power button.
2
While still holding down the power button, press and hold
Center
until the HP logo appears (about 15 seconds).
Why this might help
3
Throw any other open applications off the top of the screen to close
them.
A restart may be effective if the screen is off and you can’t turn it on, or if
the screen is on but doesn’t respond to taps or other gestures.
Why this might help
NOTE Because open applications are forced to close immediately during this
kind of restart, some unsaved data may be lost.
One or more of your open applications could be reserving so much
memory that there’s not enough memory left to do real work. Closing
apps can free up enough memory so you can continue working.
TIP An occasional restart can be good for your device just the way a restart can
be good for your computer. Every once in a while, restart your device.
T2. Turn your device completely off and on
T4. Top off the battery
NOTE If the screen is off and you can’t turn it on, or if gestures don’t work, skip
to T3.Trigger a restart.
1
Press and hold the power button.
2
Tap Shut Down.
3
To turn your device back on, press and hold the power button until
the HP logo appears.
1
Connect your USB cable to the AC charger and to your device.
2
Plug the AC charger into a working electric outlet.
3
Let the battery charge completely.
Why this might help
Shutting down your device closes all applications, frees up all memory,
and reinitializes wireless services (Bluetooth® technology, Wi-Fi, and
VPN). A fresh start.
172
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
Why this might help
Fully charging the battery ensures your device is not conserving power
due to a low battery.
NOTE If you use an HP Touchstone, be sure to complete T4 using the USB cable
and the AC charger, not the Touchstone. Connecting directly to an outlet is more
effective in waking a device.
T5. Tether your device to your computer and reinstall webOS
HP webOS Account
Creating your HP webOS Account: Is your device ready for
setup?
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Did you remove the clear plastic screen protector? Your
device won’t respond well to your taps if the protector is covering the
touchscreen.
Look along the top of the screen from left to right:
Do you see:
IMPORTANT Don’t try this method until you’ve already tried the four Ts before
this.
1
The Wi-Fi icon showing white bars (not gray)?
No? Then turn Wi-Fi on and connect to a network (see Wi-Fi).
1
On your computer’s web browser, go to hpwebos.com/account,
sign in, and write down the device’s product number and serial
number.
2
Go to hpwebos.com/rom and click the link to get webOS Doctor.
3
Enter the device’s product number and serial number and follow the
instructions.
2
A battery icon that is green or at least one-third white?
No? Then charge your device: Plug the USB cable into the AC
charger, plug the charger into an electric outlet, and attach the small
end of the cable to the charger/microUSB connector on your device.
Charge the device for at least one hour.
Why this might help
If you answered Yes to all these questions and still can’t set up your
account, read the next sections.
Installing the latest version of webOS wipes and refreshes all memory.
Your preferences, installed software, and files in USB drive storage are not
affected.
Creating your HP webOS Account: Are you trying to use an
account from another webOS device?
Want help while you use webOS Doctor? Go to hpwebos.com/support.
Select your device and click Support Services. Select one of the support
options.
When you set up your device, did you tap Sign In on the HP webOS
Account screen? Tap the Sign In button only if you can answer Yes to
these questions:
• Did you create a valid HP webOS Account on another webOS device
in the past?
• Do you want to use that same HP webOS Account again on your new
webOS device?
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
173
If you answered No to those questions, do this:
• Swipe left on the screen until you see the HP webOS Account screen
again. Then tap Create New Account.
If you answered Yes to the questions, do this:
3
• If you forgot the account password, tap Forgot Login? Enter the answer
to your security question and tap Done. Create a new password and
tap Done.
If that doesn’t work, do this:
• For help on setting up your old account on your new device, go to
hpwebos.com/support. Select your device and click Support Services.
Select one of the support options.
• Enter the full address, for example: yourname@emailaccount.com.
• Enter the address accurately, with an @ sign and a period, and
the appropriate domain type at the end (com, net, and so on).
4
• To type a symbol that appears on a number key on the keyboard:
Tap Shift
and then the key (see Enter symbols and alternate
characters).
To create an HP webOS Account, do the following:
174
During setup, tap Create New Account.
2
Tap the field labeled First and Last Name and enter your first and
last name.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
Create a password for your account. It must be between 6 and 20
characters long. You must enter it exactly the same way in the
Password and Confirm Password fields. Note the following:
• This password can be anything you want. You do not need to
enter the password associated with the email address you entered.
Creating your HP webOS Account: Are you having trouble
creating a new account?
1
Tap the Email field and enter a valid email address. Enter the same
email address in the Confirm Email field. Note the following:
• To enter an accented character or a symbol that doesn’t appear
on the keyboard: Tap
to open the symbol keyboard, and
tap the symbol. If the symbol you want is not displayed, tap
to return to the alphanumeric keyboard, and then tap and hold a
key to see the symbols associated with that key. When you see the
symbol you want, tap it. For a complete list of the symbols
associated with each key, see Symbols and accented characters.
5
Tap the question displayed in the Security Question field, and select
a security question. Tap the Answer field and enter the answer.
6
Tap Create.
Creating your HP webOS Account: Unable to complete? Try
this
To start setup over from the beginning, tap Start Over in the lower-left
corner of any screen.
If your device stops responding to taps, restart your device and begin
again by doing this:
1
Press and hold the power button until you see two buttons—Turn Off
and Cancel.
2
Tap Turn Off. Wait for the device to shut down completely.
2
Click Forgot password?
3
Enter the email address you used to create your HP webOS Account
and click Next.
4
Enter the answer to your security question and click Next.
5
Enter your new password twice.
6
(Optional) Click Change Security Question, select a security
question, and enter your answer.
7
Click Reset Password.
If you never verified your account or didn’t create a security question, the
process is a little different. Do this:
3
Press and hold the power button and begin setup again.
If you are unable to create an account, check the status of the webOS
server: Go to hpwebos.com/support. Select your device and click
Support Services. Select one of the support options. There may be a
temporary outage affecting your area.
1
Go to hpwebos.com/account, select your device, and then click
Manage HP webOS Account.
2
Click Forgot password?
3
Enter the email address you used to create your HP webOS Account
and click Next.
4
Type the text you see in the white box and click Send Email.
5
Open your email program on your computer, and open the email
with the subject How to reset your security information.
6
Click the link in the email.
7
Enter your new password twice.
8
(Optional) Click Change Security Question, select a security
question, and enter your answer.
9
Click Reset Password.
Having trouble logging in to your HP webOS Account?
Remember, to log in to your HP webOS Account, you must enter the same
email address and password you used to create the account.
TIP After you create your HP webOS Account, you get an email at the address
you used to create the account. Click the link in the email message to verify your
account.
If you verified your account when you created it, do this:
1
Go to hpwebos.com/account, select your device, and then click
Manage HP webOS Account.
If that doesn’t work, or if you can’t remember your security question and
answer, get help on gaining access to your account: Go to
hpwebos.com/support. Select your device and click Support Services.
Select one of the support options.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
175
Battery
WARNING Never remove the back cover of your HP TouchPad. The battery is
built in to your device and is not removable.
The battery drains quickly
If the battery seems to drain quickly from normal use, see Maximizing
battery life for tips on improving battery life.
• Make sure the AC charger is securely inserted into a working outlet. Try
a different outlet if one is available.
• Try a different compatible USB cable if one is available.
If you still experience problems and you frequently leave the Wi-Fi feature
on even when you are not using the device, change the sleep setting for
Wi-Fi. See Put Wi-Fi to sleep when the screen is off for instructions.
If you are trying to charge the battery using an HP Touchstone, try these
steps in sequence:
The battery doesn’t charge or doesn’t hold a charge
• Make sure your device is correctly positioned on the Touchstone. If the
HP TouchPad is correctly positioned, a “Charging Battery” notification
appears, and a lightning bolt appears on the battery icon in the
upper-right corner of the screen.
• Make sure the USB cable is securely connected to the AC charger.
If you are trying to charge the battery using the USB cable, try these steps
in sequence:
NOTE The Touchstone does not work when it is connected to a computer.
• Make sure you are using the USB cable and AC charger that came with
your HP TouchPad, or a compatible cable or charger approved by HP.
NOTE Your HP TouchPad does not charge if you connect it to a computer using
the USB cable.
• Make sure the small end of the cable is securely attached to the
charger/microUSB connector on your device. Make sure the other end
is securely connected to the AC charger.
• Make sure the AC charger is securely inserted into a working outlet.
• If the outlet is connected to a light switch or power strip, make sure the
power is on.
• Try a different outlet if one is available.
• Restart your device (see Restart your device).
I need to replace the battery
WARNING Never remove the back cover of your HP TouchPad. The battery is
built in to your device and is not removable.
176
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
Contact HP to get your device repaired. Within the warranty period, your
battery should not need replacing. With good treatment, your battery is
likely to last for a couple of years. See Maximizing battery life for helpful
tips.
7
Screen and performance
An application is not responding to taps
The screen appears blank
When the device is on and idle, the screen first dims and then turns off.
This is normal behavior, caused by the auto shut-off interval. You can
adjust this auto shut-off interval to be as long as 10 minutes (see Set the
interval for turning the screen off automatically). At first, the screen dims
as a power-saving measure. Just tap the screen to brighten it. Then, if your
device remains inactive for the full interval you set, the screen turns itself
off. Press the power button to turn the screen back on.
Follow these steps in sequence if you can’t turn the screen back on:
1
Make sure you have removed the protective cover that came
attached to your device screen.
2
Make sure that there are no stickers covering any part of the front of
the device.
3
To brighten the screen if it has dimmed, tap the screen.
4
To turn on the screen, do one of the following:
• Press the power button. Drag
• Press Center
1
Make sure you have removed the screen protector that came
attached to your device screen.
2
Check to see if the screen has any cracks. If it does, contact Support
for further assistance: Go to hpwebos.com/support. Select your
device and click Support Services. Select one of the support options.
3
Make sure the screen is not locked. Press the power button and drag
up to unlock the screen.
4
Press Center
. If the application screen minimizes to a card,
throw the card off the top of the screen to close the app.
5
If the screen does not respond to taps at all, press and hold both the
power button and Center
for 15 seconds to restart your device.
Then wait until your device completes startup.
6
If this does not solve the problem, see 5Ts: Ways to get your HP
TouchPad working again for additional steps to try.
Applications are running slowly
up to unlock the screen.
NOTE Be sure that any third-party applications you install are compatible with
HP webOS and HP TouchPad tablets. Applications written for earlier Palm
devices using the Palm OS by ACCESS operating system or Windows Mobile
are not compatible with your HP TouchPad. If you can try a free version of the
software before purchasing it, you can test it first to make sure it works properly.
.
5
Look closely at the screen. If the display appears but is faint, try
adjusting the screen brightness (see Turn auto dim on/off).
6
If the problem persists, connect your device to the AC charger (see
Charge the battery). If you see a faint display, try to restart your
device (see Restart your device).
If you don’t see a display or the screen doesn’t respond to taps,
press and hold both the power button and Center
for 15
seconds to restart your device. Then wait until your device completes
startup.
1
Press Center
to display Card view.
2
Scroll through the cards and note how many applications are open.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
177
3
Close any application you are not using by throwing its card off the
top of the screen.
If the problem persists after you close apps you are not using, restart your
device (see Restart your device). If this does not solve the problem, see
5Ts: Ways to get your HP TouchPad working again for additional steps to
try.
There are small icons at the top of the screen
Your device screen always displays the time and battery icon in the top
right corner.
To the left of these are system icons, showing network connection status,
wireless services that are turned on, and so on.
To the left of these are notification icons. These icons represent
notifications that you have not opened or dismissed. If you see one or
more notification icons, tap or drag down over the icons to display your
notifications (see View and work with notifications).
Synchronization
I don’t want to sync calendar or contact information with my
online account—just email
For most online account providers that sync with more than one app—for
example, Google—if you do not want to sync an application with that
provider’s online account, you can remove that application from the
account using the Accounts application. The online account continues to
sync with any other related applications.
178
1
Open Accounts
.
2
Tap the account name.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
3
To change which applications are associated with the account: For
each app listed, tap On or Off.
You can also remove an application from online account sync from within
the application itself.
1
Open the application.
2
Open the application menu and tap Preferences & Accounts.
3
Tap the account name.
4
Tap Remove Account, and then tap Remove [app name] Account.
I want to sync with Outlook or Palm Desktop by ACCESS
software on my computer
Your HP TouchPad can synchronize with select online services so that you
can store and sync your info in online accounts (see Manage online
accounts). You can access your data even when you are not able to make
a connection to the web because your data is stored on your device.
If you want to continue using a desktop organizer to store your contacts
and calendar events—iCal and Address Book on the Mac, or desktop
Outlook® or Palm Desktop by ACCESS on Windows—and if there are
third-party solutions available for your device, you may have two choices:
• Sync directly with your desktop organizer, avoiding the web completely.
• Sync your desktop organizer with Google on the web, and then sync
Google with your device.
Both choices require you to use a third-party solution (sold separately). Go
to hpwebos.com/sync-solutions to see if third--party solutions are
available for your device. If there are no solutions available for your
device, check with the developers of existing sync software for other
webOS devices to see if they are developing a solution for your device.
For more information, see Sync your desktop organizer and your device.
I have an Exchange account at work, but my data is not
being downloaded to my device
Check with your system administrator to obtain or verify the name of the
mail server that offers you wireless access to the corporate mail system.
If you cannot obtain the name of this server (some companies do not give
it out because they do not want wireless access to their servers), you
cannot synchronize with your Exchange account.
If your company requires you to change your password for accessing your
Exchange account, you must change the password on your device (see
Change account login settings).
I entered the settings to sync with Exchange, but I can’t
synchronize with my company’s Exchange server
If the problem persists, see Making room on your device for other
suggestions.
A notification tells me that the server could not be reached
Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
If you have a network connection and receive this notification, it means
your device had to wait too long to connect to the Exchange server. The
connection may have been lost, the server may be temporarily
overloaded, or the server may have encountered an internal error. Check
your Exchange server name and proxy server settings (see Set up email:
Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes), and try again later.
Check with your system administrator to find out if a systemwide locking
policy is in place.
A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem
with [item type] [item name]
A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem
on the server
There was an error while synchronizing a single item. This error can
usually be corrected only by deleting the item that caused the error. If you
sync again to see if the error persists, be aware that items causing this
type of error are skipped and do not show up again.
There is a temporary problem with the server, or the server may be
temporarily overloaded. Try again later, and if the problem persists,
contact your system administrator.
A notification tells me that there is not enough free memory to
synchronize
1
Press Center
to display Card view.
2
Scroll through the cards and note how many applications are open.
3
Close any application you are not using by throwing its card off the
top of the screen.
Email
I have problems using my account
Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after
you set it up. If you followed the account setup procedure (see Set up
email) and are experiencing problems using the account, verify that the
account complies with your email provider’s requirements:
• Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
179
• If you changed your password in an online email account, you must
change the password on your device (see Change account login
settings).
• Make sure your email provider or ISP allows you to access email on a
device via POP or IMAP. (Some providers do not offer this option at all;
other providers require an upgrade for you to access email on a
device.)
• Email provider settings may change. If your email account was working
but you are currently experiencing problems, check with your email
provider to find out whether any of the account settings have changed.
You may need to manually change some email settings on your device
(see Enter advanced account settings).
I have problems sending and receiving email
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
• For problems sending and receiving email using an Exchange email
account, see the following sections:
• I have an Exchange account at work, but my data is not being
downloaded to my device
• I entered the settings to sync with Exchange, but I can’t
synchronize with my company’s Exchange server
• A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem on
the server
I can send but not receive email (IMAP accounts)
Some IMAP email providers don’t support the setting to receive email As
items arrive. Check with your email provider to see if this situation applies
to your account. If your device is set to receive email as it arrives, try
changing the Sync setting for Get Email to 5 or 10 minutes (see Enter
advanced account settings).
After I receive messages, older messages disappear from my
Inbox
When email sync takes place, by default, the last three days’ worth of
email messages is downloaded from your mail server to your Inbox. All
messages older than three days are removed from your Inbox; they are
not deleted on the server, however.
I have problems sending email (IMAP and POP accounts)
You can change the setting to download only one or two days’ worth of
messages. If you select one of these options, any messages older than
one or two days are deleted from your Inbox. You can also change the
setting to download all messages regardless of the date, in which case all
messages continue to appear in your Inbox (see Enter advanced account
settings).
If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try the
following:
I have trouble sending or receiving attachments
• A notification tells me that ActiveSync encountered a problem with
[item type] [item name]
• Turn on authentication (see Set up email when automatic setup fails).
Many service providers require authenticated access, or ESMTP, to use
their SMTP servers for outgoing mail.
• Confirm the port number for the outgoing mail server. Many ISPs require
a specific port number, and that number may differ from the default port
number.
180
• Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail (see
Set up email when automatic setup fails). Many ISPs, such as cable
companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their
network to send email through their servers. In this case, you can almost
always receive email from these accounts, but if you want to send
email, you must send it through another server. Check with your email
service provider for the correct outgoing mail server name.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
• Email attachments smaller than 150KB are downloaded automatically.
All other attachments have to be downloaded manually by tapping the
attachment name in the email. You may need to tap the attachment to
complete receiving it.
• Sometimes an attachment to an email may prevent the email from being
sent. The reason may be related to the account, an account setting, or
the file. To determine whether this is the case, try sending the email
without the attachment, or try sending the email from a different email
account. If a different account works, check the settings of the problem
account. If sending the email without the attachment works, also check
the account settings, and try sending the email with another file, in case
the first file was damaged.
Messaging
I can’t send or receive text messages
• To use text messaging on your device, you must be connected to a
compatible HP webOS smartphone (see Use your HP TouchPad with a
connected HP webOS smartphone).
• If possible, contact the recipient of the message, and make sure the
receiving device can handle the type of message you’re sending.
• If a message arrives but does not display a notification, make sure
message notifications are turned on (see Customize messaging
notifications).
I can’t send or receive multimedia messages
You can’t send or receive multimedia messages on your HP TouchPad. If
you receive a multimedia message on a connected webOS smartphone, a
notification appears on your HP TouchPad. You must view the message on
the smartphone, however.
I can’t set up an instant messaging (IM) account
• To set up an IM account on your device, you must already have the IM
account established online. If you don’t, first set up the account online.
• If you are logged into the account from another location, log out from
that location and try setting up the account on your device again.
• If you are trying to set up a Yahoo! IM account, note that you can have
only one Yahoo! IM account on your device at a time. If you already
have a Yahoo IM! account on your device, you must remove it before
you can set up a different one (see Use the Accounts application to edit
or delete an online account).
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
• Verify you have an Internet connection by going to a website (see Go to
a website or Search the web).
• Make sure the account you want to set up is supported. See Set up an
instant messaging (IM) account for information. If the account you want
is not listed, or is not available in HP webOS App Catalog when you
tap Find More, the account is not available at this time. Be sure to check
back—your webOS device periodically adds support for new account
types.
I can’t send or receive instant messages
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
• Make sure your instant messaging (IM) account is properly set up (see
Set up an instant messaging (IM) account).
• Make sure you are logged into your IM account (see Sign in to an IM
account).
• If a message arrives but does not display a notification, make sure
message notifications are turned on (see Customize messaging
notifications).
• Restart your device (see Restart your device).
Wi-Fi
I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from my home network
• Turn off Wi-Fi, and then turn it on again (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
181
• If the device does not automatically connect to a known network, select
your Wi-Fi network from the list. If the device does not detect your Wi-Fi
network, continue to the next step.
• Try connecting to the Wi-Fi network with another computer or device.
• If you cannot connect using the other device, there may be a
problem with your Internet connection or wireless router. Unplug
the modem and the wireless router and reboot the modem. After
the modem re-establishes an Internet connection, plug in the
wireless router and try connecting again. If you still can't connect
with the other device or computer, contact your Internet service
provider.
• If you can connect with the other device, but not with the HP
TouchPad, continue with the next step.
• Does your Wi-Fi network use MAC address filtering? MAC address
filtering is a common method of securing a Wi-Fi network. The filter list
is similar to a guest list at a party; if you’re not on the list, you can't
come in. The filter list (allowing access to your network) lives on your
Wi-Fi router. If your Wi-Fi network uses MAC address filtering, you need
to log in to the Wi-Fi router and add your device’s MAC address to the
access control list. Because each router has a unique method to perform
this task, consult your router documentation for detailed instructions. To
find your device’s MAC address: Open Device Info
and tap More
Info. The MAC address is the Wi-Fi hex number under Device.
• Restart your device (see Restart your device).
• If you can connect with the other device, but not with the HP
TouchPad, continue with the next step.
• Does the Wi-Fi network use MAC address filtering? MAC address
filtering is a common method of securing a Wi-Fi network. The filter list
is similar to a guest list at a party; if you’re not on the list, you can't
come in. The filter list (allowing access to the Wi-Fi network) lives on the
Wi-Fi router. This list is maintained by the system administrator and you
must provide the administrator with your device’s MAC address and
request to be added to the list. To find your device’s MAC address:
Open Device Info
and tap More Info. The MAC address is the Wi-Fi
hex number under Device.
• Restart your device (see Restart your device).
I am trying to connect my device to my Wi-Fi network and
need to find the device’s MAC address
Open Device Info
, tap More Info, and tap Hardware. Under Device,
the number listed to the right of Wi-Fi is your device’s MAC address.
I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from a public or corporate
network
Web
• Turn off Wi-Fi, and then turn it on again (see Turn Wi-Fi on/off).
• If the device does not automatically connect to a known network, do
one of the following:
• Select the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to from the list.
I can’t access a web page
• If you’re trying to connect to a secure network with a hidden
name, ask the system administrator for the info needed to connect
to the network.
• If you’re not trying to connect to a secure network with a hidden
name and there are no Wi-Fi networks detected, there are no
Wi-Fi networks available for the device to connect to. Try moving
to another location and attempting the connection again.
182
• Try connecting to the Wi-Fi network with another computer or device.
• If you cannot connect using the other device, there may be a
problem with the Wi-Fi network’s Internet connection or wireless
router. Report the problem to the system administrator.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar). If you do not have a Wi-Fi network connection, see the topic
that matches your situation:
• I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from my home network
• I can’t make a Wi-Fi connection from a public or corporate
network
• Clear the cache in Web Preferences. Open Web
and open the
application menu. Tap Preferences, and then tap Clear Cache. This
ensures that pages are viewed directly from the Internet and not from a
saved copy of the page on the device. Then close Web
and reopen
it.
• To confirm you have an Internet connection, try to view a web page
you’ve loaded before.
• After confirming your Internet connection, try to view the page again. If
it comes up blank, tap
.
• Some websites redirect simple web addresses given to the public to
actual web addresses that are more complex (for example, if you enter
the address www.hpwebos.com/support, it may actually go to the web
address http://www.hpwebos.com/us/support). If the Web app can’t
follow the redirect, enter the web address in a desktop browser and
read the actual web address in the address bar. Then enter the actual
address in Web at the top of the screen.
• If a website appears static or is missing content, look for a Skip button,
a link to a mobile or tablet version of the site, or a link to a basic HTML
version of the site that your device can render properly.
• If you’re still having trouble, the page may contain elements that are
not supported by the browser, such as Shockwave, Silverlight, VBScript,
WML script, and other plug-ins.
An image or map is too small on my screen
Do either of the following:
• To switch to landscape mode to see more of the image, turn the device
on its side.
• To zoom in on the image, pinch out or double-tap the image.
A secure site refuses to permit a transaction
Some websites don’t support certain browsers for transactions. Contact
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site allows transactions using your
device’s web browser.
Calendar and Contacts
I haven’t entered any contacts or calendar events on my
device, but when I open those apps, I see entries
The entries you see displayed in Calendar or Contacts have been
downloaded to your device from one of your online accounts such as
Google or Exchange. In the Accounts application, as well as in Email,
Calendar, or Contacts, you can set up a relationship to wirelessly sync
data with one of these accounts. When you do so, you specify the apps
that should download data from that account. So, for example, you could
set up your Google account in Email, and choose whether to also
download contacts and calendar events. If you choose to download
Google calendar info, your device’s calendar automatically displays
events entered in your Google calendar—even though you haven’t
opened the app yet.
You can remove an online account from an application so that that app
no longer syncs with that account (see Use the Accounts application to
edit or delete an online account, Delete an online account from Contacts,
Delete an online account from Calendar, or Delete an email account).
My personal and work contact and calendar information is
getting merged into a single view—I’d rather keep them
separate
The HP Synergy feature on your device displays information from several
sources in a single view, so you can access your info quickly, without
having to remember where you stored it. Even though the information is
visible in one view, the sources of that information are kept separate.
In Calendar, to see events from just one calendar, tap Hide All on the right
side of the screen, and then tap the individual account you want to view
on the left (see Change the Calendar display).
In Contacts, the list view shows all contacts from all accounts. You can,
however, see what data comes from which account by opening the
contact and tapping Edit. If you want to unlink contacts, see Unlink a
contact.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
183
You can also keep inbox views separate in Email: Turn off the smart folder
for All Inboxes (see Set email preferences), then make the inboxes of your
individual accounts favorites so that they’re always easy to see in the
Account List panel (see Add an email folder as a favorite).
Some of my contact information is missing
NOTE Contacts associated with a Microsoft Exchange server sync as items
arrive. Items for Google and other online accounts are synced from every few
hours to up to once a day. If the contact is available in your online account, it
will show up on your device within a day, as long as you are have a network
connection. Contacts created in your HP webOS Account are backed up daily.
• Verify that your contact information is correct in your online account.
• If the missing contact is from a Google account, make sure the contact
is in your My Contacts list in Google. If your Google contacts are only
partially synchronizing, check for contact names that start with a special
character (like @,*, or #) instead of a letter. Delete the nonalphabetic
character from the contact’s name. Synchronize again to see if all of
your contacts are listed.
• If the missing contact is from an Exchange account, make sure the email
account is set up as an Exchange account, not a POP or IMAP account.
An Exchange account that is set up as a POP or IMAP account cannot
sync contacts (see Change account login settings).
• If the missing contact is from Facebook, LinkedIn, or Yahoo! note the
following:
• Facebook and LinkedIn contact info comes from the profile of the
Facebook friend or LinkedIn contact. Because Facebook.com and
LinkedIn.com do not allow you to change another user’s profile,
any changes you make on your device do not affect the contact’s
info on the web. When a Facebook friend or LinkedIn contact
makes changes to his or her profile, these changes are transferred
to your device the next time the account syncs.
• Yahoo! accounts support a one-way transfer of Yahoo! contact
info from the web to the device. The info on your device updates
each time the account syncs, but Yahoo! accounts do not provide
two-way synchronization.
184
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
• If you make changes or add to a Facebook, LinkedIn, or Yahoo!
contact entry on your device, the device creates a new contact in
the default Contacts account, adds the changes to this new
contact, and then links the new contact to the original Facebook,
LinkedIn, or Yahoo! contact. The changes sync with the default
Contacts account, not with your Facebook, LinkedIn, or Yahoo!
account.
• Changes made on Facebook.com, LinkedIn.com, or Yahoo.com
are reflected on your device every 24 hours, or after you manually
sync.
• If the missing contact is from a LinkedIn account, make sure the contact
is in your direct network. The device does not sync second- and
third-level connections.
• If the missing contact information is from another account that is
compatible with the HP Synergy feature, you need to contact the
developer for help.
• Sync your Contacts accounts (see Manually synchronize Contacts with
your online accounts).
• Set the default Contacts account (see Customize Contacts).
• Search to locate the contact information (see Find a contact)
• Check other contacts that have the same phone number or email
address to make sure the missing contact information has not been
improperly linked to another contact. If you have contacts with matching
information, tap the contact name at the top of the screen to display
any linked contacts. If you find the missing contact, tap it, and then tap
Unlink this profile. The unlinked contact now appears as a separate
entry in Contacts.
My contact data is in the wrong field
• If your incorrect contact data is being synced from an online account,
update the contact information in your online account. If your incorrect
contact data is being backed up with your HP webOS Account, update
your contact information on your device.
• Manually synchronize Contacts (see Manually synchronize Contacts
with your online accounts).
I have duplicate contacts
• If the duplicate contacts are from the same source—if, for example, both
contacts are Google contacts or both contacts are Exchange contacts—
link the duplicate contacts (see Link a contact).
• Delete one of the duplicate records from the source, such as Google or
Exchange, or delete the duplicate from the device (see Delete a
contact).
• Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts (see
Manually synchronize Contacts with your online accounts).
I started entering a contact’s name in Card view or the
Launcher, but I’m not seeing the person in the results
• With Just Type, you need to enter at least two letters before contact
matches are returned.
• You may need to scroll down the list to find the match you want.
• If you still don’t see the match you want, try typing a few more
characters of the person’s name.
I can’t synchronize Calendar events
Different accounts sync events for different periods of time into the past
and future. Note the following to be sure the information you want to sync
is available for the account:
• Google accounts sync events one month back and two months forward.
• Yahoo! accounts sync events one month back and three months
forward.
• Exchange accounts sync events two weeks back and unlimited forward.
• If you are trying to synchronize with a desktop application using the
USB cable, note that HP webOS does not support synchronization of HP
webOS devices with desktop software such as Palm Desktop software
or desktop Outlook. Instead, webOS devices synchronize wirelessly
with online services such as Google or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
If you are trying to synchronize with a third-party desktop application,
contact the application developer for support.
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
• Set up your online account to sync on your device if you have not
already done so (see How do I get events into Calendar?).
IMPORTANT If you want to add a Google Calendar account on your device,
make sure your Gmail account includes Google Calendar before you add your
Google account on your device. By default, Gmail accounts do not
automatically include Google Calendar. If you don’t already have a Gmail
account, go to mail.google.com and create one. To add Google Calendar to
your Gmail account, go to google.com/calendar and log in using your Gmail
account name and password. When prompted, add Google Calendar to your
account.
• Verify the default calendar account. When a new calendar event is
created on the device, it syncs with the default account (see Customize
Calendar).
• Manually sync Calendar (see Manually synchronize Calendar with your
online accounts).
NOTE You should see a notification at the top of your screen when the account
starts to sync. You may have to wait up to 30 minutes after a sync operation
starts for your data to appear if the data is located in an online account.
• Delete the account on the device, and then re-create it (see Use the
Accounts application to edit or delete an online account and Use the
Accounts application to set up an online account).
Some of my calendar information is missing
• If the missing calendar information is from an Exchange account, make
sure the email account is set up as an Exchange account, not a POP or
IMAP account. An Exchange account that is set up as a POP or IMAP
account cannot sync calendar information (see Change account login
settings).
• Verify that your calendar information is correct in your online account.
• Verify that the calendar information is correct on the device.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
185
• Note the following and determine if the missing information is actually
available for syncing:
• Google accounts sync events one month back and two months
forward.
• Yahoo! accounts sync events one month back and three months
forward.
• Exchange accounts sync events two weeks back and unlimited
forward.
• Sync your Calendar accounts (see Manually synchronize Calendar with
your online accounts).
• Set the default account (see Customize Calendar).
Calendar notifications are not working
• If the event is in an online account, make sure that the event exists in the
online account on your computer, and that a reminder is set for the
event. Note that it can take up to 30 minutes for an event to synchronize
from an online account to your device.
• Make sure an alarm is set for the event in Calendar on your device (see
Add an alarm to an event).
• Make sure that the Event Reminders preference is set to System Sound
(see Customize event notification sounds).
Photos & Videos, and Music
My calendar data is in the wrong field
186
• If your incorrect calendar data is being synced from an online account,
update the calendar information in your online account. If your
incorrect calendar data is being backed up with your HP webOS
Account, update your calendar information on your device.
• Manually synchronize Calendar (see Manually synchronize Calendar
with your online accounts).
• Open Date & Time
and check whether the online account and the
device are using the same time zone setting. If not, change the time
zone either on the device or in the online account so that the time zones
match.
I can’t upload my picture
I have duplicate calendar events
I can’t send or upload my video
• If the events are from an online account, delete the account from your
device (see Use the Accounts application to edit or delete an online
account), log in to the account on your computer and delete any
duplicate data, and then add the account to your device again (see
Use the Accounts application to set up an online account).
• If the events are in your HP webOS Account, turn off Backup (see Erase
HP webOS Account information from the server), delete the duplicate
calendar events on your device (see Delete an event), and then turn on
Backup again (see Manually back up information to your HP webOS
Account).
• To upload videos of any size, you need access to the Internet from the
device. To confirm that you have an Internet connection, open a website
(see Go to a website or Search the web).
• To upload to Facebook, you must have installed the Facebook app from
App Catalog on your device, and you must already have an account
set up on the Facebook site. Facebook has a limit of 2 minutes or
100MB for unverified accounts, and 20 minutes or 1GB for verified
accounts (see Download a free application). You also need to add the
Facebook account from the Contacts app or Accounts app, not the
Photos app. If you added the Facebook account from the Photos app,
first delete the Facebook app (see Use the Accounts application to edit
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
• To upload a picture to a web service such as Facebook or Photobucket,
you must already have an account with the service, you must have the
account set up on your device, and you must have access to the Internet
on your device.
• To upload to Facebook, you must have installed the Facebook app from
App Catalog on your device (see Download a free application).
• For information about setting up online picture accounts on your device,
see Set up an online pictures or videos account on your device.
or delete an online account), and then add it from the Contacts app
(see Customize Contacts) or the Accounts app (see Use the Accounts
application to set up an online account).
• To upload a video to YouTube, you must already have an account set up
on the YouTube site. YouTube has an upload limit of 10 minutes or 2GB.
Videos have poor quality during playback
• Low memory on your device may cause video files to play with poor
quality. Close any other open cards and play the video again.
• Try viewing the same file on your computer and observe the video
quality. If the video quality is poor when played on the computer, the
file may be corrupted. Download a new copy of the file to the computer
and try again. If the new file still won’t play on the computer, contact
the content provider for information on the quality of the files.
Print Manager
• Your device is not connected to the network through a VPBN
connection. HP webOS printing does not support printing over VPN
If all of the above are true and your printer is on your corporate network,
you may need to add the printer manually. See Add a printer.
If it seems that your HP printer doesn’t support printing from your HP
TouchPad, a firmware update may be available for the printer that will
enable this feature. Check the documentation that came with your printer
for instructions on downloading and installing a firmware update.
HP webOS App Catalog
NOTE HP supports finding, purchasing, downloading, installing, updating, and
deleting HP webOS App Catalog applications. The app developer cannot assist
with any of these functions.
I can’t print from my HP printer
I can’t find the app I want to download
Your device supports printing on all network-capable HP printers that
support PCL page description language in the local LAN. These printers
include new HP ePrint-capable printers–Photosmart, Officejet, and
LaserJet–as well as legacy printers approximately five years old or newer.
Make sure your printer is turned on and that both your device and the
printer are connected to your local or corporate wireless network. For
personal printers, see the instructions that came with your printer for
information about setting up a printer on a wireless network
There are several sources of applications for your HP TouchPad:
If you are having trouble printing, make sure of the following:
• Your printer is on and is connected to the same network as your HP
TouchPad.
• The printer is connected to the network over Wi-Fi or through an
Ethernet cable. You cannot print using a printer connected via USB to a
computer or a router.
App Catalog. App Catalog is located in the Launcher on webOS devices.
Applications that have been reviewed by HP and meet specific
development standards are included in App Catalog searches. They
appear with a blue background on the App Catalog details page for the
application.
Web distribution. Web distribution apps are located on the Internet and
can be found by visiting precentral.net. Web-distributed apps are
delivered to the device via links and are downloaded and installed using
App Catalog on the device. The app details page for a web app appears
with a gray background. Because web-distributed apps have not been
reviewed by HP, they cannot be found in App Catalog on the device; they
may, however, appear in Software Manager after they are installed.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
187
Beta apps. Beta apps are prerelease versions of applications that are in
the final stages of development. Beta apps are usually delivered to the
device via links and are downloaded and installed using App Catalog on
the device. The app details page for a beta app appears with a green
background and displays a banner that says BETA APP. Beta apps cannot
be found in App Catalog; they may, however, appear in Software
Manager after they are installed.
Homebrew or preware. Homebrew or preware applications are
applications that are developed outside the webOS developer network.
HP cannot assist with finding, purchasing, downloading, installing,
updating, or removing these applications. See I want to install an app on
my device from a source other than HP webOS App Catalog for more
information about homebrew apps.
If you can’t find an application using App Catalog, try the following
steps.
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
• Close HP App Catalog, reopen HP App Catalog, and then try the
search again.
• On a computer, go to precentral.net. On precentral.net, do the
following:
• Click the apps link at the top of the page and select App Gallery.
• Under App Catalog Apps, enter the name of the application, and
click Search.
• Under Web Dist Apps, enter the app name and click Search.
• Under Beta apps, enter the app name and click Search.
• If you find the app, click the link Download Now - webOS Link
below the application image. When prompted, enter your mobile
phone number. Click Send to my phone. HP sends a text message
to your device with a link to the application in App Catalog. After
the text message arrives, tap the link.
• Go to the app developer’s website and confirm the app name
(including spelling) and that the app is available for webOS.
• If the app is not available for webOS, contact the developer to
find out if a webOS version will be available soon.
188
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
• If the app name you used in previous searches was not correct, go
to precentral.net and repeat the steps with the correct name and
spelling. If the app still doesn’t appear, the app is not currently
available for your device through the webOS distribution
channels. There are several reasons why this may occur. For
example, the app may not be compatible with your device model,
the app may not be supported in your region, or the app may be
a homebrew app. .
• Try looking for another app that provides similar features.
I am having trouble purchasing an app
• If you see a charge of exactly $1.00, the $1.00 charge has been
applied by the online retailer as a credit validation charge. This is a
temporary charge that should be removed shortly. If the charge is not
removed after 24 hours, get help by doing the following: Go to
hpwebos.com/support. Select your device and click Support Services.
Select one of the support options.
• If you have been charged multiple times for the same app, you must
provide proof to HP. If the charge is not removed after 24 hours, get
help by doing the following: Go to hpwebos.com/support. Select your
device and click Support Services. Select one of the support options.
• If App Catalog requests that you enter your billing information after you
already entered it, this means that HP reset your account due to billing
address inconsistencies. Re-enter your billing address in App Catalog
(see Update or delete a billing account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Card Validation” (credit card number
and card type do not match), this means that the credit card number is
valid, but does not match the credit card type. Verify and correct your
card information (see Update or delete a billing account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Card Validation” (country and credit
information are set incorrectly), this means that the credit card number
is not valid for the country in which your device was activated. Verify
and correct your credit card information (see Update or delete a billing
account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Couldn’t Add Credit Card,” this means
that the credit card information could not be added to your account.
The Address Validation Service is temporarily unavailable. Try again
later to add the credit card information (see Update or delete a billing
account).
• If you receive an alert that says “Couldn’t update,” try again later to
update your credit card information (see Update or delete a billing
account).
I’m having trouble downloading an application through HP
webOS App Catalog
• If you have another version of the app installed on the device without
using App Catalog, delete it before installing the App Catalog version.
All applications have a unique App ID, even those that did not originate
in App Catalog. Your webOS device can serve only one App ID
instance at any given time.
• If you received an error message that there is not enough room to install
the app, make space for the new application by deleting another
application (see Delete an application).
IMPORTANT Information stored in an application is stored only within the
application, so you cannot access this info after you delete the app. Before you
delete an app, write down any info you want to save. Alternatively, you can
save a screen capture of relevant info by briefly pressing and holding the power
button + Center. Screens you capture are saved in the screencaptures folder in
Photos & Videos.
Table 1. App Download Status Icons
Icon
Description
The download or installation of the app failed. Tap the
icon and follow the prompts to fix the issue.
The app is currently downloading.
The app download is currently paused. Tap the icon to
resume the download.
The application is already on your device. The icon
indicates that a new version is available. You can tap the
icon to download and install the new version at any
time. Look on the bottom of the Downloads page in the
Launcher to find your app.
• Make sure your device is connected to a Wi-Fi network (see Icons in the
title bar).
• Restart your device, and then try the download again (see Restart your
device).
I’m having trouble installing an app from HP webOS App
Catalog
• If you received one of the following errors, the app is not compatible
with your device:
This application is not available for your model.
TIP If you delete an app purchased from App Catalog, you don’t have to
purchase the application again. Purchased applications are associated with
your HP webOS Account (see Reinstall a deleted application).
• Look for the app in Software Manager (see Manage applications with
Software Manager). You may see one of the following icons to the right
of the app name:
This application is not available for your carrier.
This application is not available in your country.
This application cannot run on your current operating system. Use
the System Updates app to install the system update and try again.
This is not a valid webOS application.
• If you received an error message other than the ones shown above,
follow the prompts to reinstall the app.
• Delete the application (see Delete an application).
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
189
TIP If you delete an app purchased from App Catalog, you don’t have to
purchase the application again. Purchased applications are associated with
your HP webOS Account (see Reinstall a deleted application).
If you see issues with your device after a webOS update and you have a
homebrew application installed, use webOS Doctor to restore your device
to factory default settings. A partial or full erase does not return the device
to factory settings after some homebrew apps have been installed. See
T5. Tether your device to your computer and reinstall webOS.
• Restart your device, and then try the download again (see Restart your
device).
I want to install an app on my device from a source other
than HP webOS App Catalog
App Catalog, which includes the on-device catalog and the associated
web and beta distribution channels, is the only officially supported
mechanism for installing applications on your HP TouchPad. Third-party
sources may make applications available for installation on your device
via alternative mechanisms. These apps are sometimes referred to as
“homebrew” apps. Homebrew apps have not been tested and certified
by HP. HP cannot assist with the finding, purchasing, downloading,
installing, or removing of applications that are not from App Catalog.
Installing homebrew applications can modify your webOS device in any
number of ways that may cause your device to behave erratically over
time. While your device may work fine with these applications on the
current version of webOS, it is possible that the application could cause
issues with your device in future versions of webOS.
If you installed an application via a mechanism other than App Catalog,
you may find that you cannot download or install software updates, but
the device continues to prompt you to update. If you have installed such
an application, you need to remove the app before attempting to update
your webOS device. Follow the developer’s instructions on how to
uninstall these apps.
Using your HP TouchPad with an HP webOS
smartphone
The person on the other end of the line hears an echo
Try decreasing the volume on your device—whether you are using the
microphone or a headset—to avoid coupling or feedback on the other
person’s end.
I hear my own voice echo
Ask the person on the other end of the call to turn down the volume on his
or her phone or to hold the phone closer to his or her ear.
My voice is too quiet on the other end
Be sure to position the microphone, which is on the top of the device,
close to your mouth. Make sure you are not covering the microphone with
your finger.
My device doesn’t ring
NOTE Be sure to make a backup copy of any information stored in the app
before you uninstall it. If the developer does not provide a way to back up the
data, you can write down the information to save it. Alternatively, press the
power button + Center to save screen captures of important data to the
screencaptures folder in Photos & Videos.
190
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
• Make sure sounds are turned on: Open Sounds & Ringtones
. If Off
appears next to Sounds, tap Off to change the setting from Off to On.
• Check the ringtone volume: Open Sounds & Ringtones
and drag
the Ringtone Volume slider to the right to increase the ringtone volume.
• If you are using a ringtone you installed, open Sounds & Ringtones
and tap Ringtone. Tap the default ringtone for your device. If selecting
the default ringtone solves the problem, the ringtone you installed is not
working properly. Delete the ringtone you installed from your device by
following the steps in Delete files and folders using USB Drive mode.
My device doesn’t vibrate
• Make sure the vibrate setting is turned on: Open Sounds & Ringtones
. If Off appears next to Vibrate, tap Off to change the setting from
Off to On.
• Tap, hold, and drag the Ringtone Volume slider in either direction. The
device should vibrate, and the ringtone should play.
When I open the folder representing my device on my
computer, I see subfolders. Do I need to move my files into
these folders?
The default folders are there to help you organize files you copy to and
from your computer. But you can copy files from your computer into any
folder you want—you can create your own folders, or just drag your files
to the top level of the drive. As long as the file is in a supported format,
your device can detect and open it.
I want to transfer files from my device to my computer, but the
screen is cracked or doesn’t respond to taps, so I can’t access
USB Drive mode
Transferring information to and from your
computer
If you can’t put your device in USB Drive mode using the screen, you can
use a button combination. Connect your device to your computer using
the USB cable, and then press and hold the power button + volume
down.
When I connect my device to my computer, I don’t get the
prompt to put the device in USB Drive mode
Backing up and restoring data
Check the title bar at the top of the screen. If the USB
icon is displayed,
tap the icon to open the dashboard. To put your device in USB Drive
mode, tap the USB Drive dashboard item.
I need to reset my device but don’t understand the difference
among the erase options
The four erase options are as follows:
I copied files from my computer, but I can’t see or play them
on my device
When you connect your device to your computer in USB Drive mode, you
can copy any file onto your device. However, each media application on
your device—Photos & Videos and Music—can display or play files in
certain file formats only. If your media file is in an unsupported format,
you can’t use it on your device.
For a list of supported photo and video file types, see Photos & Videos.
For a list of supported music file types, see Music.
Erase Apps & Data: Erases all application data and settings, as well as
any applications you installed from App Catalog.
Erase USB Drive: Erases all files stored in USB drive storage, such as
pictures, videos, and music.
Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you installed, and
USB drive storage files. Select this option if you want a clean erase of
your currently installed apps and files but plan to continue using the
device.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
191
Secure Full Erase: Erases application data and settings, apps you
installed, and USB drive storage files. Select this option if you are
planning to give the device away, and you want your data and files to be
unrecoverable even using a third-party tool.
For more information, see Erase data and reset your device.
My bookmarks were restored, but the thumbnail icon is not
displaying
Web bookmarks are part of the data backed up to your HP webOS
Account. After a partial or full erase, a bookmark is restored with a
generic thumbnail icon. After you revisit the page for which you created
the bookmark, the thumbnail icon is restored.
How do I get my data back after a full or partial erase?
After you perform one of the erase options, on your device, enter your
existing HP webOS Account email address and password—don’t create a
new one! When you do this, all data that has been backed up to your
profile—contacts, and calendar events, as well as apps you bought
through App Catalog—is restored to your device. To restore information
about your online accounts to your device, simply enter the password for
each account when prompted after the erase—synchronization begins
again.
The Erase USB Drive option and the two full erase options delete
everything stored in your device’s USB drive (pictures, videos, music,
documents, PDF files, and so on). You need to have copies of those files
available elsewhere if you want to restore them to your device. For
example, you can save copies on your computer and then transfer them
back to your device (see Copy files between your device and your
computer).
I want to do a full erase, but the screen is cracked or doesn’t
respond to taps
If you can’t do a full erase using the screen, you can use a button
combination. Press and hold the power button + volume down +
Center
for 10 seconds.
System Updates
I dismissed a system update notification, and now I don’t
know how to get the update on my device
If you have a Wi-Fi network connection and the battery has at least a
30% charge, you can start the update yourself: Open System Updates
. Your device checks for the availability of the update, and if one is
available, tap Download Now. The download happens in the
background, so you can continue to use your device until the actual
installation takes over.
Your device continues to remind you to install the update after it has been
downloaded. You are also reminded that the device will install the update
automatically the next time you charge your device. An update
installation cannot begin unless you have at least a 30% charge on your
battery. If you tap Install Later, the update will automatically install the
next time the following conditions are true: the device is charging and
idle, and the battery has at least a 30% charge.
My device froze while I was downloading or installing a
system update
If this happens, you can use webOS Doctor to restore your device and
install the system update from your computer using the USB cable. On
your computer, go to hpwebos.com/support to download webOS Doctor.
192
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
Hands-free devices
I can’t make or receive calls using a Bluetooth® hands-free
device
If you are making and receiving calls through a connected HP webOS
smartphone, you can’t use your device to transfer the audio from your
device to a Bluetooth headset. You can, however, connect the smartphone
to a Bluetooth headset—this automatically disconnects the smartphone
from your device and transfers the call audio to the headset.
If you are on a Skype voice call and are having trouble using a Bluetooth
headset, try the following:
• If you have earphones connected to your device, disconnect them.
• Restart your device (see Restart your device).
• Verify that the hands-free device is compatible with your device. Go to
hpwebos.com/support to see a list of supported devices.
NOTE This list contains only devices that have been tested for compatibility. It is
possible that a device that does not appear on the list may be compatible with
your HP TouchPad.
• Make sure that the Bluetooth feature is turned on (see Turn the Bluetooth
feature on/off).
• Make sure that your device is paired with your hands-free device, and
the hands-free device appears in the Devices list (see Connect with a
paired device).
• Make sure that the volume on the hands-free device and on your device
is set loud enough to hear.
• Make sure your Bluetooth hands-free device is charged and turned on.
• Make sure that your device is within range of the hands-free device.
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet (10 meters) in optimum environmental
conditions, which include the absence of obstacles, radio interference
from nearby electronic equipment, and other factors.
• Make sure that you are away from other devices using the 2.4GHz
radio frequency, such as cordless phones and microwaves. If this is
impossible, move the device closer to the hands-free device.
I lost the connection between my device and my Bluetooth
headset
If your headset isn’t working, delete the existing pairing (see Delete a
device) and create a new one (see Set up and use a Bluetooth®
hands-free device).
I hear static or interference when using my hands-free device
•
•
•
•
Be sure your hands-free device has a sufficient battery charge.
Move to a quieter location to reduce environmental noise.
Try placing the device and the headset on the same side of the body.
Try moving your HP TouchPad closer to the hands-free device. Audio
quality degrades as the distance between your device and the
hands-free device increases. The effective range for a hands-free device
varies among manufacturers.
• Confirm that no obstructions, including your body, are between the HP
TouchPad and your hands-free device. Items such as furniture, people,
or walls that are in the path between the headset and the device will
impair audio quality.
Some features of my hands-free device don’t work with my HP
TouchPad
• Check the compatibility list at hpwebos.com/support to ensure that
your device is compatible with your HP TouchPad.
• Even if the hands-free device is compatible with your HP TouchPad, your
HP TouchPad may not support all the features of the device. Check the
documentation that came with your hands-free device or the
manufacturer’s website for feature-compatibility information between
the device and your HP TouchPad.
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
193
Making room on your device
If you store a large number of files, or install many applications, the
internal memory on your device may fill up. Here are some ways to clear
space on your device:
• Photos & Videos, Music, Quickoffice, Adobe Reader: Large files take up
a lot of memory. Move files to your computer (see Copy files between
your device and your computer), or delete them from your device.
• Email: Email attachments can be large and consume lots of memory.
Copy attachments to your computer (see Copy files between your
device and your computer), or delete large files from your device
(see Delete a message). You may also want to empty the deleted items
folder.
• Messaging: If you do a lot of text messaging, delete messages or
conversations (see Delete a message or Delete a conversation).
• Web: Delete stored web browsing information by clearing your history,
cookies, and cache (see Customize web browser settings).
• Third-party applications: You can delete infrequently used applications
(see Delete an application).
194
Chapter 15 : Troubleshooting
A Terms
airplane mode
A mode in which all the wireless services on your device are turned off.
Wireless services include the Wi-Fi feature, VPN, and Bluetooth® wireless
technology. See Turn wireless services off (airplane mode).
application menu
A menu hidden in the upper-left corner of the screen that lists items
available in an application, such as preferences and application help. To
open the application menu, drag down from the upper-left corner of the
device (above the screen) onto the screen, or tap the application name in
the upper-left corner of the screen. See Use the application menu for
details. See also system menu.
application search
A search feature that is available after you open certain applications. To
search, simply tap the search field (where available) and begin typing a
search term—for example, a contact name or phone number, the subject
text of an email message, or a few words from a memo. See also Just
Type.
application update
An update from the developer of an application you installed through HP
webOS App Catalog on your device. You can check for application
updates manually in Software Manager. Additional fees may apply. See
Manually check for application updates.
card
A minimized view of an open application. You can easily move among
and reorder cards in Card view. To reduce the app you’re working in to a
card, press Center
(see Center). Tap a card to restore the full-screen
view of the application and continue working in it. See also Card view. A
group of related cards appears in Card view as a card stack. See Work
with stacked cards for information.
Card view
The view on your device that displays all open applications as minimized
cards, allowing you to easily move among and reorder them. The
background of Card view is your wallpaper. Don’t confuse Card view
with the Launcher (see Launcher), which shows you all the apps installed
on your device, not just the open ones. To get to Card view when an app
is displayed full-screen, press Center
.
Center
The button in the center of the area below the screen. Press to display
Card view or the Launcher, or to turn on the screen if it is turned off.
dashboard
A list of all your notifications. When one or more notification icons
appear at the top of the screen, tap the icons to open the dashboard. Tap
a dashboard item to act on it. See also notification.
drag
A slow movement of your finger on the touchscreen used, for example, to
scroll slowly through a list or move an icon in the Launcher. See Use
gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch.
DRM-free file
A file that is not protected by Digital Rights Management. DRM-free files
can be copied as many times as you like and can be played on your
device.
Exhibition
A feature of your device that allows you to access apps specially
designed for use while the device is placed on an HP Touchstone (see
Exhibition).
A : Terms
195
favorite
A contact that you identify as someone you want to be able to quickly
reach. Creating a favorite from a contact lets you view and touch base
with that contact in just a few taps. You can create and manage favorites
in Contacts (see Create a favorite) and in Phone & Video Calls (see Work
with favorites).
flick
A fast skimming of your finger vertically on the touchscreen used, for
example, to scroll quickly up or down. See Use gestures: Tap, swipe,
drag, flick, pinch.
HP webOS
The operating system of your HP TouchPad. Key features of HP webOS
include gestures, cards, merged views, and linked contacts.
HP webOS Account
An HP webOS Account gives you access to services like automatic
updates, backup of your data, and more. You create an HP webOS
Account by entering a working email address during initial setup of your
HP TouchPad (see Set up your device). Your HP webOS Account also
identifies the location on the web where the data you store in your HP
webOS Account is backed up. (You cannot see or change this data on the
web, however.)
You can assign contacts and calendar events to your HP webOS Account.
HP webOS Account items are included in the daily backup of information
to your HP webOS Account online but do not synchronize with any of
your online accounts.
Just Type
The feature, formerly known as universal search, that enables you to
search for applications and contacts on your device, and search the web
simply by tapping Just type in Card view and typing the search term. You
can also use Quick Actions to create new items such as email messages,
calendar events, or memos by entering all or part of the item’s text. See
Just Type.
Launcher
A group of screens (called pages) that display all your applications. To
open the Launcher, tap
in Quick Launch (see Quick Launch), or from
the active application, press Center
to get to Card view, and then tap
196
A : Terms
. In the Launcher, tap Apps to see all your core apps, tap Downloads
to see apps you downloaded, or tap Settings to see all your preference
apps. Tap, hold, and drag an app icon from any page to add it to your
Favorites page. Tap an app icon to open the application.
linked contact
A contact containing information from more than one source. For
example, if you have a work contact in Exchange and a personal contact
for the same person in Google, the Contacts application automatically
recognizes the connection and links the two contacts so you can see all
the information for a person in the same place—but the information is
kept separate in the different accounts where it originated. You can also
manually link and unlink contacts.
merged view
A feature on your device that displays data from several sources in a
single view, but keeps the sources of your data separate.
Let’s say you use Google calendar for your personal events and your
company’s Exchange calendar for business events. Your device’s
Calendar application displays events from both calendars in a single
view.
Likewise, if you set up multiple email accounts, the Email application
displays the messages from all your account inboxes in a single folder,
called All Inboxes, that can be set up to appear at the top of the Account
List panel in the Email app (see Set email preferences). And in
Messaging, all your messages with the same person show up in a single
conversation, whether they are text or instant messages. See also linked
contact.
notification
A message that appears at the top of the screen alerting you of an
incoming email or instant message; an upcoming event; and more. In
most cases, you can tap a notification to act on it. See also dashboard.
Throw a notification off the side of the screen to dismiss it.
online account
The HP Synergy feature makes it easy to synchronize all data from an
online account. An online account is a web-based or server-based
location where you keep contacts and/or calendar information, such as
Google or Exchange. (Such web-based or server-based accounts are
sometimes talked about as being “in the cloud.”) You can access the info
in those accounts in the Contacts and Calendar applications on your
device. You can also set up your device to download contacts from online
accounts such as Facebook, and to view photos and videos in online
accounts such as Facebook or Snapfish. See Online accounts available
for webOS devices.
pinch
A gesture used to zoom in for a magnified view or zoom out to see a
larger area. To zoom in, you pinch out: Place the thumb and index
fingertips close together on the touchscreen; then slowly spread them
apart. To zoom out, you pinch in: Place the thumb and index fingertips
apart on the touchscreen, and slowly bring them together.
Quick Launch
A lineup of up to five icons, plus the Launcher, that give you quick access
to your favorite applications. By default, Quick Launch displays icons for
the following apps: Web, Email, Calendar, Messaging, and Photos &
Videos. The sixth icon is the Launcher. You can easily drag icons onto and
off of the Quick Launch bar to change the lineup of apps (see Line up your
favorite applications in Quick Launch).
Quick Launch always appears at the bottom of Card view and the
Launcher. Tap an icon to open the app.
smart folder
One of two folders—All Inboxes and All Flagged—that can be set to
appear at the top of the Account List panel in the Email application. See
Set email preferences.
technology, change the screen brightness, turn on/off the screen rotation
lock, and turn system sounds on/off. To open the system menu, drag
down from the upper-right corner of the device (above the screen) onto the
screen, or tap the upper-right corner of the screen. See Use the system
menu for details. See also application menu and airplane mode.
system update
Updates provided to HP webOS and core applications such as Contacts
and Calendar. When a system update is available, a notification appears
on your device. You can also check for system updates manually. See
Update the HP webOS operating system.
tap
A light quick touch on the touchscreen used, for example, to open an app
by tapping its icon. Use your fingertip to tap. Don’t use your fingernail,
and don’t use a pen or pencil—the screen does not respond to touches
like that. Also, don’t bear down. Make the tap firmly, but lightly. See Use
gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch.
Touch to Share
If you have a web page open on your HP TouchPad or on a webOS
smartphone, simply touch the devices to transfer the page from one device
to the other. If your smartphone and your HP TouchPad use the same HP
webOS Account, you can also touch the two to create a Bluetooth pairing
between them. Touch to Share works with certain webOS smartphones
only. See What is Touch to Share?.
swipe
A light, fast horizontal skimming of your finger on the touchscreen used,
for example, to go from page to page in the Launcher or from day to day
in Calendar. See Use gestures: Tap, swipe, drag, flick, pinch.
Synergy feature
The feature that lets you take advantage of merged views and linked
contacts on your device. See Your HP TouchPad.
system menu
A menu hidden in the upper-right corner of the screen that lets you turn
on/off wireless connection features such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® wireless
A : Terms
197
198
A : Terms
B Online accounts available for webOS devices
Table 1. Online accounts available for HP webOS devices*
Account
Applications that display
data from this account
Relationship between
device and online
account**
Can I edit and add data
to this account on my
device?
Can I edit and add data
to this account on the
web?
What happens when I
delete this account from
one app?***
AIM
Messaging
Sync
Yes
Yes
The account is removed
from all apps
Box.net
Adobe Reader,
Quickoffice
Adobe Reader: Transfer
(from web to device)
Adobe Reader: Delete
files on device
Yes
The account is removed
from all apps
Quickoffice: Transfer
(from web to device)
Quickoffice: Delete files
on device
Adobe Reader: Transfer
(from web to device)
Adobe Reader: Delete
files on device
Yes
The account is removed
from all apps
Quickoffice: Transfer
(from web to device)
Quickoffice: Delete files
on device
Dropbox
Adobe Reader,
Quickoffice
Exchange
Contacts, Calendar,
Email
Sync
Yes
Yes****
Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps
Facebook
Contacts, Calendar,
Photos & Videos
Contacts, Calendar:
Transfer (from web to
device)
No
Contacts and Calendar
only
Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps
Yes
Yes
Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps
Photos & Videos: Transfer
(from web to device)
Google
Contacts, Calendar,
Messaging, Email,
Quickoffice, Adobe
Reader
Sync
B : Online accounts available for webOS devices
199
Table 1. Online accounts available for HP webOS devices*
Account
Applications that display
data from this account
Relationship between
device and online
account**
Can I edit and add data
to this account on my
device?
Can I edit and add data
to this account on the
web?
What happens when I
delete this account from
one app?***
HP webOS
Account
Contacts, Calendar,
Memos; see Backup for
full list of affected info
See Backup for details
Yes
No
See Backup for details
LinkedIn
Contacts
Transfer (from web to
device)
No
Yes
Only info in Contacts is
deleted
Photobucket
Photos & Videos
Transfer (from web to
device)
No
Yes
Only info in Photos &
Videos is deleted
Skype
Contacts, Messaging
Contacts: Transfer (from
web to device)
Contacts: No
Messaging: Yes
Contacts: Yes
Messaging: Yes
The account is removed
from all apps
Messaging: Sync
Snapfish
Photos & Videos
Transfer (from web to
device)
No
Yes
Only info in Photos &
Videos is deleted
Yahoo!
Contacts, Calendar,
Messaging, Email
Contacts: Transfer (from
web to device)
Calendar: Sync
Contacts: No
Calendar: Yes
Yes
Only info in that app is
deleted; info remains in
other apps
The frequency with which data is synced or transferred between the device and online accounts depends on the account you are using. For information about
account sync intervals, go to kb.hpwebos.com and search for article number 47817.
*The information contained in this table is subject to change with webOS updates.
**Sync: A two-way exchange and update of your data. What you add or change in one location is automatically added or changed in the other.
Transfer: A one-way update of your data. You can add or change data only in one location; the data is then copied to the other location.
***Only the data on your device is deleted. The data source is not affected. If you delete an account from your device using the Accounts app, all data from that
account is removed from all apps associated with the account.
****You can also edit and add data to an Exchange account from a desktop application, such as Outlook.
200
B : Online accounts available for webOS devices
C Specifications
Table 1. Specifications
Category
Description
Processor technologies
• Qualcomm Snapdragon dual-CPU APQ8060
Battery
• Rechargeable lithium-polymer (nonremovable)
• 6300 mA/hr power capacity typical
Operating system
• HP webOS 3.0
Camera
• Front-facing 1.3-megapixel webcam
Size
• 9.45 in. x 7.48 in. x 0.54 in. (240 mm x 190 mm x 13.7 mm)
Weight
• 1.6 pounds (740 grams)
Operating temperature range
• 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
• 10% to 90% RH
Connectivity
• Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g/n with WPA, WPA2, WEP, 802.1x authentication
• Bluetooth® wireless technology 2.1 + EDR with A2DP (stereo Bluetooth) support
Display
•
•
•
•
Keyboard
• Virtual
Sensors
•
•
•
•
9.7 inch (246.38 mm) XGA capacitive, multitouch screen with IPS (In-Plane Switching)
18-bit color
Resolution: 1024 x 768
User-adjustable brightness
Ambient light
Accelerometer
Compass (magnetometer)
Gyroscope
C : Specifications
201
Table 1. Specifications
202
Category
Description
Memory
• 16GB or 32GB*
• USB mass storage support
• 1GB RAM
Connector
• microUSB connector with USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Speakers
• Internal stereo speakers with Beats AudioTM
Back cover (nonremovable)
• Compatible with the HP Touchstone for TouchPad charging dock (sold separately)
Included HP webOS applications
(at time of purchase)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C : Specifications
Calendar
Contacts
Email
HP webOS App Catalog
Memos
Messaging
Music
Phone & Video Calls
Photos & Videos
VPN
Web
Table 1. Specifications
Category
Description
Included configuration and
preference applications (at time of
purchase)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Included third-party applications
(at time of purchase)
• Adobe Reader
• Maps
• Quickoffice (DOC, DOCX, XLS, XLSX, PPT, PPTX)
Accounts
Backup
Bluetooth
Date & Time
Device Info
Exhibition
Help
Just Type
Location Services
Print Manager
Regional Settings
Screen & Lock
Software Manager
Sounds & Ringtones
System Updates
Text Assist
Wi-Fi
* To find out how much memory your device has: Open Device Info
and look at the Memory field under Device.
C : Specifications
203
204
C : Specifications
D Important safety and legal information
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS (“AGREEMENT”) BEFORE
USING, DOWNLOADING OR OTHERWISE ACCESSING THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES
PROVIDED ON OR THROUGH YOUR HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY (“HP”) DEVICE. THE
SOFTWARE AND SERVICES PROVIDED ON OR THROUGH YOUR HP DEVICE ARE
LICENSED BY HP TO YOU, THE ORIGINAL END USER, SOLELY FOR YOUR PERSONAL USE
AS SET FORTH BELOW. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE, DOWNLOAD OR OTHERWISE ACCESS THE
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES. USING, DOWNLOADING, OR OTHERWISE ACCESSING ANY
PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES INDICATES THAT YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS.
PLEASE NOTE THAT IF YOU ARE A CONSUMER IN THE EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA,
SWITZERLAND or AUSTRALIA, THIS AGREEMENT DOES NOT AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY
RIGHTS. For further information about your statutory rights contact your local authority,
Trading Standards Department or Citizens Advice Bureau (OR LOCAL EQUIVALENT).
LICENSE: HP grants you a limited, nonexclusive license to use HP proprietary software
program(s) and services found on your HP device and/or packaged with, provided with, or
made accessible through your HP device, or provided by HP for use with your HP device,
including any updates to such software provided to you through any means, including but
not limited to downloads or over-the-air updates (the “Software”), subject to the terms and
conditions set forth in this Agreement, as well as any other terms that may be incorporated
by reference herein or otherwise presented to you prior to your use of the Software. You are
not permitted to use the Software in any manner not expressly authorized by this Agreement.
You acknowledge and agree that ownership of the Software, end user documentation and
all subsequent copies thereof, regardless of the form or media, is retained by HP or its
suppliers, and are protected by law, including but not limited to United States copyright,
trade secret, and trademark law, as well as other applicable laws and international treaty
provisions. You shall not remove any product identification, copyright notices or proprietary
restrictions from the Software or any end user documentation.
SOFTWARE UPDATES: From time to time, you may receive Software updates for your HP
device through either tangible media, download or over the air (a “Software Update”). Such
Software Updates either will be mandatory and free of additional charge (“Mandatory
Software Update”) or may require an additional fee (“Paid Software Update”). Mandatory
Software Updates will provide patches or error corrections or enable new functionality for
your HP device. In many cases, Mandatory Software Updates will be pushed to you during
periods of decreased usage, e.g., at night or early morning. You hereby acknowledge and
agree that such Mandatory Software Updates may be installed on your HP device without
any further notification to you or consent from you. Upon installation, the Mandatory
Software Update shall be deemed Software under this Agreement, and all the same terms
and conditions shall apply as they would to any Software under this Agreement.
Occasionally, you may also be asked if you would like to accept a Paid Software Update,
which may provide additional functionality. These updates will not be mandatory and you
will always be asked for your consent. Upon your consent and installation of any Paid
Software Update, the update shall be deemed Software under this Agreement, and all the
same terms and conditions shall apply as they would to any Software under this Agreement.
RESTRICTIONS: The Software is licensed for use only on the single HP device you originally
purchased, and you may not distribute or make the Software available over a network or for
use with multiple devices. The Software and supporting documentation may be copied only
as necessary for backup or archive purposes in support of your use of the Software. You
must reproduce and include all copyright notices and any other proprietary rights notices
appearing on the Software on any copies that you make. You may not modify or alter the
Software in any way, and may only use the Software as expressly set forth above. You agree
that you will not attempt to, or assist or encourage any other person or entity to circumvent,
disable or modify any security technology or software that is part of the Software or is used
on your HP device. Except as set forth above, HP and its licensors reserve all other rights in
or to the Software. If applicable law permits you to copy or modify the Software, then you
may copy and modify the Software solely to the extent, and for such purposes as, expressly
permitted by applicable law. For further information on the circumstances in which such
copying and modification may be permissible, please contact your local authority, trading
standards department, citizens’ advice bureau or local equivalent.
HP HAS THE RIGHT TO MODIFY, CHANGE OR TERMINATE YOUR USE OF ANY SOFTWARE
OR APPLICATIONS FOUND ON OR USED THROUGH THE DEVICE: HP reserves the right, at its
sole discretion and at any time, to add, remove, or modify any Software, and to add,
remove or modify any applications found on the device or services accessed through the
device. HP may be required to take these actions due to changes in the obligations or
restrictions from its third party licensors or partners, or due to safety or security concerns or
any governmental restriction or court order.
HP HAS THE RIGHT TO MODIFY THESE TERMS: HP reserves the right to modify the terms of
this Agreement at its sole discretion at any time to the maximum extent permitted by
applicable law. Any such modification will be effective upon HP’s sending notice to you by
email, text message, or postal mail. Your continued use of the Software after such notice will
constitute your binding acceptance of the Agreement as revised. Additionally, some
Software may be subject to different or additional terms (including fees) presented to you
through a separate click-through or other type of agreement or notice prior to your use of
such Software.
D : Important safety and legal information
205
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AND SERVICES: Some of the software or services which may be
packaged with, provided with, or made accessible through your HP device, may be
provided by third parties (the “Third Party Software”) and may be subject to different or
additional terms and conditions of use. Third Party Software may also be available from
application stores which can be accessed from your device. Third Party Software is not
provided by HP, and the terms and conditions of use for Third Party Software may be
presented to you through click-through or another type of agreement prior to your use of the
Third Party Software. Third Party Software may contain ads, and you acknowledge that such
ads are not provided by HP or its distribution partners. Additionally, you should be aware
that such Third Party Software may implement third party technologies in accordance with
one or more industry standards (“Standards-Based Software”). Such Standards- Based
Software may require licenses from one or more third party entities. Such licenses are not
provided by HP and you should contact the provider of such Third Party Software for more
information on how to obtain such licenses. You solely are responsible for obtaining any
such licenses.
USE OF THIRD PARTY WEB SITES AND SERVICES: The HP device will enable you to access
data and information from your new or existing third party websites and service provider
accounts, such as email, social networking, and product purchasing accounts. Some of
these services or accounts may be made available to you through an application on the HP
device, without having to use the browser. You acknowledge and agree that by entering
your user name and password or account information to access such accounts, you agree to
abide by the terms and conditions under which such services are made available to you by
the third party providing such services. If you do not agree to the terms under which such
services are made available to you by such third parties, you should not access such
accounts or services through your HP device.
DIGITAL CERTIFICATES: The Software contains functionality that allows it to accept digital
certificates issued from HP or third parties. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DECIDING
WHETHER TO RELY ON A CERTIFICATE ISSUED BY HP OR ANY THIRD PARTY. YOUR USE
OF DIGITAL CERTIFICATES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, HP EXCLUDES ALL IMPLIED OR STATUTORY TERMS,
CONDITIONS OR WARRANTIES INCLUDING THOSE AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, SECURITY, OR RELIABILITY OF SUCH DIGITAL
CERTIFICATES.
OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE: This device includes certain open source software (“Open
Source Software”), which are licensed to you subject to the GNU General Public License
(“GPL”), GNU Library/Lesser General Public License (“LGPL”) and/or other licenses,
disclaimers and notices (“Open Source License Terms”). The applicable Open Source
License Terms for the corresponding Open Source Software are reproduced and can be
viewed on your device and are also available at http://opensource.palm.com. Please refer
to the Open Source License Terms regarding your rights under such licenses to the Open
Source Software. Use of the Open Source Software by you shall be governed entirely by the
terms and conditions of the corresponding Open Source License Terms. Questions regarding
Open Source Software included or incorporated in the Software can be directed to
opensourcequestions@palm.com. Source code for certain of the Open Source Software is
available at http://opensource.palm.com. You may obtain a machine-readable copy of that
source code by written request to HP’s subsidiary, Palm, Inc. at:
Palm, Inc.
Attention: Open Source Compliance
950 W. Maude Ave
Sunnyvale, CA 94085 USA
206
D : Important safety and legal information
HP may require an administrative fee to provide physical copies of such Open Source
Software. This offer is valid for a period of three (3) years from the date of your acceptance
of this Agreement.
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA: You agree that HP, its affiliates and designated agent may
collect and use technical and related information, gathered in any manner, as part of
product support services related to the Software. HP, its affiliates and designated agent may
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide customized services or
technologies to you. HP will collect and use this information in accordance with its privacy
policy and in accordance with applicable data protection laws. Palm, its affiliates and
designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
ASSIGNMENT: You may transfer the Software to another party together with the transfer of
any device, if such party accepts the terms and conditions of this Agreement. If you transfer
the Software, you must at the same time either transfer all copies of the Software as well as
the supporting documentation to the same party or destroy any such materials not
transferred. Upon transfer of the Software, your license is automatically terminated.
REVERSE ENGINEERING: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the
Software, except and only to the extent that such activity is mandated under applicable law.
WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMERS: IF SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED TO YOU IN
CONNECTION WITH A HP DEVICE WHICH YOU HAVE NEWLY PURCHASED FROM HP OR ITS
AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTORS, THE SOFTWARE MAY BE UNDER A WARRANTY, AS PROVIDED
ON A LIMITED WARRANTY CARD PROVIDED WITH YOUR NEW DEVICE. SOME STATES/
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IN ITS ENTIRETY. ADDITIONALLY, PLEASE NOTE
THAT IF YOU ARE DEALING AS A CONSUMER IN THE EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA
OR SWITZERLAND, SUCH LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT AFFECT YOUR STATUTORY
RIGHTS. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS, PLEASE
CONTACT YOUR LOCAL AUTHORITY, TRADING STANDARDS DEPARTMENT, CITIZENS’
ADVICE BUREAU OR LOCAL EQUIVALENT. EXCEPT AS MAY BE PROVIDED UNDER SUCH
A WARRANTY FOR NEWLY PURCHASED DEVICES, AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT
USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
TO YOU ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND OR NATURE. HP DOES NOT WARRANT THAT USE OF THE SOFTWARE
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED, FAULT-TOLERANT OR ERROR FREE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, HP AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY 5 DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY TERMS, CONDITIONS OR WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE,
ACCURACY, CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. HP MAKES NO WARRANTY, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH REGARD TO ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR OPEN SOURCE SOFTWARE. ALL THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND BY HP.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: NOTHING IN THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY LIMITS OR
EXCLUDES HP’S OR ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED
BY NEGLIGENCE, FOR REPRESENTATIONS MADE FRAUDULENTLY, OR FOR ANY OTHER
LIABILITY WHICH CANNOT BE LIMITED OR EXCLUDED BY APPLICABLE LAW. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER HPNOR ITS SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS
OF BUSINESS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE LICENSE OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER THEORY, EVEN
IF HP HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF ANY
LIMITED REMEDY IS DEEMED TO HAVE FAILED OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. HP’S ENTIRE
LIABILITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPLACEMENT, REPAIR, OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE
PRICE PAID, AT HP’S OPTION. IN NO EVENT WILL HPBE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, EXEMPLARY, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR OPEN
SOURCE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES OR LOSSES. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of implied warranties or the limitation of incidental or consequential damages so
the above limitations and exclusions may be limited in their application to you.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You shall comply with all laws and regulations of the United States,
European Union and other countries (“Export Laws”) to assure that the Software Product is
not (1) exported, directly or indirectly, in violation of Export Laws, or (2) used for any
purpose prohibited by Export Laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical, or
biological weapons proliferation.
TERM AND TERMINATION: This Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it
at any time by destroying the Software and documentation together with all copies and
merged portions in any form. It will also terminate immediately if you commit a material
breach of this Agreement. Upon such termination you agree to destroy the Software and
documentation, together with all copies. Some countries, states, or provinces do not allow
the termination of this type of Agreement, so the above provision may be limited in its
application to you.
SPECIAL RIGHTS FOR THE LICENSE OR USE BY THE U.S. GOVERNMENT: If this Software is
being used by or licensed to the United States Government, the following shall apply: The
Software licensed under this Agreement is “commercial computer software” as the term is
described in 48 C.F.R. 252.227- 7014(a)(1). If acquired by or on behalf of a civilian agency,
the U.S. Government acquires this commercial computer software and/or commercial
computer software documentation subject to the terms of this Agreement as specified in 48
C.F.R. 12.212 (Computer Software) and 48 C.F.R. 12.211 (Technical Data) of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations (“FAR”) and its successors. If acquired by or on behalf of any
agency within the Department of Defense (“DOD”), the U.S. Government acquires this
commercial computer software and/ or commercial computer software documentation
subject to the terms of this Agreement as specified in 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-3 of the DOD FAR
Supplement (“DFAR”) and its successors.
GOVERNING LAW: This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California
and by the federal laws of the United States, excluding their conflicts of laws provisions. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (1980) is hereby
excluded in its entirety from application to this Agreement. If you acquired this Software or
the HP device in the European Economic Area or Switzerland, this Agreement shall be
governed by the law of the country in which you purchased the Software or the HP device.
CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT: You represent that you are of legal age of
majority in your state of residence and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your
employer to enter into this Agreement.
SEVERABILITY: In the event any provision of this Agreement is found to be invalid, illegal or
unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of any of the remaining provisions
shall not in any way be affected or impaired.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT: By accepting this Agreement and the accompanying Limited Warranty
(if any), you agree that the Agreement and Limited Warranty set forth the entire agreement
between you and HP, and supersede all prior agreements, whether written or oral, with
respect to the Software, notwithstanding the terms or conditions of any such prior
agreements. Nothing in this Agreement limits or excludes liability for representations made
fraudulently.
This document includes Regulatory, health and safety Compliance and environmental
statements required to be used in Regulatory booklet or user guide.
Regulatory notices
This section contains the legal notices required by the regulatory bodies of your country.
United States
Federal Communications Commission Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this
device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model device with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR
information on this model is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant
section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/fccid/ after searching for FCC ID B94HHI29C.
D : Important safety and legal information
207
Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States Only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference.
2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
If you have questions about the product or this FCC declaration, write to:
Canadian Notice/Avis Canadien
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Hewlett-Packard Company, 950 W. Maude Ave, Sunnyvale, CA 94085
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matériel brouilleur du Canada.
For questions regarding this FCC declaration, call HP at 1-281-514-3333. For general
questions about the product, call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836).
European Union Notice
Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:
To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product.
• Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
Cables
To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be
made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods.
• EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
CE compliance of this product is valid only if powered with the correct CE-marked AC
adapter provided by HP.
WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation The radiated output power
of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during
normal operation is minimized.
If this product has telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential
requirements of the following EU Directive:
The exposure standard for wireless devices employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/Kg. Tests for SAR
are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the device
transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the device
while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is
designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the
power output. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits,
human proximity to the antenna should be minimized. This device has been tested and
demonstrated compliance when Bluetooth and WiFi are transmitting simultaneously. The
highest FCC SAR value for this device when tested for use at the body is 1.29 W/kg. This
device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to harmonized European standards
(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this
product or product family. This compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity
markings placed on the product.
Battery replacement (for product with non removable battery)
Do not attempt to replace the rechargeable battery, the battery may only be replaced by HP
Authorized Service Provider.
Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
208
L ‘utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit
pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’ utilisateur du dispositif doit étre prêt à accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.
D : Important safety and legal information
• R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC
• This CE marking is valid for non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized
telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth®.
• This CE marking is valid for EU non-harmonized telecommunications products.
*If applicable, a notified body number is used. Refer to the regulatory label provided on this
product.
Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany
The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and
EFTA countries:
Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic,
Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom.
The official EU CE declaration of conformity for this device may be found at
http://www.hp.com/go/certificates
EU SAR Notice
THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES.
Your device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to
exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international
guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish
permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by
independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific
studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of
all persons, regardless of age and health.
The exposure standard for devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 W/kg*.
Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting
at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is
determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the device while operating
can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general,
the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. Before a
device is available for sale to the public, compliance with the European R&TTE directive must
be shown. This directive includes as one essential requirement the protection of the health
and the safety for the user and any other person. The highest EU SAR value for this device
when tested for use at the body is 0.434 W/kg.
*The EU SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 W/kg averaged over ten
grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give
additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR
values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band.
Wireless Notices
In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may
apply on board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, etc. If you
are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization
to use it prior to turning on the device.
Airline Travel Notice
Use of electronic equipment aboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline
France
L’utilisation de cet équipement (2,4 GHz Wireless LAN) est soumise a certaines restrictions :
Cet équipement peut être utilisé à l’intérieur d’un bâtiment en utilisant toutes les fréquences
de 2400 à 2483,5 MHz (Chaîne 1-13). Pour une utilisation en environnement extérieur, les
fréquences comprises entre 2400-2454 MHz (Chaîne 1-9) peuvent être utilisées. Pour les
dernières restrictions, voir http://www.arcep.fr.
Italy
E’ necessaria una concessione ministeriale anche per l’uso del prodotto. Verifici per favore
con il proprio distributore o direttamente presso la Direzione Generale Pianificazione e
Gestione Frequenze.
Health and Safety
To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire, and damage to the equipment,
observe the safety precautions in this document.
Acoustics Warning
WARNING! Listening to this device at high volume levels and for extended
durations may damage your hearing. In order to reduce the risk of damage to
hearing, you should lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level, and reduce the
amount of time listening at high levels.
• For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset he volume. Some
headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the
same.
• Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should
only be done with caution.
• HP recommends using the headset delivered with your device or offered through HP as
aftermarket options that are in compliance with EN 50332-1 and EN 50332-2.
General Safety Precautions
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. Read this
information before using your device. For the safe and efficient operation of your device,
observe these guidelines:
Potentially explosive atmospheres: Turn off your device when you are in any areas with a
potentially explosive atmosphere, such as fuelling areas (gas or petrol stations, below deck
on boats), storage facilities for fuel or chemicals, blasting areas and areas near electrical
blasting caps, and areas where there are chemicals or particles (such as metal powders,
grains and dust) in the air.
Interference to personal medical equipment: If you use personal medical equipment, consult
the equipment manufacture to determine if it is shielded from RF signals emission from your
device.
Audio safety: This device is capable of producing loud noises which may damage your
hearing. playing music, at high volume settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss. When using the speakerphone feature, it is recommended that
you place your device at a safe distance from your ear. Other medical devices, hospitals: If
you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to
determine if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your doctor may be able to
assist you in obtaining this information. Turn your device OFF in health care facilities when
any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
D : Important safety and legal information
209
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external
RF energy.
Repetitive motion injuries: When using the keyboard or playing games on your device, you
may experience discomfort in your neck, shoulders, hands, arms or other parts of the body.
To avoid injuries such as tendonitis, carpal tunnel syndrome and other musculoskeletal
disorders,
To minimise the risk of Repetitive Motion Injuries, when texting or playing games with your
device make sure to take lots of breaks to stretch and relax.
Operating machinery: Do not use your device while operating machinery. Full attention must
be given to operating the machinery in order to reduce the risk of an accident.
Vehicles with air bags: Air bags will inflate with great force and care should be taken to
protect yourself and your device within a vehicle that has air bags. Do not place the device
or any of its accessories in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area.
Driving–Do not use the device while driving.
Hearing aids: People with hearing aids or cochlear implants may experience interference
when using wireless devices or when one is nearby. The level of interference will depend on
the type of hearing device and the distance from the interference source. Increasing the
separation between them may reduce the interference. You may also consult your hearing
aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Small children: Do not leave your device and its accessories within the reach of small
children or allow them to play with it. They could hurt themselves or others, or could
accidentally damage the device. Your device contains small parts that may cause an injury
or that could become detached and create a choking hazard. Keep the device away from
the abdomens of pregnant women and adolescents, particularly when using the device
hands-free. To reduce exposure to radiation, use your device in good reception areas.
General statement on handling and use:
• Always treat your device and its accessories with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free
place.
• Do not expose your device or its accessories to any heat source or any product that
produce heat.
• Do not expose your device or its accessories to liquid, moisture or high humidity.
• Do not drop your device or its accessories.
• Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents or aerosols to clean the device or its
accessories.
• Do not paint your device or its accessories.
Device heating: Your device may become warm during charging and during normal use.
Faulty and damaged products: Do not attempt to disassemble the device or its accessories.
210
D : Important safety and legal information
Only qualified personnel must service or repair the device or its accessories. If your device
or an accessory has been submerged in water, punctured or subjected to a severe fall, do
not use it until you have taken it to be checked at an authorized service centre.
ESD Safety: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if
discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence. Make sure
you discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.
Specific Safety Precautions
The following safety precautions need to be taken while using your device.
Power Cords and Accessories
WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment,
do not attempt to power the product with a voltage converter kit sold for
appliances. Use the correct external power source: A product should be operated
only from the type of power source indicated on the electrical ratings label. If you are not
sure of the type of power source required, call Customer Care, your service partner, or local
power company. For a product that operates from battery power or other sources, refer to
the operating instructions that are included with the product.
Avoid overloading the electrical circuit: Do not overload an electrical outlet, power strip, or
convenience receptacle. The overall system load must not exceed 80% of the branch circuit
rating.
If power strips are used, the load should not exceed 80% of the input rating of the power
strip.
Use an approved AC adapter: Only the AC adapter provided with the product, a
replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory
from HP should be used with the product.
Unplug the power properly: Disconnect power from the product by unplugging the power
cord from the electrical outlet. Do not pull on cords and cables. When unplugging the cord
from an electrical outlet, grasp and pull the cord by the plug.
Battery notices
WARNING! The device contains a rechargeable lithium battery which can only be
replaced by HP authorized service personal. To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do
not disassemble the unit.
Handle battery packs carefully: The device contains a rechargeable lithium battery which
can only be replaced by HP authorized service personal.
When a battery pack has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the
battery pack in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in
your area for battery pack disposal. In Europe, dispose of or recycle the battery
packs by using the public collection system or by returning them to HP, your service
partner, or their agents.
Equipment Warning
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, electrical shock, fire or damage to
the equipment:
Plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times.
Disconnect power from the equipment by unplugging the AC adapter from the AC outlet or
unplugging the synchronization cable from the host computer.
Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power your device.
Environmental
Environmental and recycling information
For decades HP has worked to manage its environmental impact by adopting
environmentally responsible practices in product development, operations, and supply
chain. The company strives to be a global leader in reducing its carbon footprint, limiting
waste, and recycling responsibly.
For more information about HP’s commitment to the environment, refer to the following
websites:
• Global Citizenship Report: http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/gcreport/
index.html
• Environmental website: http://www.hp.com/environment
• ISO 14001 Certificate: http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/
operations/envmanagement.html
• Material Substitution and Elimination: http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/
environment/productdesign/materialuse.html
This HP product is designed to comply with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) Directive—2002/96/EC.
The EU WEEE directive (2002/95/EC) requires manufacturers to provide treatment
information for each product type for use by treatment facilities. This information (product
disassembly instructions) is posted on the Hewlett-Packard website at: http://www.hp.com/
go/recyclers
These instructions may be used by recyclers and other WEEE treatment facilities as well as
HP OEM customers who integrate and re-sell HP equipment.
This product does not contain any of the following substances in excess of regulatory limits
(for reference of these limits please refer to the HP General Specification for the Environment
http:// www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/supplychain/
gen_specifications.html
Asbestos, certain azo colorants, certain brominated flame retardants (may not be used as
flame retardants in plastics), cadmium, chlorinated hydrocarbons, chlorinated paraffins,
formaldehyde, halogenated diphenyl methanes, lead carbonates and sulfates, lead and
lead compounds, mercuric oxide batteries, nickel (finishes must not be used on the external
surface designed to be frequently handled or carried by the user), ozone depleting
substances, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs), polybrominated biphenyl ethers (PBBEs),
polybrominated biphenyl oxides (PBBOs), polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), polychlorinated
terphenyls (PCT), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) (except for wires and cables, and certain retail
packaging has been voluntarily removed from most applications), radioactive substances,
tributyl tin (TBT), triphenyl tin (TPT), and tributyl tin oxide (TBTO).
Owner’s Record
The Regulatory Model Number (RMN), US FCC ID, Canada IC number and serial number
are located on the SIM tray. Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will
be helpful if you need to contact us about your device in the future.
Model: HP TouchPad
Recycling and Disposal
This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household
waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing
over your waste equipment to designated collection, please contact your
household waste disposal service.
Serial No.:
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges,
and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, go to
www.hp.com/recycle.
Chemical Substances (REACH)
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances
in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC
No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report
for this product can be found at: http://www.hp.com/go/reach
Hazardous Substances
This product is in compliance with the Restrictions of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)
directive—2002/95/EC.
D : Important safety and legal information
211
212
D : Important safety and legal information
E Use Adobe search
Search one instance at a time
Whole Words Only: By default, the search tool returns any words
that contain your search term, even if the term is part of a longer
word—for example, searching on app returns application also.
Select this option if you want search results that match exactly the
term you enter only.
Adobe search provides a convenient tool for finding information in this
User Guide. You have several options for using the search tool: searching
for items that match your search term one at a time, or displaying a list of
all matching items.
The following instructions apply to Adobe Reader 9 and Adobe Acrobat
9. These instructions are for the full versions of these apps available for
your computer, not for the Adobe Reader app installed on your HP
TouchPad. If you have a different version of Adobe Reader or Adobe
Acrobat, click Help in the application menu bar for instructions on using
search.
TIP To find out what version of Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat you have, click
Help in the application menu bar and look for the option About Adobe Reader x
or About Acrobat x. The x represents the version number.
To search one item at a time, do the following:
Case Sensitive: By default, the search tool ignores the case of the
term you enter—so entering email returns both email and Email.
Select this option if you want search results that match the case of
the term you enter only.
Include Bookmarks/Include Comments: By default, the search tool
searches document text only. Select either or both of these options to
include bookmarks and/or comments in your search results.
4
Press Enter on your keyboard. The search tool highlights the first
instance of your term.
5
To find the next instance of the term, click
instance, click
.
. To find the previous
Display a list of all matching instances
1
With the User Guide open, click the Find box at the top of the
screen.
2
Enter a search term.
To see all items that match your search term in a single list, do the
following:
3
To refine your search, click the arrow to the right of the Find box and
select any of the following:
1
With the User Guide open, click the arrow to the right of the Find
box at the top of the screen.
E : Use Adobe search
213
2
Click Open Full Reader Search or Open Full Acrobat Search. A
separate search window opens
3
Make sure In the current document is selected.
4
Enter a search term.
5
To refine your search, check the boxes to select any of the following:
Whole words only: By default, the search tool returns any words that
contain your search term, even if the term is part of a longer word—
for example, searching on app returns application also. Select this
option if you want search results that match exactly the term you
enter only.
Case-Sensitive: By default, the search tool ignores the case of the
term you enter—so entering email returns both email and Email.
Select this option if you want search results that match the case of
the term you enter only.
Include Bookmarks/Include Comments: By default, the search tool
searches document text only. Select either or both of these options to
include bookmarks and/or comments in your search results.
6
Click Search. A list of all instances of your term appears in the
search window.
7
Double-click an entry in the list to jump to that instance of the term in
the User Guide.
TIP Click Use Advanced Search Options at the bottom of the search window to
access additional search features. With these options, you can enter a
multi-word search term and then choose whether to search all, or any of, the
words in the term. You can also choose to search on only part of a search term
(known as “stemming”). So if you search on application, the search tool would
return app also.
214
E : Use Adobe search